meviy Instruction Manual – For Printing – meviy Europe Instruction Manuals

Depending on the shape and dimensions, we may not be able to provide a quotation even for the following shapes. For details, please refer to the size regulations and design guidelines in this manual.

Shapes

1	Plate

2	Round shape

3	L-shape

4	Z-shape

5	convex-shape

6	U-shape

7	Angle bending (L-shape)

8	Multiple angle bending

9	Tab

10	Cutout in bending

11	Partial bending with cutout

12	Cutout (rectangular)

13	Cutout (U-shape)

14	Notching

Shapes that are difficult to process (typical examples)

There may be cases where we are unable to manufacture the following shapes or others due to the processing limitations of our equipment. In such cases, meviy support will contact you.

1	Connected parts

2	Punching out characters

3	Gear shape

4	Pointed shape

Material: Steel	Surface Treatment	Thickness *1	Dimensions (Length, Width, Height) *2
Material: Steel	Surface Treatment	Thickness *1	Thickness ≤ 2.0 mm	Thickness > 2.0 mm
EN 1.0330 equiv. (EN 1.0320 equiv. [hot coiled]) *12	–	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.3, 3.2, 4.5, 6.0	5–1200	10–1200
	Powder Coating *3	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.3, 3.2, 4.5, 6.0
	Painting *3	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.3, 3.2, 4.5, 6.0
	Electroless Nickel Plating	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.3, 3.2, 4.5, 6.0, 9.0	5–1200 *4	10–1200*4
	Black Oxide
	Trivalent Chromate (clear)
	Trivalent Chromate (Black)	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.3, 3.2, 4.5, 6.0	5–300	10–300
EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	Electrolytic Zinc Plating *5	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.3, 3.2	5–1200	10–1200
EN 1.0330 equiv. (Galvanized)	Galvanized *5	1.6, 2.3	5–1200	10–1200
EN 1.0330 equiv. (for SHIM) *6	–	0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5	Length: 5–850 Width: 5–350	–
EN 1.0038 equiv.	–	9.0, 10.0, 12.0, 16.0	–	20–1200
	Electroless Nickel Plating	9.0
	Black Oxide
	Trivalent Chromate (clear)

Material: Stainless Steel	Finishing Method	Thickness *1	External Dimensions (Length, Width, Height) *2
Material: Stainless Steel	Finishing Method	Thickness *1	Thickness ≤ 2.0 mm	Thickness > 2.0 mm
EN 1.4301 equiv.	No.1	9.0	—	10-1200
	No.1	10.0, 12.0	—	20-1200
	2B	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0	5–1200	10–1200
	Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished *7	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0
	Single-sided hairline finish 7 8	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0
EN 1.4016 equiv.	2B	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0
EN 1.4301 equiv. (for SHIM) *6	—	0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.0	Horizontal (long-side) 5–850 Width (short-side) 5–300	–

Material: Aluminum	Surface Treatment	Thickness *1	External Dimensions (Length, Width, Height) *2
Material: Aluminum	Surface Treatment	Thickness *1	Thickness ≤ 2.0 mm	Thickness > 2.0 mm
EN AW−5052 equiv.	—	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0	5–1200	10–1200
	Anodized (clear)	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0	5–1200 *4	10–1200 *4
	Anodized (Black)	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0	5–1200 *4	10–1200 *4
	Anodize (matt black)	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0 （4.0, 5.0, 6.0）*11	5–1100 *4	10–1100 *4
	Trivalent Chromate Passivation (SurTec 650)	0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.5, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0	5–1000 *4	10–1000 *4
EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear))	Clear Anodize	1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0	5–1100	10–1100
EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	Black Anodize	1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0	5–1100	10–1100

Material: Perforated Metal [EN 1.4301 equiv.] BA	Hole Diameter × Hole Pitch *9	Thickness *1	External Dimensions (Length, Width, Height) *2
Perforated Plate (60° offset)	ø1 × 2p	0.8	30–900
	ø2 × 3p	1.0
	ø3 × 5p	1.0, 1.5
	ø5 × 8p	1.0, 1.5
	ø8 × 12p	1.5

Material	Grade	Color	Plate Thickness *1	Dimension
PET	Standard	Transparent	3.0,5.0,8.0	Width: 10–1000 Length: 10–2000
PET	Standard or Antistatic	Transparent or Smoky Brown	3.0, 5.0
Acrylic	Standard	Transparent	3.0,5.0,8.0,10.0
	Standard or Antistatic	Transparent or Smoky Brown	3.0, 5.0
PC (Polycarbonate)
PVC

Material:Composite material	Core material	Surface Treatment	Color	Plate Thickness	Dimensions
Aluminum composite sheet	foam polyethylene resin	Paint	Silver	3.0	Width: 10–1000 Length: 10–2000
			Frosted Silver
			Black

*1 Excluding shim material and transparent resin. The plate thickness tolerance is ±10% (reference value).
*2 The maximum and minimum dimensional values are limited by the shape of the model.
*3 Select a paint color from the table (Appendix Table).
*4 The maximum length and width dimensions (Appendix Table) may vary depending on the surface treatment.
*5 The machining surface will not be plated as it is a pre-treatment material.
*6 Shim plate materials can only be used with flat plate parts.”For more information, see Parts Eligible for Thin Shim Plates.”
*7 Protective sheets (one-side only) affixed.
*8 For more information about hairline direction, please see “Hairline Direction“.
*9 See figure below for hole diameter and hole pitch standards. However, the hole pitch orientation can be set to any value.
*10 Can only be used with flat plate parts. For more information, see “Parts Eligible for Clear Resin.”
*11 Matt black anodize of 4.0 mm or more is only available for flat plate parts.
*12 International Economy products will use mill scale steel for EN 1.0330 equiv. (EN 1.0320 equiv. [hot coiled]) material with a thickness of 6mm.

(Appendix Table) Size limit including surface treatment	External Dimensions (Maximum)
(Appendix Table) Size limit including surface treatment	Length	Width	Height
Electroless Nickel Plating	1200	800	300
Black Oxide
Trivalent Chromate (Clear)
Clear Anodize		600	400
Black Anodize
Black Anodize (matte)	1100
Trivalent Chromate Passivation (SurTec 650)	900	650	250

The materials used are listed in the table below. The materials used comply with JIS (Japanese Industry Standard), equivalent to DIN standard.

No	Material	DIN Alloy	DIN No.	JIS	USA (AISI)	GB	Notes
1	EN 1.0330 equiv. (EN 1.0320 equiv. [hot coiled])	DC01 (hot coiled)	1.0330 (1.0320 [hot coiled])	SPCC	Low Carbon Steel (Hot Rolled)	SPCC	–
2	EN 1.0330 equiv. (Galvanized)	DC01 (Galvanized)	1.0330 (Galvanized)	SPCC (Galvanized）	Low Carbon Steel (Cold Rolled) (Hot Zinc Plating)	–	–
3	EN 1.0330 equiv. (EN 1.0320 equiv. [hot coiled])	DC01 (hot coiled)	1.0330 (1.0320 hot coiled)	SPHC	Low Carbon Steel (Hot Rolled)	Q235	–
4	EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	DC01 (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	1.0330 (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	SECC (Electrolytic Zinc Plating）	Low Carbon Steel (Cold Rolled) (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	–	–
5	EN 1.0038 equiv.	S235JR	1.0038	SS400	1018 Carbon Steel	–	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 3101.
6	EN 1.0330 equiv. (for SHIM) *6	DC01 (for SHIM) *6	1.0330 (for SHIM)	SPCC (for SHIM）	Cold Rolled Low Carbon Steel (for Shims) *6	–	–
7	EN AW−5052 equiv.	Al-Mg2.5	3.3523	A5052	5052 Aluminum Alloy	5052 H32	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS H 4000.
8	EN 1.4301 equiv.	X5CrNi18.10	1.4301	SUS304	304 Stainless Steel	06Cr19Ni10	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4305.
9	EN 1.4301 equiv. (for SHIM) *6	X5CrNi18.10 (for SHIM)	1.4301 (for SHIM）	SUS304 (H) (for SHIM)	304 Stainless Steel (for SHIM）	–	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4313.
10	EN 1.4016 equiv.	X6Cr17	1.4016	SUS430	430 Stainless Steel	–	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4305.

Caution

Steel types that are not included in the JIS standard, or for which there is no comparable steel even if a JIS standard exists, are not listed.
The steel types listed for comparison are reference standards.
Please note that the chemical composition may be different.

Types of Hole Machining

1	Through hole

2	Slotted hole

3	Rectangular hole

4	Tapped hole

5	Friction/Flow-Drilled & Tapped hole

6	Countersunk hole

7	Press-fit nut (coarse), Weld nut (coarse)

Standard products: Product lineup conforms to JIS standards International.
International Economy products: Product lineup is offered at the lowest price while in compliance with meviy quality standards. Products conform to the industrial standards of the country of manufacture.

Product lineup	Options	Definition				End of part number	Order closing time
Product lineup	Options	Standard	Merit	Shipping days	Applicable Product	End of part number	Order closing time
Standard	Express	MISUMI Quality For details, please view the page for each standard here.	Shortest Lead Time	6days~	See the table below. Click here	-E	7:00
	Standard		ー	7days~		ー	12:00
	Economy		Same quality at a low price with a long lead time	24days~		-L	12:00
International Economy			Lowest Price	16days~		-C	11:00

Delivery options by material and finish

Material: Steel	Surface Treatment	Standard			International Economy
Material: Steel	Surface Treatment	Standard	Express	Economy	International Economy
EN 1.0330 equiv. (EN 1.0320 equiv. [hot coiled])	No treatment	✓	✓	✓	✓
	Powder Coating		–	✓	－
	Painting			–
	Electroless Nickel Plating			✓
	Black Oxide
	Trivalent Chromate (Clear)				✓
	Trivalent Chromate (Black)				–
EN 1.0330 equiv. Pre-Finish	Electrolytic Zinc Plating	✓	–	✓	–
EN 1.0330 equiv. Pre-Finish	Galvanized	✓	–	✓	–
EN 1.0330 equiv. (for SHIM)	—	✓	–	✓	–
EN 1.0038 equiv.	No treatment	✓	✓	✓	–
	Electroless Nickel Plating	✓	－	✓
	Black Oxide	✓	–	✓
	Trivalent Chromate (Clear)	✓	–	✓

Material: Stainless Steel	Surface Treatment	Standard			International Economy
Material: Stainless Steel	Surface Treatment	Standard	Express	Economy	International Economy
EN 1.4301 equiv.	No.1	✓	–	✓	–
	2B				✓
	Single-sided #400-Grit Polished				–
	Single-sided hairline finish				✓
EN 1.4016 equiv.	2B	✓	–	✓	–
EN 1.4301 equiv. (for SHIM)	—	✓	–	✓	–

Material: Aluminium	Surface Treatment	Standard			International Economy
Material: Aluminium	Surface Treatment	Standard	Express	Economy	International Economy
EN AW−5052 equiv.	—	✓	–	✓	✓
	Anodized (clear)
	Anodized (Black)
	Anodize (matt black)				–
	Trivalent Chromate Passivation (SurTec 650)				–
EN AW-5052 equiv. Pre-Finish	Clear Anodize	✓	–	–	–
EN AW-5052 equiv. Pre-Finish	Black Anodize	✓	–	–	–

Material: Composite material	Core material	Surface Treatment	Color	Standard
Material: Composite material	Core material	Surface Treatment	Color	Standard	Express	Economy
Aluminium composite sheet	Foam polyethylene resin	Paint	Silver	✓	–	✓
			Frosted Silver
			Black

Material: Perforated Metal [EN 1.4301 equiv.] BA	Hole Diameter × Hole Pitch	Open Area Ratio	Standard
Material: Perforated Metal [EN 1.4301 equiv.] BA	Hole Diameter × Hole Pitch	Open Area Ratio	Standard	Express	Economy
Perforated Plate (60° offset)	ø1 × 2p	22.60%	✓	–	–
	ø2 × 3p	40.30%
	ø3 × 5p	32.70%
	ø5 × 8p	35.40%
	ø8 × 12p	40.20%

Material: Clear Resin	Grade	Color	Standard
Material: Clear Resin	Grade	Color	Standard	Express	Economy
PET	Standard	Transparent	✓	–	✓
	Standard	Smoky Brown			✓
	Antistatic	Transparent			–
	Antistatic	Smoky Brown			–
Acrylic	Standard	Transparent	✓	–	✓
	Standard	Smoky Brown			✓
	Antistatic	Transparent			–
	Antistatic	Smoky Brown			–
PC (Polycarbonate)	Standard	Transparent	✓	–	✓
	Standard	Smoky Brown			✓
	Antistatic	Transparent			–
	Antistatic	Smoky Brown			–
PVC	Standard	Transparent	✓	–	✓
	Standard	Smoky brown			✓
	Anti-Static	Transparent			–
	Anti-Static	Smoky brown			–

*For Feed bending (FR bending) shapes, 1 to 2 days shipping will be added to normal bend products. In addition, express shipping cannot be selected.
*Nut installation will add 1 to 2 days delivery time to the normal shipping date. Delivery options are not available.
*Economy shipping option is not available for the product over 9mm thickness.
*There are 4 colors available for the economy shipping option(RAL color value:9005, 9016, 7032, 1021). For more information about paint color, please check “Types of Paint Color“.
*International economy products are not available with painted finishes.

Steel
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Pre-finished Sheets
Perforated Metal
Transparent Resin Plate
Aluminum composite sheet

Material Standards and Materials Used

Steel

Material Features/Appearance

Material	Features	Appearance
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0330 equiv. (for SIM)	This is a cold-rolled steel sheet used for general press-formed sheet metal parts. It features high dimensional accuracy and a smooth surface finish, but is prone to rust. Surface treatment is recommended after processing. Standard sheet thickness typically ranges from 0.2 mm to 3.2 mm.
EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled)	This is a hot-rolled mild steel sheet suitable for general use and deep drawing. Like EN 1.0330 equiv. (EN 1.0320 equiv. [hot coiled]), it is prone to rust, so surface treatment after processing is recommended. It is typically used for medium-thickness plate products, with standard thickness starting from approximately 1.2 mm.
EN 1.0038 equiv.	This is a rolled steel material for general structural use, widely used in Japan. Its name derives from its tensile strength of 400 N/mm² or higher. It is cost-effective and easy to process, making it suitable for a wide range of applications including machinery and construction.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
EN 1.0330 equiv.	270~410	205 or more	32 or more	243~390	260~400	205 or more	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.85	6.96×10⁶	58	11.7×10⁻⁶
EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled)	270~440	175 or more	35 or more	243~418	260~430	175 or more	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.85	6.96×10⁶	58	11.7×10⁻⁶
EN 1.0038 equiv.	400~510	215 or more	21 or more	360~485	380~485	215 or more	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.85	6.96×10⁶	58	11.7×10⁻⁶

Stainless Steel

Material Features/Appearance

Material	Features	Appearance

EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B)	This is an austenitic stainless steel with enhanced corrosion resistance and weldability. Its versatility and availability make it widely used across various industries. It maintains high corrosion resistance and strength while offering excellent weldability, making it suitable for equipment and machinery applications.
EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished)	This is a surface-finished stainless steel sheet used for exterior covers, offering excellent appearance. The surface has a near-mirror gloss with slight polishing marks. It is typically supplied with a protective film to preserve its appearance.
EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish)	This is a surface-finished stainless steel sheet characterized by long, continuous polishing lines resembling hair strands. The surface has a subdued gloss, giving it a calm and refined appearance. It is typically supplied with a protective film to preserve its appearance.
EN 1.4301 equiv. (No.1)	This is a standard finish material obtained by hot rolling, heat treatment, and pickling to remove black oxide scale and surface impurities. It features a matte, textured surface similar to pearskin.
EN 1.4301 equiv. (for SHIM)	This is a cold-worked EN 1.4301 equiv. stainless steel with increased tensile strength. Although not suitable for bending or deep drawing, it offers minimal warping after processing. It has better thickness tolerance than 2B material, making it ideal for precision machining.
EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)	This is a magnetic stainless steel made from ferritic stainless alloy. Unlike austenitic stainless steel, it contains no nickel and has lower corrosion resistance. Its versatility and availability make it widely used in everyday applications, including the food industry.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
EN 1.4301 equiv.	520~690	205 or more	40 or more	478~670	495~520	205 or more	1.9×10⁵	1.9×10⁵	7.93	1.39×10⁶	16.2	17.3×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4301 equiv. (for SHIM)	650~900	450 or more	10 or more	598~873	620~860	450 or more	1.9×10⁵	1.9×10⁵	7.93	1.39×10⁶	16.2	17.3×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4016 equiv.	450~470	205 or more	22 or more	405~428	450~470	205 or more	2.0×10⁵	2.0×10⁵	7.70	1.39×10⁶	25	10.4×10⁻⁶

Aluminum

Material Features/Appearance

Material	Features	Appearance
EN AW−5052 equiv.	This is the most common aluminum alloy, known for its excellent machinability. It is widely available, corrosion-resistant, and used across many fields due to its versatility.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
EN AW−5052 equiv.	195~260	110 or more	12 or more	180~252	185~260	110 or more	7×10⁴	7×10⁴	2.68	1.91×10⁷	138	23.8×10⁻⁶

Pre-finished Sheets

Material Features/Appearance

Material	Features	Appearance
EN 1.0330 equiv. (SECC) Electrolytic Zinc Plating	This is a galvanized steel sheet made by applying a coating to EN 1.0330 equiv. (EN 1.0320 equiv. [hot coiled]). It offers shorter lead times than post-treatment products, but note that cut edges lack coating. Minor surface scuffing may occur due to material characteristics.
EN 1.0330 equiv. (SGCC) (Steel Plate Cold Commercial)	This is a galvanized steel sheet also used in construction materials. Compared to EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating), it has a thicker coating, providing higher corrosion resistance.
EN AW-5052 equiv. pre-finished anodized plate (clear)	This is a cost-effective and quick-to-source galvanized steel sheet with corrosion and wear resistance. Due to material characteristics, cracks may form at bends, potentially causing the coating to peel.
EN AW-5052 equiv. pre-finished anodized plate (black)

Perforated Metal

Material Features/Appearance

Material	Features	Appearance
Perforated Metal (EN 1.4301 equiv.-BA); —60° Staggered Round Hole Type—	This is a perforated steel sheet widely used for ventilation covers and filters. It is more economical than machining holes into general steel sheets. Although warp correction is performed before shipment, slight distortion may remain due to material properties. Available hole patterns include: ø1 × 2p ø2 × 3p ø3 × 5p ø5 × 8p ø8 × 12p

Transparent Resin Plate

Material Features/Appearance

Material	Features	Appearance
PET	Available in two levels of light transmittance and in standard or anti-static grades. Offers excellent chemical resistance, water resistance, and electrical insulation at low cost. High transparency makes it suitable for food containers, optical films, and insulating materials. Good processability.
Acrylic	Available in two levels of light transmittance and in standard or anti-static grades. Features very high light transmittance, suitable for displays, lighting covers, and interior applications. Note: Poor resistance to petroleum-based solvents and alkaline chemicals.
PC (Polycarbonate)	Available in two levels of light transmittance and in standard or anti-static grades. Excellent impact resistance, heat resistance, and dimensional stability. High transparency, suitable for covers, windows, and protective panels. Good machinability, also usable for mechanical components.
PVC	Available in two levels of light transmittance and in standard or anti-static grades. Excellent chemical resistance, water resistance, and electrical insulation. Hard and dimensionally stable, suitable for piping parts, enclosures, and insulating materials. Good processability.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Rockwell Hardness	Specific Gravity	Continuous Service Temperature (°C)
PET	55~65	80~100	50~100	2900	M80~M90	1.38	80~100
Acrylic	65~75	90~120	2~7	3000	M85~M100	1.19	70~90
PC (Polycarbonate)	60~70	80~95	90~120	2400	M70~M80	1.2	100~120
PVC	45~55	70~90	20~40	2800	R110~R120	1.4	50~70

Aluminum composite sheet

Material Features/Appearance

Material	Features	Appearance
Aluminum composite sheet – Silver	Sandwich structure of aluminum + foamed polyethylene resin + aluminum. Lighter than metal and stiffer than resin due to thin aluminum surface layers. Note: Surface aluminum may become sharp due to material characteristics.
Aluminum composite sheet – Frosted Silver
Aluminum composite sheet – Black

Surface Treatment – Features / Appearance

Surface Treatments	Features	Appearance

Electroless Nickel Plating	A surface treatment that forms a protective film through chemical reactions without using electricity. It enables uniform coating even on complex shapes, maintains high dimensional accuracy, and is compatible with various materials including insulators. Widely used across industries due to its excellent performance.
Black Oxide	A surface treatment that forms black rust on steel surfaces to protect the underlying material. It suppresses the formation of red rust and enhances corrosion resistance. Its refined appearance and low processing cost make it suitable for both industrial products and interior applications.
Trivalent Chromate (clear)	A surface treatment that forms a chromium layer on metal surfaces through electrochemical reaction. The chromium film provides high hardness, excellent wear resistance, corrosion resistance, and a mirror-like gloss. The resulting layer significantly improves the durability and appearance of the base material. The white tone refers to the color of the film formed after chemical treatment.
Trivalent Chromate (Black)	A surface treatment that forms a chromium layer on metal surfaces through electrochemical reaction. The chromium film offers high hardness, wear resistance, corrosion resistance, and a glossy black finish. The coating enhances both the durability and visual quality of the material. The black tone is the color of the film that appears after chemical treatment.
Anodized (clear)	A surface treatment that forms a thick alumina layer on aluminum surfaces to improve corrosion resistance, wear resistance, electrical insulation, and dyeability. It is especially suitable for decorative applications due to its ability to be colored. The untreated surface appears silver-white, close to the natural aluminum base.
Anodized (black)	A surface treatment that forms a thick alumina layer on aluminum surfaces, followed by dyeing. It enhances corrosion resistance, wear resistance, electrical insulation, and decorative flexibility. The final appearance depends on the dye used, offering a satin-like finish.
Matt black anodize	An anodizing process combined with blasting or chemical treatment to create fine surface texture. This treatment reduces light reflection, resulting in a matte finish ideal for optical equipment components. The surface is dyed after treatment to achieve the desired color.
Trivalent Chromate Passivation (SurTec 650)	It is an alternative technology to the conventional alodine treatment using hexavalent chromium and is a surface treatment developed to comply with environmental regulations (e.g., RoHS). It has excellent corrosion resistance and, unlike anodized aluminum, retains its conductivity. It is often used in the parts and housings of test equipment around electronic boards and communication equipment.

Surface Treatment Characteristics

Surface Treatments	Corrosion Resistance	Wear Resistance	Hardness	Appearance / Decorative Quality	Electrical Conductivity
Electroless Nickel Plating	〇	〇	〇	△	〇
Black Oxide	△	×	×	〇	〇
Trivalent Chromate (clear)	△	×	×	〇	〇
Trivalent Chromate (Black)	△	×	×	〇	〇
Anodized (clear)	〇	△	△	〇	×
Anodized (black)	〇	△	△	〇	×
Matt black anodize	〇	△	△	〇	×
Trivalent Chromate Passivation (SurTec 650)	△	×	×	△	〇

Surface Treatment Colors

Steel

Electroless Nickel Plating

Trivalent Chromate(Clear)

Trivalent Chromate(Black)

Black Oxide

Aluminum

Anodize (Clear)

Anodize (Black)

Black Anodize (Matt)

Trivalent Chromate Passivation (SurTec 650)

Anodized Aluminum Sheet, Clear

Anodized Aluminum Sheet, Black

*There may be color differences depending on the part shape and surfaces to be cut. Film thickness cannot be specified.

*There may be slight color differences for pre-finished products depending on the delivery option selected. Performance is equivalent.

Painting color and powder coating values are in accordance with JPMA (Japan Paint Manufacturers Association). Each color is indicated with reference values by RAL, Munsell, and CYMK.
Coatings are used to improve corrosion resistance, surface smoothness, or coloring. Reference values for coating thickness of powder coatings range from 50 µm to 110 µm.
Reference values for painting thicknesses range from 15 µm to 45 µm.
Please click here to see the materials and board thicknesses that can be selected for coating.

▼Powder Coating

Black

RAL 9005 equiv.
(95% Match)

Dark grey

RAL 7016 equiv.
(97% Match)

White

RAL 9016 equiv.
(97% Match)

Off-white (Full gloss)

RAL 9003 equiv.
(96% Match)

Off-white (Half gloss)

RAL 9003 equiv.
(95% Match)

Cream

RAL 1015 equiv.
(94% Match)

Yellow

RAL 1021 equiv.
(94% Match)

Light cream

RAL 9001 equiv.
(97% Match)

Light Ivory

RAL 1015 equiv.
(97% Match)

Light green

RAL 9012 equiv.
(90% Match)

Oyster White

RAL 1013 equiv.
(97% Match)

Grey

RAL 7032 equiv.
(97% Match)

Cream grey

RAL 7032 equiv.
(98% Match)

Light grey

RAL 9002 equiv.
(95% Match)

Off-pale grey

RAL 9001 equiv.
(97% Match)

▼Painting

Red

RAL 3000 equiv.
(91% Match)

Deep Orange

RAL 2011 equiv.
(94% Match)

Pebble grey

RAL 7032 equiv.
(92% Match)

Pastel blue

RAL 5024 equiv.
(94% Match)

Green Beige

RAL 1000 equiv.
(90% Match)

For sheet metal parts, a double-sided deburring machine is used to break the edges.
There is a possibility of minor scratches on appearance surfaces from this process.
Please click “About Edge breaking” for more information.

Materials Available for Edge Breaking and Corresponding Edge Break Sizes

✓: Automatic quotation available
ー: Manual Quotation available only

Material	Surface treatment	Thickness	Light chamfering of edges	C/R chamfering
EN 1.0330 equiv.(EN 1.0320 equiv.(hot coiled)) EN 1.0038 equiv.	ー	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.3 3.2 4.5 6.0 9.0 10.0 12.0 16.0	✓	✓
	Powder Coating *	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.3 3.2 4.5 6.0	✓	ー
	Painting	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.3 3.2 4.5 6.0	✓	ー
	Electroless Nickel Plating	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.3 3.2 4.5 6.0 9.0	✓	✓
	Black Oxide
	Trivalent Chromate(Clear)
	Trivalent Chromate(Black)	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.3 3.2 4.5 6.0	✓	ー
EN 1.0330 equiv.(electrolytic zinc plating)	Electrolytic Zinc Plating	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.3 3.2	✓	✓

Material	Finishing Method	Thickness	Light chamfering of edges	C/R chamfering
EN 1.4301 equiv.	2B	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0	✓	✓
EN 1.4301 equiv.	No.1	9.0 10.0 12.0	✓	✓
EN 1.4016 equiv.	2B	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 3.0	✓	ー

Material	Surface treatment	Thickness	Light chamfering of edges	C/R chamfering
EN AW−5052 equiv.	ー	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0	✓	ー
	Anodized (clear)
	Anodized (Black)
	Anodize (matt black)

*The following painted finishes are available:Black (RAL 9005 equiv. (95% Match)), Grey (RAL 7032 equiv. (97% Match)), Off-white ((Half gloss) (RAL 9003 equiv. (95% Match))), Off-white ((Full gloss) (RAL 9003 equiv. (96% Match))), Cream grey (RAL 7032 equiv. (98% Match))

For sheet metal, only the surface is machined. The finish may vary depending on the material and machine. For details, please check the “Engraving” topic.

Material: Steel	Surface Treatment	Plate thickness
EN 1.0330 (EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled))	–	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.3 3.2 4.5 6.0
EN 1.0038 equiv.	–	9.0 10.0 12.0 16.0

Material: Stainless Steel	Finish	Plate thickness
EN 1.4301 equiv.	2B	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
EN 1.4016 equiv.	2B	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 2.0 3.0
EN 1.4301 equiv.	No.1	9.0 10.0 12.0

Material: Aluminum	Surface Treatment	Plate thickness
EN AW-5052 equiv.	–	0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0

*1 The plate thickness tolerance is ±10% (reference value).

Character size

Half-width alphanumeric characters and some symbols (+-. #$%&'()=*:? /_~) can be freely entered.
Line feed and space input are also supported.
Font (font, spacing) and line spacing cannot be specified.

Character size

Due to variations in font size definitions, there may be deviations from the specified size depending on the content.

Definition of Font Size

Example) In case of a default character size of 5.0 mm

		Default value (＊)
Nominal Size	3.0	4.0	5.0	6.0	7.0	8.0	9.0	10.0	11.0	12.0	13.0	14.0	15.0	17.5	20.0	22.5	25.0	27.5	30.0
Measured value A	2.80	3.74	4.79	5.60	6.54	7.47	8.41	9.34	10.27	11.2	12.14	13.08	14.01	16.34	18.68	21.01	23.37	25.68	28.01
Measured value g	3.01	4.02	5.02	6.26	7.03	8.03	9.04	10.04	11.05	12.52	13.05	14.06	15.07	17.39	20.08	22.36	25.11	27.62	30.13
Measured value x	2.10	2.80	3.51	4.21	4.91	5.61	6.31	7.01	7.71	8.42	9.11	9.81	10.52	12.27	14.02	15.77	17.53	19.28	21.03

*Depending on the material and character, 3 to 5.0 mm can cause damage to the characters.
*Size is only a reference value. Dimensional accuracy is not guaranteed. Depending on the text content, there may be cases where the size differs from the specified size.

Engraving angle

Turn counterclockwise in 45 degree steps.
These are reference values only and accuracy is not guaranteed by quality assurance.

Initial value	0 degree (end-face reference)
Angular pitch (standard value)	0 to 360 degrees (45 degree intervals)

Applicable sheet thickness and Radius size for R-bend shapes

R-bend shapes are generally manufactured using a feed bending process. This creates continuous tool marks that remain on the bent part. For details, please see “Bending Specifications“.
If feed bending is difficult, we will propose radius sizes for which normal bending or special R-bend tools can be used. If this is acceptable, we will automatically change the R size on the meviy part.
For details, please refer to the R-size conversion table below.

■Inner R range that can be feed bent

Thickness	Minimum inner R	Maximum inner R
0.8	10	150
1.0	10	150
1.2	10	150
1.5	10	150
1.6	10	150
2.0	10 *	150
2.3	15	150
2.5	10	150
3.0	30	150
3.2	30	150

*Steel material minimum inner R is R15.

■R-size conversion table for when Feed bending is not possible.

Inner R size before conversion	Inner R size after conversion	Bending process used
Within twice the sheet thickness	Thickness (reference value)	Normal Bending
Less than R3	Thickness (reference value)	Normal Bending
R3 ≤ R ＜ R6	R3	R-bending with special tools
R6 ≤ R ＜ R10	R6
R10 ≤ R ＜ R12.5	R10
R12.5 ≤ R ＜ R15	R12.5
R15 ≤ R ＜ R17.5	R15
R17.5 ≤ R ＜ R20	R17.5
R20 ≤ R ＜ R22.5	R20
R22.5 ≤ R ＜ R25	R22.5
R25 ≤ R ＜ R30	R25
R30 ≤ R	Not available *Please request a manual quote.	ー

Applicable materials and surface treatments for R-bend shapes

Materials and surface treatments available for R bending are as follows.

Material: Steel	Surface Treatment	R bending available
Material: Steel	Surface Treatment	Feed Bending	R-bending with special tools
EN 1.0330 equiv. [EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled)]	–	Automatic Quotation	Automatic Quotation
	Powder Coating
	Painting
	Electroless Nickel Plating
	Black Oxide
	Trivalent Chromate (clear)
	Trivalent Chromate (Black)	Automatic Quotation	Manual Quotation
EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	Electrolytic Plating	Automatic Quotation	Automatic Quotation
EN 1.0330 equiv. (Galvanized)	Galvanized	Automatic Quotation	Automatic Quotation

Material: Stainless Steel	Finishing Method	R bending available
Material: Stainless Steel	Finishing Method	Feed Bending	R-bending with special tools
EN 1.4301 equiv.	2B	Automatic Quotation	Automatic Quotation
	Single-sided #400 grit polishing (appearance side) protective film on one side	Manual Quotation	Automatic Quotation
	Single-sided hairline (appearance side) protective film on one side	Manual Quotation	Not Supported
EN 1.4016 equiv.	2B	Automatic Quotation	Automatic Quotation

Material: Aluminum	Surface Treatment	R bending available
Material: Aluminum	Surface Treatment	Feed Bending	R-bending with special tools
EN AW−5052 equiv.	—	Automatic Quotation	Automatic Quotation
	Anodized (clear)
	Anodized (Black)
	Anodized (matt black)
	Trivalent Chromate Passivation (SurTec 650)
EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear))	Clear Anodize
EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	Black Anodize

Material: Perforated Metal	Hole Diameter × Hole Pitch	R bending available
Material: Perforated Metal	Hole Diameter × Hole Pitch	Feed Bending	R-bending with special tools
EN 1.4301 equiv. -BA 60° Staggered Round Hole Type	ø1 × 2p	Automatic Quotation	Automatic Quotation
	ø2 × 3p
	ø3 × 5p
	ø5 × 8p
	ø8 × 12p

For the selection of shims, certain conditions must be met in terms of shaping elements, material and thickness of the part. Detailed specifications can be found below.

Available Shapes for Shim Plates

Available: Cutout/Through Holes/Free Form Hole

Not Available: Bended Shims

Available: Cutout/Through Holes (Rectangular Holes, Slotted Holes, etc.)

Not Available: Specific Holes

Materials / Plate Thicknesses for Shim Plates

The tolerance varies depending on the thickness and the material.
Other stainless steels are available with a plate thickness of 0.8 mm or 1.0 mm. 1.4301 equiv. (H) has a higher precision. (The tolerance of the plate thickness for standard materials is ±10 % [reference value only]).

Steel	Thickness	Tolerance
EN 1.0330 equiv.	0.1	±0.03
	0.2	±0.03
	0.3	±0.04
	0.5	±0.06

Stainless steel	Thickness	Tolerance
EN 1.4301 equiv.(H)	0.05	±0.005
	0.1	±0.02
	0.2	±0.03
	0.3	±0.035
	0.5	±0.04
	0.8	±0.04
	1.0	±0.05

*The delivery date will be extended depending on the quantity. Please check the date displayed on the screen for the confirmed delivery date.

Clear resin panel parts, used for equipment covers, etc. are available.
Certain conditions regarding the shape elements, material and thickness of the part must be met in order to select clear resin. Check below for detailed specifications.

Shapes Available in Clear Resin

Eligible: Flat plate

No.	1	2	3	4	5	6	7
Hole type	Through hole	Tapped hole	Countersunk hole	Insert	Slotted hole	Rectangular hole	Free-form hole

Not Available: Bending

Materials / Plate Thicknesses Eligible for Clear Resin

Each material is available in two grades and two colors, so please choose the material that best suits your needs.

Clear Resin	Grade	Color	Light Transmittance *1	Operating Ambient Temperature *1	Thickness *2
PET (Polyethylene terephthalate)	Standard	Transparent	87%	-15 to 55℃	3.0　 5.0　8.0
	Standard	Smoky Brown	28%		3.0　5.0
	Anti-Static	Transparent	77%
	Anti-Static	Smoky Brown	30%
Acrylic	Standard	Transparent	93%	－40 to 65℃	3.0　5.0　8.0　10.0
	Standard	Smoky Brown	28%		3.0　5.0
	Anti-Static	Transparent	87%
	Anti-Static	Smoky Brown	25%
Polycarbonate	Standard	Transparent	89%	－40 to 120℃	3.0　5.0
	Standard	Smoky Brown	35%
	Anti-Static	Transparent	86%
	Anti-Static	Smoky Brown	32%
PVC (polyvinyl chloride)	Standard	Transparent	83%	－10 to 60℃	3.0　5.0
	Standard	Smoky Brown	27%
	Anti-Static	Transparent	77%
	Anti-Static	Smoky Brown	30%

*1 This is an approximate value only and should not be considered a guaranteed value.
*2 The plate thickness tolerance is ±0.2 with a thickness of 3.0, and ±0.3 with a thickness of 5.0.

Transparent resin manufacturing method and physical properties (reference values)

The values given are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Clear Resin	Grade	Color	Manufacturing method	Flame retardant (UL94 standard)	Chemical resistance
Clear Resin	Grade	Color	Manufacturing method	Flame retardant (UL94 standard)	Oil	Acid	Alkali	Organic solvent
PET (Polyethylene terephthalate)	Standard	Transparent	Extruded	V-2	○	×	×～△	×
	Standard	Smoky Brown		–
	Anti-Static	Transparent		HB
	Anti-Static	Smoky Brown		–
Acrylic	Standard	Transparent	Extruded or Cast	HB	○	○	○	×～△
	Standard	Smoky Brown	Extruded or Cast	HB
	Anti-Static	Transparent	Extruded	–
	Anti-Static	Smoky Brown	Extruded	–
Polycarbonate	Standard	Transparent	Extruded	–	－	－	－	－
	Standard	Smoky Brown		–	－	－	－	－
	Anti-Static	Transparent		HB	○	○	○	×～△
	Anti-Static	Smoky Brown		HB	○	○	○	×～△
PVC (polyvinyl chloride)	Standard	Transparent	Extruded or Pressed	–	○	△	×	×
	Standard	Smoky Brown	Extruded or Pressed	–	○	△	×	×
	Anti-Static	Transparent	Pressed	V-0	×	×	×	×
	Anti-Static	Smoky Brown	Pressed	V-0	×	×	×	×

Clear Resin Materials

Material color may vary between orders based on availability.

Composite Sheets can be provided for use in panels, equipment covers, etc.

There are requirements for the model shape, material and thickness of composite sheets. Please see detailed specifications below.

Composite Sheet available shapes

Eligible: Flat plate

No.	1	2	3	4	5
Hole type	Through hole	Countersunk hole	Slotted hole	Rectangular hole	Free-form hole

Not eligible: Bending

Modeling Rules: Bending

Example

The sheet metal thickness must be uniform.

Design inner radius (R_inner) of a bend as follows: 0 ≤ Inner radius ≤ ThicknessDesign outer radius (R_outer) as follows:Inner radius R_inner + Thickness
*Automatic quotation is not possible for models with non-uniform thickness. The model modification function can be used to fix these models and may allow automatic quotation.
For more information, please click here.

Feed bending (FR bending)

The inner bending radius should be 10 or more. The outer bending radius should be inner radius + thickness.
Please refer to the following section for the range of the bending radius.

Thickness	Inner radius R_min	Outer radius R_max
0.8	10	150
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.6
2.0	10 (Steel R_min=15)
2.3	15
2.5	10
3.0	30
3.2

After CAD data is uploaded to meviy, it is internally converted into a neutral file format. During this conversion, the hole type information (tapped hole, countersunk hole, etc.) is lost.
As a default hole recognition setting, hole diameter and shape features are detected and compared to the hole information database to infer the hole information that will be carried over to the meviy platform.

However, SOLIDWORKS users can use a new function that allows you to change user settings to directly transfer original hole information from CAD data to meviy.
Please click here for more information.

Modeling Rules for Countersunk Holes

When a conical shape element is detected, it will be identified as a countersink.

Modeling Rules	Example
Model the angle of the conical shape to be 90°. The ratio between the outer hole diameter (D) and inner hole diameter (d) must be as follows: If d ≤ 4.0 mm, the ratio must be above 1.4, If d > 4.0 mm, the ratio must be above 1.7.

Countersunk Hole Identification

The countersunk hole is recognized through two steps below.

STEP1

The pilot hole diameters for countersunk holes for each CAD package are registered in the meviy hole information database. Detected hole diameters will be checked against this during modeling (see table below).

Countersunk Hole Nominal Diameter	File Extension
Countersunk Hole Nominal Diameter	STEP (.step / .stp) Parasolid (.x_t/.x_b/.xmt /.xmt_txt) ACIS (.sat/.sab) JT (.jt) PRC (.prc) I-deas (.arc/.unv) Autodesk Inventor (.ipt) CATIA V5 (.CATPart)						Siemens PLM-NX (.prt) *1 Creo (.neu/.prt/.xpr) Solid Edge (.par/.pwd)	iCAD SX (.icd)	SOLIDWORKS (.sldprt) Siemens PLM-NX (.prt) *2
M3	3.20	3.30	3.40	3.58	3.6	4.00	3.20	3.30	3.40
M4	4.30	4.40	4.50	4.60	4.68	4.80	4.30	4.40	4.50
M5	5.30	5.50	5.80	6.00	6.18	6.50	5.30	5.50	5.50
M6	6.40	6.60	6.82	7.00	–	–	6.40	6.60	6.60
M8	8.40	8.54	9.00	9.22	10.00	–	8.40	8.54	9.00
M10	10.50	10.62	11.00	11.27	12.00	–	10.50	10.62	11.00
M12	13.00	13.50	14.50	－	－	－	13.00	－	13.50
M14	15.00	15.50	16.50	－	－	－	－	－	－
M16	17.00	17.50	18.50	－	－	－	17.00	－	17.50

*1 Pilot hole diameter for Siemens PLM-NX JIS model
*2 Pilot hole diameter for Siemens PLM-NX ISO model

STEP2

Once the countersunk hole is recognized according to the aforementioned modeling rules, the nominal diameter is determined according to the pilot hole diameter range. (Table below)

If the detected hole diameter does not match any of the entries on the list of pilot hole diameters, the hole is treated as a through hole (or tapped hole).

However, you can change the hole type or hole diameter when configuring the quote settings.

Countersunk diameter	Pilot hole(d) range	Example
M3	3.2≦d≦4.0
M4	4.3≦d≦4.8
M5	5.3≦d≦6.5
M6	6.3≦d≦7.0
M8	8.4≦d≦10.0
M10	10.5≦d≦12.0
M12	13.0≦d≦14.5
M14	15.0≦d≦16.5
M16	17.0≦d≦18.5

Countersunk Hole Size Selection

Available sizes vary depending on material and plate thickness. See the table below for details.
Countersunk holes cannot be selected for perforated metals or shim plate materials (SPCC [for shims] or SUS304(H) [for shims]).

Material	Plate Thickness	Countersunk Hole Bolt Nominal Diameter
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	2.0	M3
	2.3	M3
	3.2	M3	M4	M5
	4.5	M3	M4	M5	M6
	6.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10
	9.0			M5	M6	M8	M10
	10.0			M5	M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
	12.0			M5	M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
	16.0			M5	M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1) EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B) EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	2.0	M3
	2.5	M3
	3.0	M3	M4	M5
	4.0	M3	M4	M5	M6
	5.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	6.0	M3 (*1)	M4	M5	M6	M8
	9.0			M5	M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
	10.0			M5	M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
	12.0			M5	M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
PET Acrylic Polycarbonate PVC	3.0	M3	M4	M5
	5.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	8.0 (*2)	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10
	10.0 (*3)	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10
Aluminum composite sheet (core material: foam polyethylene resin) *4	3.0	M3	M4	M5

*1 Only available for A5052 Aluminum Alloy.
*2 Only available in PET & Acrylic
*3 Only available in Acrylic
*4 Click here to see the countersink machining finish for aluminum composite sheets.

Tapped Hole Identification

Hole diameter information in meviy’s hole information database is registered corresponding to the nominal diameters of tapped holes from each uploadable file extension. Detected hole diameters are checked against the table below (Table 1).
*If the detected diameter does not match any entry in the table, the hole will be treated as a through hole. However, you can change the hole type or nominal diameter when configuring the quote settings.
*If a diameter corresponds to multiple nominal diameters (below, 5.00 mm), the larger nominal diameter (M6) will be prioritized and selected.

Table 1) With Default Settings: Table of Hole Diameters Corresponding to Tapped Hole Identification by File Extension

Tapped Hole Nominal Diameter	File Extension
Tapped Hole Nominal Diameter	STEP (.step / .stp) Parasolid (.x_t/.x_b/.xmt /.xmt_txt) ACIS (.sat/.sab) JT (.jt) PRC (.prc) I-deas (.arc/.unv)					SOLIDWORKS(.sldprt) Siemens PLM-NX(.prt) Creo (.neu/.prt/.xpr) Solid Edge (.par/.pwd) Pro/ENGINEER (.prt/.neu/.xpr)	Autodesk Inventor(.ipt) CATIA V5 (.CATPart)	iCAD SX (.icd)
M2	1.57	1.60	1.62	2.00		1.60	1.57	2.00
M2.5	2.01	2.05	2.08	2.50		2.05	2.01	2.50
M3	2.46	2.50	2.53	3.00		2.50	2.46	3.00
M4	3.24	3.30	3.33	4.00		3.30	3.24	4.00
M5	4.13	4.20	4.23	5.00		4.20	4.13	5.00
M6	4.92	5.00	5.04	6.00		5.00	4.92	6.00
M8	6.65	6.75	6.78	6.80	8.00	6.80	6.65	8.00
M10	8.38	8.50	8.53	10.00		8.50	8.38	10.00
M12	10.11	10.20	10.25	10.27	10.30	10.20	10.11	12.00
M14	11.84	12.00	12.02	12.10		12.00	11.84	14.00
M16	13.84	14.00	14.02	16.00		14.00	13.84	16.00

To aid correct identification of tapped holes, it is recommend that you specify the CAD package you normally use in “Automatic Hole Type Recognition.”
Hole diameters detected by the meviy platform will then be checked against the hole diameters for the specified CAD package (Table 2).
*The link below provides more information on configuring settings.
FA Mechanical Parts; Configurable Settings on Settings Screen: Automatic Hole Type Recognition

Table 2) With Tapped Hole Identification Settings: Table of Hole Diameters Identified as Tapped Holes for Each Specified CAD Package

Tapped Hole Nominal Diameter	Tapped Hole Identification Settings
	SOLIDWORKS (Select from 2 types)		Siemens PLM-NX Creo Solid Edge Onshape	Autodesk Inventor CATIA	iCAD SX	IronCAD	Autodesk Fusion
	A Type (*1)	B Type (*2)	Siemens PLM-NX Creo Solid Edge Onshape	Autodesk Inventor CATIA	iCAD SX	IronCAD	Autodesk Fusion
M2	1.60	2.00	1.60	1.56	2.00	1.60	1.62
M2.5	2.05	2.50	2.05	2.01	2.50	2.05	2.08
M3	2.50	3.00	2.50	2.46	3.00	2.50	2.53
M4	3.30	4.00	3.30	3.24	4.00	3.30	3.33
M5	4.20	5.00	4.20	4.13	5.00	4.20	4.23
M6	5.00	6.00	5.00	4.92	6.00	5.00	5.04
M8	6.80	8.00	6.80	6.65	8.00	6.80	6.78
M10	8.50	10.00	8.50	8.38	10.00	8.50	8.53
M12	10.20	12.00	10.20	10.11	12.00	10.2	10.27
M14	12.00	14.00	12.00	11.84	14.00	12.00	12.02
M16	14.00	16.00	14.00	13.84	16.00	14.00	14.02

*1 When the SOLIDWORKS hole options selected are “Tap drill diameter” or “Cosmetic threads.”

*2 When the SOLIDWORKS hole option selected is “Remove threads.”

Tapped Hole Size Selection

Tapped holes cannot be selected for perforated metals or the material with thickness of 0.8㎜ or less.

Materiall : Steel	Plate Thickness	Tapped Hole Diameter
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	1.0	M2	M2.5	M3
	1.2	M2	M2.5	M3
	1.6	M2	M2.5	M3	M4	M5
	2.0	M2	M2.5	M3	M4	M5	M6
	2.3	M2	M2.5	M3	M4	M5	M6
	3.2	M2(*1)	M2.5	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	4.5			M3	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10
	6.0				M4	M5	M6	M8	M10
	9.0					M5(*2)	M6	M8	M10
	10.0						M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
	12.0						M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
	16.0						M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16

*1 M2 is EN 1.0330 equiv. (EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled)) (Trivalent chromate black) and EN 1.0330 equiv. (electrolytic zinc plating) only
*2 Only available for EN 1.0038 equiv.

Material : Stainless Steel	Plate Thickness	Tapped Hole Diameter
EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1) EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)	1.0	M2	M2.5	M3
	1.2	M2	M2.5	M3
	1.5	M2	M2.5	M3	M4
	2.0	M2	M2.5	M3	M4	M5	M6
	2.5	M2	M2.5	M3	M4	M5	M6
	3.0	M2	M2.5	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	4.0			M3	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10
	5.0				M4	M5	M6	M8	M10
	6.0					M5	M6	M8	M10
	9.0						M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
	10.0						M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
	12.0						M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish)	1.0			M3
	1.2			M3
	1.5			M3	M4
	2.0			M3	M4	M5	M6
	3.0			M3	M4	M5	M6	M8

Material : Aluminum	Plate Thickness	Tapped Hole Diameter
EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. ( pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. ( pre-finished anodized plate (black))	1.0	M2	M2.5	M3
	1.2	M2	M2.5	M3
	1.5	M2	M2.5	M3	M4
	1.6	M2	M2.5	M3	M4	M5
	2.0	M2	M2.5	M3	M4	M5	M6
	2.5		M2.5	M3	M4	M5	M6
	3.0		M2.5	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	4.0			M3	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10
	5.0			M3	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10
	6.0				M4	M5	M6	M8	M10

Material : Clear Resin	Plate Thickness
PET Acrylic PC (Polycarbonate) PVC	3.0	M3	M4	M5
	5.0	M3	M4	M5	M6
	8.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	10.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10

Friction Drilled/Tapped Holes Modeling Rules

When a cylindrical flange shape element is detected, it will be identified as a friction drilled/tapped hole.

Modeling Rules	Example
The inner diameter (d) should follow the same rules as for Tapped Hole Identification described above. Model the flange height (h) and thickness (t) to be less than or equal to the plate thickness.	Example 1 Example 2 *The upright section has a curve

Friction Drilled/Tapped Hole Size Selection

Friction drilled/tapped holes cannot be selected for perforated metals, shims or resin.

Material	Thickness	Friction Drilled/Tapped Hole Diameter（*1）
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	0.8			M3	M4
	1.0	M2	M2.5	M3	M4	M5
	1.2	M2	M2.5	M3	M4	M5
	1.6	M2	M2.5	M3	M4	M5
EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv. EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	0.8			M3	M4
	1.0			M3	M4	M5
	1.2			M3	M4	M5
	1.5			M3	M4	M5
	1.6			M3	M4	M5

*1 M2 and M2.5 are limited to EN 1.0330 equiv. (electrolytic zinc plating) and EN 1.0330 equiv. (galvanized).

This section describes the specifications of threaded inserts.

On meviy, you can specify threaded inserts by changing the hole information. The modeling method is the same as for taps.（Tapped Hole Identification and Selectable Sizes）

* The insert material is EN 1.4301 equiv.

The insert material:
EN 1.4301 equiv.

Threaded Insert

Threaded Insert nominal diameter and nominal length (D)

There are three types of nominal length (D) for each nominal diameter: “1D”, “1.5D” and “2D”.

Material	Thickness	Nominal length	Nominal diameter
Material	Thickness	Nominal length	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
PET(Polyethylene terephthalate) Acrylic Polycarbonate PVC(polyvinyl chloride)	3.0	ー
	5.0	1D	〇	〇
		1.5D	〇
		2D
	8.0	1D	〇	〇	〇	〇
		1.5D	〇	〇	〇
		2D	〇
	10.0	1D		〇	〇	〇	〇
		1.5D		〇	〇	〇
		2D		〇

Insert quantity that can be automatically quoted per model

The maximum number of threaded inserts that can be automatically quoted per model is 50. For more than 50, please request a manual quotation.

Days to Ship for Threaded Inserts

Days to Ship will be added according to the number of inserts per model.
* There are no additional shipping days for Economy Shipping.

Material：Clear Resin	Grade	Color	Thickness	Number of inserts per model
				Standard Shipping		Economy Shipping
				Quantity: 1~20 pcs	Quantity: 21~50 pcs	Quantity: ~50 pcs
PET (Polyethylene terephthalate)	Standard	transparent	3.0 5.0 8.0	＋2 days	＋3 days	No additional shipping days
	Standard	smoky brown	3.0 5.0
	Antistatic	transparent	3.0 5.0
	Antistatic	smoky brown	3.0 5.0
Acrylic	Standard	transparent	3.0 5.0 8.0 10.0	＋2 days	＋3 days
	Standard	smoky brown	3.0 5.0
	Antistatic	transparent	3.0 5.0
	Antistatic	smoky brown	3.0 5.0
Polycarbonate	Standard	transparent	3.0 5.0	＋2 days	＋3 days
	Standard	smoky brown
	Antistatic	transparent
	Antistatic	smoky brown
PVC (polyvinyl chloride)	Standard	transparent	3.0 5.0	＋2 days	＋3 days
	Standard	smoky brown
	Antistatic	transparent
	Antistatic	smoky brown

When uploading a part in meviy and selecting a plating or painting, please note that a small hole, which should be between Ø 4 to Ø 5.2 mm, needs be added in one corner of your part so that the part can be manufactured with the desired plating or painting.

If the part exceeds a length of 420mm or the weight of 8 kg, please make sure that at least 2 holes are added to the 3D CAD model to hang the part.

Depending on the size and shape of the part, additional holes may need to be added for hanging.

If the part cannot be offered automatically, you are welcome to contact us to find a solution.

Modeling Rules	Example
When requesting a quote for perforated metal parts, model the part using either no holes or only through holes (mounting holes). If the number of through holes exceeds a certain number, automatic quotation may not be possible. (There is no need to model the staggered/lattice-like hole patterns characteristic of perforated metals.)

Upper limit of the nut's pilot hole diameter

On meviy, when you would select nut mounting, please change the hole information indication for mounting holes.
You can select press-fit, weld (spot), or weld (arc) as the mounting method.
However, multiple mounting methods cannot be used on the same model.
The nominal diameters which can be selected depend on the hole diameter of the mounting hole.
The upper limit of hole diameter is specified for each nominal diameter. Please refer to the table below.

Press-fit nut

Press-fit nut nominal diameter	Upper limit of the pilot hole diameter (d)	Example
M3	d ≦ 5.5
M4	d ≦ 7.0
M5	d ≦ 8.0
M6	d ≦ 10.0
M8	d ≦ 13.0

Weld (spot) nut and weld (arc) nut

Weld nut nominal diameter	Upper limit of the pilot hole diameter (d)	Example
M4	d ≦ 11.0
M5	d ≦ 11.0
M6	d ≦ 13.0
M8	d ≦ 15.0
M10	d ≦ 17.0
M12	d ≦ 19.0

Maximum number of nuts which can quote automatically

As a condition of the automatic quotation, there is a limit that the number of nuts mounted per model. Please refer to the table below.
If the number of nuts is more than the limit, meviy support can provide a quotation (request a manual quotation).
If you wish to use weld (arc) nuts, please request a quotation from meviy support regardless of the number of nuts.

Types of nut	Maximum number of nut which can automatic quotation per model
Press-fit nut	12
Weld (spot) nut	12

Select the size of nut

Selectable sizes vary by material and thickness. Please refer to the table below.
Nut mounting cannot be selected for perforated metal, shim plates (EN 1.0330 equiv. & EN 1.4301 equiv.) and resin.

Press-fit nut

Material	Thickness	Press-fit nut nominal diameter
EN 1.0330 equiv. (EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled)) EN 1.0330 equiv.	0.8	M3	M4
	1.0	M3	M4	M5	M6
	1.2	M3	M4	M5	M6
	1.6	M3	M4	M5	M6
	2.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	2.3	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	3.2	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
EN 1.4301 equiv. (2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.	1.0	M3	M4	M5	M6
	1.2	M3	M4	M5	M6
	1.5	M3	M4	M5	M6
	2.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	2.5	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	3.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
EN AW−5052 equiv. (Only unprocessed products)	0.8	M3	M4
	1.0	M3	M4	M5	M6
	1.2	M3	M4	M5	M6
	1.5	M3	M4	M5	M6
	1.6	M3	M4	M5	M6
	2.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	2.5	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	3.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear))（Clear Anodize） EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))（Black Anodize）	1.0	M3	M4	M5	M6
	1.5	M3	M4	M5	M6
	2.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8
	3.0	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8

Weld (spot) nut

Material	Thickness	Weld (spot) nut nominal diameter
EN 1.0330 equiv. (EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled)) EN 1.0330 equiv.	0.8	M4	M5	M6
	1.0	M4	M5	M6
	1.2	M4	M5	M6	M8
	1.6	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	2.0	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	2.3	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	3.2	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
EN 1.4301 equiv. (2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.	0.8	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	1.0	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	1.2	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	1.5	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	2.0	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	2.5	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	3.0	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	4.0	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	5.0	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12
	6.0	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12

When a keyhole shaped element is detected, it will be identified as a keyhole type hole.

Modeling Rules	Example
Model the keyhole type hole to meet all of the following conditional expressions: d1 ≥ 4.5, d2 ≥ [2 × d1 + 2], h > 0

Minimum distance between a hole and an edge or between two holes |
Minimum diameter for through holes; Minimum width of rectangular/slotted holes/other holes |
Minimum size of cutout shape |
Minimum Slit Width (when the part is unfolded). |
Minimum bending height |
The minimum bending height |
Width specification range for bending |
Minimum Distance Between a Hole and Bend |
Slit on the bending line (except for acute angle bending shapes with an internal angle of less than 90°). |
Minimum distance between nuts |
Minimum distance between nut and hole |
Minimum distance between nut and edge of the material |
Maximum distance between nut and edge of the material |
Minimum distance between engravings, between edge or hole |
Minimum distance between engraving and nut |
Minimum distance between engraving and bending |
Minimum Angle for Acute Angle Bending |
Minimum radius of rectangular holes |

*Values may differ from those listed depending on surface treatment, shape, and processing conditions.

Minimum Distance Between a Hole and an Edge or Between Two Holes

Machining Limits, Size Range

Plate Thickness			Limita	Limitb	Limitc
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1) EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)	EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	Limita	Limitb	Limitc
0.8	0.8	0.8	0.5	11.5	3.0
1.0	1.0	1.0	0.5
1.2	1.2	1.2	0.6
–	1.5	1.5	0.7
1.6	–	1.6	0.8
2.0	2.0	2.0	1.0	–
2.3	–	–	1.0
–	2.5	2.5	1.2
–	3.0	3.0	1.5
3.2	–	–	1.5
–	4.0	4.0	2.0
4.5	–	–	2.2
–	5.0	5.0	2.5
6.0	6.0	6.0	3.0
9.0	9.0	–	4.0
10.0	10.0		5.0
12.0	12.0		6.0
16.0	–		8.0

Plate Thickness	Limita	Limitb	Limitc
EN 1.0330 equiv. (for Shims)	Limita	Limitb	Limitc
0.1	1.0	–
0.2
0.3
0.5

Plate Thickness	Limita	Limitb	Limitc
EN 1.4301 equiv. (H) (for Shims)	Limita	Limitb	Limitc
0.05	0.5	–
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.8	0.8
1.0	1.0

Plate Thickness	Limita	Limitb	Limitc
Perforated Metal —60° staggered round hole type—	Limita	Limitb	Limitc
0.8	10.0	–
1.0
1.5

Plate Thickness				Limita	Limitb	Limitc
PET	Acrylic	Polycarbonate	PVC	Limita	Limitb	Limitc
3.0	3.0	3.0	3.0	2.0	–
5.0	5.0	5.0	5.0	2.0	–

Plate Thickness	Limita	Limitb	Limitc
Aluminum composite sheet (core material: foam polyethylene resin)	Limita	Limitb	Limitc
3.0	2.0	–

Example

*The distance between a tapped hole and the edge or between tapped holes is determined by the minimum distance from the outermost diameter of the tapped hole.
*The distance between friction drilled/tapped holes is determined from the minimum distance from the center of the hole.
*The distance between a countersunk hole and the edge or between countersunk holes is determined by the minimum distance from the outermost diameter of the counterbored part.

Minimum Diameter for Through Holes
Minimum Width of Rectangular/Slotted Holes/Other Holes

Machining Limits, Size Range

Plate Thickness				Limit d	Limit w1	Limit w2
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1) EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)	EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	Perforated Metal —60° staggered round hole type—	Limit d	Limit w1	Limit w2
0.8	0.8	0.8	0.8	0.4	0.8	0.8
1.0	1.0	1.0	1.0	0.5	1.0	1.0
1.2	1.2	1.2	–	0.6	1.2	1.2
–	1.5	1.5	1.5	0.7	1.5	1.5
1.6	–	1.6	–	0.8	1.6	1.6
2.0	2.0	2.0		1.0	2.0	2.0
2.3	–	–		1.1	2.3	2.3
–	2.5	2.5		1.2	2.5	2.5
–	3.0	3.0		1.5	3.0	3.0
3.2	–	–		1.6	3.0	3.0
–	4.0	4.0		2.0	3.0	3.0
4.5	–	–		2.2	4.0	4.0
–	5.0	5.0		2.5
6.0	–	–		3.0
–	6.0	6.0		3.0	6.0	6.0
9.0	9.0	–		4.5
10.0	10.0			5.0
12.0	12.0			6.0	8.0	8.0
16.0	–			8.0	10.0	10.0

Plate Thickness	Limit d	Limit w1	Limit w2
EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish)	Limit d	Limit w1	Limit w2
0.8	1.6	3.0	3.0
1.0	1.6
1.2	2.0
1.5	2.5
2.0	4.0	4.5	4.5
3.0	4.5	4.5	4.5

Plate Thickness		Limit d	Limit w1	Limit w2
EN 1.0330 equiv. (for Shims)	EN 1.4301 equiv.(H) (for Shims)	Limit d	Limit w1	Limit w2
–	0.05	0.3	0.5	0.5
0.1	0.1
0.2	0.2
0.3	0.3
0.5	0.5
–	0.8	1.0	0.8	0.8
–	1.0	1.0	1.0	1.0

Plate Thickness				Limit d	Limit w1	Limit w2
PET	Acrylic	Polycarbonate	PVC	Limit d	Limit w1	Limit w2
3.0	3.0	3.0	3.0	1.5	3.0	7.0
5.0	5.0	5.0	5.0	1.5	3.0	7.0

Plate Thickness	Limit d	Limit w1	Limit w2
Aluminum composite sheet (core material: foam polyethylene resin)	Limit d	Limit w1	Limit w2
3.0	2.0	3.0	7.0

Example

Minimum Size of Cutout Shape

Machining Limits, Size Range

Material	Plate Thickness	Minimum Value	Limit Value
Material	Plate Thickness	Cutout Width/Depth A
EN 1.0330 equiv. (for shims)	0.1	0.5	0.3
	0.2
	0.3
	0.5	0.8	0.4
EN 1.4301 equiv.(H) (for shims)	0.05	0.5	0.3
	0.1
	0.2
	0.3
	0.5	0.8	0.4
	0.8	1.2	0.5
	1.0	1.5	0.5
PET	3.0	–	7.0
PET	5.0
Acrylic	3.0
Acrylic	5.0
Polycarbonate	3.0
Polycarbonate	5.0
PVC	3.0
PVC	5.0
Aluminum composite sheet (core material: foam polyethylene resin)	3.0	–	7.0

Example

Minimum Slit Width (when the part is unfolded).

Machining Limits, Size Range

Plate Thickness				Minimum Slit Width (when the part is unfolded).
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)	EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	Perforated Metal —60° staggered round hole type—	Guaranteed Width a	Limit a
0.8	0.8	0.8	0.8	0.8	0.5
1.0	1.0	1.0	1.0	1.0	0.5
1.2	1.2	1.2	–	1.2	0.5
–	1.5	1.5	1.5	1.5	0.5
1.6	–	1.6	–	1.6	0.5
2.0	2.0	2.0		2.0	0.5
2.3	–	–		2.3	0.8
–	2.5	2.5		2.5	0.8
–	3.0	3.0		3.0	1.5
3.2	–	–		3.2	1.6
–	4.0	4.0		4.0	2.0
4.5	–	–		4.5	2.3
–	5.0	5.0		5.0	2.5
6.0	6.0	6.0		6.0	3.0
9.0	9.0	–		9.0	4.5
10.0	10.0			10.0	5.0
12.0	12.0			12.0	6.0
16.0	–			16.0	8.0

Example

Folded Part View

Unfolded Part View

Detailed Slit View

Minimum Bending Height : Normal Bending

Machining Limits, Size Range

Material	Plate Thickness	Limit h

EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv.	0.8	4.2
	1.0	4.3
	1.2	5.5
	1.6	6.8
	2.0	8.2
	2.3	9.4
	3.2	13.3
	4.5	17.4
	6.0	23.5
	9.0	33.5
	10.0	46.5
	12.0	62.0
	16.0	88.5
EN1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	0.8	4.2
	1.0	4.3
	1.2	4.5
	1.6	5.8
	2.0	7.0
	2.3	8.3
	3.2	11.1
EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1) EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)	0.8	4.2
	1.0	4.3
	1.2	4.5
	1.5	6.0
	2.0	7.1
	2.5	11.3
	3.0	11.5
	4.0	17.2
	5.0	23.5
	6.0	25.0
	9.0	39.0
	10.0	46.5
	12.0	62.0
EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	0.8	4.2
	1.0	4.3
	1.2	5.5
	1.5	6.0
	1.6	6.0
	2.0	8.2
	2.5	10.0
	3.0	13.3
	4.0	17.2
	5.0	27.0
	6.0	28.0
Perforated Metal —60° staggered round hole type—	0.8	4.2
	1.0	4.3
	1.5	6.0

Example

Minimum Bending Height : R-bend shape

Machining Limits, Size Range

Material	Plate Thickness	Limit h

EN 1.0330 equiv.	0.8	2.6
	1.0	2.3
	1.2	3.1
	1.6	3.6
	2.0	4.2
	2.3	4.8
	3.2	6.9
EN1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	0.8	2.6
	1.0	2.3
	1.2	2.1
	1.6	2.6
	2.0	3.0
	2.3	3.7
	3.2	4.7
EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)	0.8	2.6
	1.0	2.3
	1.2	2.1
	1.5	3.0
	2.0	3.1
	2.5	6.3
	3.0	5.5
EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	0.8	2.6
	1.0	2.3
	1.2	2.1
	1.5	3.0
	1.6	2.8
	2.0	3.1
	2.5	5.0
	3.0	5.5
Perforated Metal —60° staggered round hole type—	0.8	2.6
	1.0	2.3
	1.5	3.0

Example

The minimum bending height

Machining Limits, Size Range

Material	Plate Thickness	Surface Treatment
		None	Paint Electroless Nickel Plating Black oxide Trivalent Chromate (Clear)	Trivalent Chromate (Black)	Electrolytic Galvanized Hot Galvanaized
		Limit a
EN 1.0330 equiv./EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating) EN 1.0330 equiv.	0.8	8.2	6.8	7.1	–
	1.0	8.5	6.8	7.5
	1.2	9.9	9.0	8.4
	1.6	11.6	9.5	9.2
	2.0	13.1	13.5	11.0
	2.3	13.7	14.0	11.6
	3.2	19.4	22.0	15.4
	4.5	28.0	28.0	20.0
	6.0	37.3	32.0	30.0
	9.0	56.8	57.0	–
	10.0	75.1	–
	12.0	91.0
	16.0	158.0

Material	Plate Thickness	Finishing Method
		2B Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished Single-sided hairline finish No.1
		Limit a
EN 1.4301 equiv. EN 1.4016 equiv.	0.8	6.9
	1.0	7.4
	1.2	7.9
	1.5	9.7
	2.0	12.6
	2.5	17.6
	3.0	18.6
	4.0	26.6
	5.0	33.8
	6.0	36.4
	9.0	56.8
	10.0	75.1
	12.0	91.0

Material	Plate Thickness	Surface Treatment
		None	Clear Anodized Black Anodized Black Anodized (matte) (Outer Diameter ≤ 300 mm)
		Clear Anodized Black Anodized Black Anodized (matte) (Outer Diameter > 300 mm)
		Limit a
EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	0.8	6.8	7.1
	1.0	6.8	7.5
	1.2	9.0	9.0
	1.5	9.5	9.0
	1.6	9.5	9.5
	2.0	13.5	11.0
	2.5	15.5	15.5
	3.0	22.0	15.0
	4.0	28.0	19.0
	5.0	44.0	28.0
	6.0	48.0	48.0

Material	Plate Thickness	Limit a
Perforated Metal —60° staggered round hole type—	0.8	6.8
	1.0	6.8
	1.5	9.5

Example

Width specification range for bending

Machining Limits, Size Range

Plate Thickness			Dimensional Range w
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1) EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)	EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	Dimensional Range w
0.8	0.8	0.8	5～1200
1.0	1.0	1.0
1.2	1.2	1.2
–	1.5	1.5
1.6	–	1.6
2.0	2.0	2.0
2.3	–	–	10～1200
–	2.5	2.5
–	3.0	3.0
3.2	–	–
–	4.0	4.0
4.5	–	–
–	5.0	5.0
6.0	–	–
–	6.0	6.0	10～800
9.0	–	–	10～835
–	9.0		10～550
10.0	–		20～835
–	10.0		20～550
12.0	–		20～750
–	12.0		20～500
16.0	–		20～500

Plate Thickness	Dimensional Range w
Perforated Metal —60° staggered round hole type—	Dimensional Range w
0.8	30–900
1.0
1.5

Example

Minimum Distance Between a Hole and Bend : Normal Bending

Machining Limits, Size Range

Material	Plate Thickness	Hole Type
		Through Hole		Slotted/Rectangular Hole		Tapped Hole		Burring Tap Hole	Countersunk Holes
		Minimum a *1	Limit a	Minimum a *1	Limit a	Minimum a *2	Limit a	Limit a *1	Minimum a	Limit a

EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv.	0.8	4.2	2.0	–	4.2	–	–	4.2	–	–
	1.0	4.3	2.0		4.3	4.8	2.7	4.3
	1.2	5.5	3.0		5.5	6.0	3.9	5.5
	1.6	6.8	3.5		6.8	7.3	5.2	6.8
	2.0	8.0	4.0		8.0	8.7	6.6	–	8.0	4.0
	2.3	9.3	5.0		9.3	9.9	7.8		9.3	5.0
	3.2	13.3	6.5		13.3	13.8	11.7		12.1	6.5
	4.5	17.4	9.5		17.4	18.4	16.3		18.4	9.5
	6.0	23.5	14.0		23.5	24.5	22.4		24.5	16.0
	9.0	33.5	21.5		33.5	34.5	32.4		33.5	21.5
	10.0	46.5	22.5		48.5	47.5	47.5		46.5	46.5
	12.0	62.0	26.5		62.0	63.0	63.0		62.0	62.0
	16.0	88.5	34.5		88.5	89.5	89.5		88.5	88.5
SECC	0.8	4.2	2.0	4.2	2.0	–	–	4.2	–	–
	1.0	4.3	2.0	4.3	2.0	5.3	3.2	4.3
	1.2	4.5	3.0	4.5	3.0	5.5	3.4	4.5
	1.6	5.8	3.5	–	5.8	6.8	4.7	5.8
	2.0	7.0	4.0	7.0	4.0	8.0	5.9	–	8.0	4.0
	2.3	8.3	5.0	8.3	5.0	9.3	7.2		9.3	5.0
	3.2	11.1	6.5	11.1	6.0	12.1	10.0		12.1	6.5
EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1) EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)	0.8	4.2	2.0	–	4.2	–	–	4.2	–	–
	1.0	4.3	2.0		4.3	5.3	3.2	4.3
	1.2	4.5	3.0		4.5	5.5	3.4	4.5
	1.5	6.0	3.5		6.0	7.0	4.9	6.0
	2.0	7.1	4.0		7.1	8.1	6.0	–	8.1	4.0
	2.5	11.3	6.3		11.3	12.3	10.2		12.3	6.3
	3.0	11.5	6.5		11.5	12.5	10.4		12.5	6.5
	4.0	17.2	11.5		17.2	18.2	16.1		18.2	11.5
	5.0	23.5	14.0		23.5	24.5	22.4		24.5	15.0
	6.0	25.0	19.0		25.0	26.0	24.0		26.0	17.0
	9.0	39.0	20.5		39.0	40.0	40.0		39.0	39.0
	10.0	46.5	22.5		46.5	47.5	47.5		46.5	46.5
	12.0	62.0	26.5		62.0	63.0	63.0		62.0	62.0
EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	0.8	4.2	4.2	–	4.2	–	–	4.2	–	–
	1.0	4.3	4.3		4.3	5.2	4.3	4.3
	1.2	5.5	5.5		5.5	5.5	5.5	5.5
	1.5	6.0	6.0		6.0	7.0	6.0	6.0
	1.6	6.0	6.0		6.0	7.0	6.0	6.0
	2.0	8.2	8.2		8.2	8.2	8.2	–	8.2	8.2
	2.5	10.0	10.0		10.0	11.0	10.0		10.5	10.0
	3.0	13.3	13.3		13.3	13.3	13.3		13.3	13.3
	4.0	17.2	17.2		17.2	18.2	17.2		18.2	17.2
	5.0	27.0	27.0		27.0	27.0	27.0		27.0	27.0
	6.0	28.0	28.0		28.0	28.0	28.0		28.0	28.0
Perforiertes Metall —60° staggered round hole type—	0.8	4.2	2.0	–	4.2	–	–	–	–	–
	1.0	4.3	2.0		4.3
	1.5	6.0	3.5		6.0

*1 The hole may be deformed if it is below the minimum value.
The dimensions are therefore inaccurate, but will be processed as they are.
*2 If the distance is under the minimum value, re-tapping will be necessary and the fit may be affected.

Example

If there are internal angles of less than 90°, machining may not be possible even within the safe value range. If this is the case, meviy Support will contact you.

Minimum Distance Between a Hole and Bend : R-bend shape

Machining Limits, Size Range

Material	Plate Thickness	Hole Type
		Through Hole		Slotted/Rectangular Hole		Tapped Hole		Burring Tap Hole	Countersunk Holes
		Minimum a *1	Limit a	Minimum a *1	Limit a	Minimum a *2	Limit a	Limit a *1	Minimum a	Limit a

EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled)	0.8	2.6	0.4	–	2.6	–	–	2.6	–	–
	1.0	2.3	0.1		2.3	2.8	0.7	2.3
	1.2	3.1	0.6		3.1	3.6	1.5	3.1
	1.6	3.6	0.3		3.6	4.1	2.0	3.6
	2.0	4.0	0.1		4.0	4.7	2.6	–	4.0	0.1
	2.3	4.7	0.4		4.7	5.3	3.2		4.7	0.4
	3.2	6.9	0.1		6.9	7.4	5.3		5.7	0.1
EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	0.8	2.6	0.4	2.6	0.4	–	–	2.6	–	–
	1.0	2.3	0.1	2.3	0.1	3.3	1.2	2.3
	1.2	2.1	0.6	2.1	0.6	3.1	1.0	2.1
	1.6	2.6	0.3	–	2.6	3.6	1.5	2.6
	2.0	3.0	0.1	3.0	0.1	4.0	1.9	–	4.0	0.1
	2.3	3.7	0.4	3.7	0.4	4.7	2.6		4.7	0.4
	3.2	4.7	0.1	4.7	0.1	5.7	3.6		5.7	0.1
EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)	0.8	2.6	0.4	–	2.6	–	–	2.6	–	–
	1.0	2.3	1.0		2.3	3.3	1.2	2.3
	1.2	2.1	0.6		2.1	3.1	1.0	2.1
	1.5	3.0	0.5		3.0	4.0	1.9	3.0
	2.0	3.1	0.1		3.1	4.1	2.0	–	4.1	0.1
	2.5	6.3	1.3		6.3	7.3	5.2		7.3	1.3
	3.0	5.5	0.5		5.5	6.5	4.4		6.5	0.5
EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	0.8	2.6	0.4	–	2.6	–	–	2.6	–	–
	1.0	2.2	0.1		2.3	3.2	1.1	2.2
	1.2	1.9	0.1		3.1	2.9	0.8	1.9
	1.5	3.0	0.5		3.0	4.0	1.9	3.0
	1.6	2.8	0.3		2.8	3.8	1.7	2.8
	2.0	3.1	0.1		4.2	4.1	2.0	–	4.1	0.1
	2.5	5.0	0.1		5.0	6.0	4.0		5.5	0.1
	3.0	5.5	0.1		7.3	6.5	4.4		6.5	0.1
Perforiertes Metall —60° staggered round hole type—	0.8	2.6	0.4	–	2.6	–	–	–	–	–
	1.0	2.3	0.1		2.3
	1.5	3.0	0.5		3.0

*1 The hole may be deformed if it is below the minimum value.
The dimensions are therefore inaccurate, but will be processed as they are.
*2 If the distance is under the minimum value, re-tapping will be necessary and the fit may be affected.

Example

Slit on the bending line (except for acute angle bending shapes with an internal angle of less than 90°).

Machining Limits, Size Range

Plate Thickness		Minimuma *1	Minimumb *2	Limitc
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1) EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (single-sided #400-grit polished) EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B) EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	Minimuma *1	Minimumb *2	Limitc
0.8	0.8	0.8	1.2	0.5
1.0	1.0	1.0	1.5	0.5
1.2	1.2	1.2	1.8	0.6
–	1.5	1.5	2.3	0.7
1.6	1.6 *4	1.6	2.4	0.8
2.0	2.0	2.0	3.0	1.0
2.3	–	2.3	3.5	1.0
–	2.5	2.5	3.8	1.2
–	3.0	3.0	4.5	1.5
3.2	–	3.2	4.8	1.5
–	4.0	4.0	6.0	2.0
4.5	–	4.5	6.7	2.2
–	5.0	5.0	7.5	2.5
6.0	6.0	6.0	9.0	3.0
9.0	–	9.0	13.5	4.0
10.0	10.0	10.0	15.0	5.0
12.0	12.0	12.0	18.0	6.0
16.0	–	16.0	24.0	8.0

*1 When a is not secured by the slit’s horizontal width, or when there is an acute angle bend, we can still provide an estimate, but instead of the limit value c, the aforementioned “Minimum distance between the hole and the bend” will be the limit value for the hole position.
*2 If the slit’s height is smaller than b or the outside R (fillet size) of the bend, automatic quotation is not possible.
*3 The limit value c is uniformly 3.0 mm only when the nearby hole in the right figure is a burring tap.
*4 Only for EN AW−5052 equiv.

Example

*Reference) Comparative example of machining limits of hole positions with or without openings

Comparison Example of Representative Materials

		No Opening (See: Minimum Distance Between a Hole and Bend h1			With Opening (Minimum Distance Between Nearest Hole and Bend) h2
Material	Plate Thickness	Minimum Distance Between a Through Hole and Bend	Minimum Distance Between a Rectangular/Slotted Hole and Bend	Minimum Distance Between a Tapped Hole and Bend
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating) EN 1.0038 equiv.	0.8	2.0	2.0	–	1.7
	1.0	2.0	2.0	2.7	2.0
	1.2	3.0	3.0	3.9	2.4
	1.6	3.5	3.5	5.2	3.2
	2.0	4.0	4.0	6.6	4.0
	2.3	5.0	5.0	7.8	4.5
	3.2	6.5	6.5	11.7	6.3
	4.5	9.5	9.5	16.3	8.9
	6.0	14.0	14.0	22.4	12.0
	9.0	21.5	21.5	32.4	17.5
	10.0	22.5	22.5	47.5	20.0
	12.0	26.5	26.5	63.0	24.0
	16.0	34.5	34.5	89.5	32.0

		No Opening (See: Minimum Distance Between a Hole and Bend h1			With Opening (Minimum Distance Between Nearest Hole and Bend) h2
Material	Plate Thickness	Minimum Distance Between a Through Hole and Bend	Minimum Distance Between a Rectangular/Slotted Hole and Bend	Minimum Distance Between a Tapped Hole and Bend
EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1) EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) Other stainless steel materials	0.8	2.0	4.2	–	1.7
	1.0	2.0	4.3	3.2	2.0
	1.2	3.0	4.5	3.4	2.4
	1.5	3.5	6.0	4.9	3.0
	2.0	4.0	7.1	6.0	4.0
	2.5	6.3	11.3	10.2	5.0
	3.0	6.5	11.5	10.4	6.0
	4.0	11.5	17.2	16.1	8.0
	5.0	14.0	23.5	22.4	10.0
	6.0	19.0	25.0	24.0	12.0
	9.0	20.5	20.5	40.5	17.5
	10.0	22.5	22.5	47.5	20.0
	12.0	26.5	26.5	63.0	24.0

		No Opening (See: Minimum Distance Between a Hole and Bend h1			With Opening (Minimum Distance Between Nearest Hole and Bend) h2
Material	Plate Thickness	Minimum Distance Between a Through Hole and Bend	Minimum Distance Between a Rectangular/Slotted Hole and Bend	Minimum Distance Between a Tapped Hole and Bend
EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	0.8	2.0	2.0	–	1.7
	1.0	2.0	2.0	3.1	2.0
	1.2	2.5	2.5	3.2	2.4
	1.5	3.5	3.5	4.9	3.0
	1.6	3.5	3.5	4.9	3.2
	2.0	4.0	4.0	6.0	4.0
	2.5	4.5	4.5	9.0	5.0
	3.0	5.0	5.0	10.4	6.0
	4.0	11.5	11.5	16.1	8.0
	5.0	12.0	12.0	16.8	10.0
	6.0	13.0	13.0	21.0	12.0

Image/Prerequisites

These comparative examples are a selection of representative materials and hole types. It is also effective with other materials and hole types that are not listed.
Comparison of the outer radius of a bend (fillet size) and the height of the opening on the bend line when modeling to the minimum value “b.” · If the height of the opening is modeled to greater than “b,” the h2value will differ.

Minimum distance between nuts

Machining Limits, Size Range

Press-fit nut		material
Press-fit nut		EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv. (2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.	EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))
Nominal diameter	M3	14	15.5	14
	M4	15	17	15
	M5	15	18	15
	M6	17	20	17
	M8	19	23	19

Weld (spot) nut		material
Weld (spot) nut		EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv. (2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.
Nominal diameter	M4	21	21
	M5	21	21
	M6	23	23
	M8	25	25
	M10	28	27
	M12	30	29

Example

*If multiple sizes of nuts are mounted, the distance will be decided by the minimum value of the larger nut.

Minimum distance between nut and hole

Machining Limits, Size Range

Press-fit nut		material
Press-fit nut		EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv. (2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.	EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))
Nominal diameter	M3	11.2	12.8	11.2
	M4	14.4	13.5	12.1
	M5	14.4	14	12.7
	M6	15.6	15	13.8
	M8	17	16.5	15.6

Weld (spot) nut		material
Weld (spot) nut		EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv. (2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.
Nominal diameter	M4	16	15.5
	M5	16	15.5
	M6	18	16.5
	M8	21	17.5
	M10	23	18.5
	M12	25	19.5

Example

Minimum distance between nut and edge of the material

Machining Limits, Size Range

Press-fit nut		material
Press-fit nut		EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv. (2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.	EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))
Nominal diameter	M3	4.5	6.7	4.5
	M4	5.5	7.6	5.5
	M5	6.5	8.2	6.5
	M6	8	9.3	8
	M8	10	11.1	10

Weld (spot) nut		material
Weld (spot) nut		EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv. (2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.
Nominal diameter	M4	7.5	7.9
	M5	7.5	7.9
	M6	9	9.1
	M8	10.4	10.7
	M10	12.5	12.9
	M12	14.5	15

Example

Maximum distance between nut and edge of the material

Machining Limits, Size Range

Maximum distance	material
Maximum distance	EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating)	EN 1.4301 equiv. (2B) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-Sided #400-Grit Polished) EN 1.4301 equiv. (Single-sided hairline finish) EN 1.4016 equiv.	EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))
Press-fit nut（coarse）	450	290	450
Weld nut（coarse）	500	930 *	500

*The maximum distance would be 500 when R bending is included

Example

*With the plate developed into a flat plate, measure the distance between any material edge and the center of the nut, and use the smallest value to judge it can produce or not.

Minimum distance between engravings, between edge or hole

Machining Limits, Size Range

Plate Thickness			Minimum distance between edge	Through Hole・Tapped Hole・Countersunk Holes・Slotted/Rectangular hole		Burring Tap Hole
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv.	EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1) EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)	EN AW-5052 equiv.	Limit a	Guaranteed value b	Limit b	Guaranteed value c	Limit c
0.8	0.8	0.8	2.0	4.0	2.0	5.0	3.0
1.0	1.0	1.0
1.2	1.2	1.2
–	1.5	1.5
1.6	–	1.6
2.0	2.0	2.0				–	–
2.3	–	–
–	2.5	2.5
–	3.0	3.0
3.2	–	–
–	4.0	4.0
4.5	–	–
–	5.0	5.0
6.0	6.0	6.0
9.0	9.0	–
10.0	10.0
12.0	12.0
16.0	–

Example

*The distances between holes and the etched letter are measured from the outer edge of the etched letter to the outermost diameter.
* As an exception of Friction drilled/tapped holes, the limit value of c is consistently set at 3.0 mm.
* If the distance is below the guaranteed limit, The etched text may be deformed.

Minimum distance between engraving and nut

Nut (Press-fit)		material properties
		EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled)		EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)		EN AW-5052 equiv.
		Guaranteed value a	Limit a	Guaranteed value a	Limit a	Guaranteed value a	Limit a
Nominal diameter	M3	6.5	4.5	8.7	6.7	6.5	4.5
	M4	7.5	5.5	9.6	7.6	7.5	5.5
	M5	8.5	6.5	10.2	8.2	8.5	6.5
	M6	10.0	8.0	11.3	9.3	10.0	8.0
	M8	12.0	10.0	13.1	11.1	12.0	10.0

Nut (spot welding)		material properties
		EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled)		EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B)
		Guaranteed value a	Limit a	Guaranteed value a	Limit a
Nominal diameter	M4	9.5	7.5	9.9	7.9
	M5	9.5	7.5	9.9	7.9
	M6	11.0	9.0	11.1	9.1
	M8	12.4	10.4	12.7	10.7
	M10	14.5	12.5	14.9	12.9
	M11	16.5	14.5	17.0	15.0

Example

*The minimum bending height for each material and thickness is applied to the guaranteed limit from the outer edge of the etched letter.
*If the distance is below the guaranteed limit, The etched text may be deformed.

Minimum distance between engraving and bending

Machining Limits

material properties	Plate Thickness	Guaranteed value h	Limit h
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled) EN 1.0038 equiv.	0.8	6.2	4.2
	1.0	6.3	4.3
	1.2	7.5	5.5
	1.6	8.8	6.8
	2.0	10.2	8.2
	2.3	11.4	9.4
	3.2	15.3	13.3
	4.5	19.4	17.4
	6.0	25.5	23.5
	9.0	41.0	39.0
	10.0	48.5	46.5
	12.0	64.0	62.0
	16.0	90.5	88.5
EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4016 equiv.(2B) EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1)	0.8	6.2	4.2
	1.0	6.3	4.3
	1.2	6.5	4.5
	1.5	8.0	6.0
	2.0	9.1	7.1
	2.5	13.3	11.3
	3.0	13.5	11.5
	4.0	19.2	17.2
	5.0	25.5	23.5
	6.0	27.0	25.0
	9.0	41.0	39.0
	10.0	48.5	46.5
	12.0	64.0	62.0
EN AW-5052 equiv.	0.8	6.2	4.2
	1.0	6.3	4.3
	1.2	7.5	5.5
	1.5	8.0	6.0
	1.6	8.0	6.0
	2.0	10.2	8.2
	2.5	12.0	10.0
	3.0	15.3	13.3
	4.0	19.2	17.2
	5.0	29.0	27.0
	6.0	30.0	28.0

Example

*The minimum bending height for each material and thickness is applied to the guaranteed limit from the outer edge of the etched letter.
*If the distance is below the guaranteed limit, The etched text may be deformed.

Minimum Angle for Acute Angle Bending

Machining Limits, Size Range

The angle (θ) for acute angle bending must be 45° or more.
(However, when the plate thickness is 9 mm, the acute angle (θ) must be 88° or more.)

Material	Plate Thickness	Bend angle
EN 1.4301 equiv.(2B)	6.0	θ≥50°
EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) EN AW-5052 equiv. (pre-finished anodized plate (black))	2.5　3.0　4.0　5.0	θ≥60°
	6.0	θ≥88°
EN 1.0330 equiv. EN 1.0320 equiv. (hot coiled)	4.5　6.0
EN 1.0038 equiv.	9.0　10.0　12.0
EN 1.0038 equiv.	9.0　10.0　12.0　16.0

Example

Minimum Radius of Rectangular Holes

Machining Limits, Size Range

The radius (R) of the corners of a rectangular hole must be 0.5 mm or more.
(For clear resin/composite material, this must be 3 mm or more.)

Example

Bending Interference　｜
Design Guidelines for C-Bends and Stepped Bends (Z-Bends)　｜
Presence of Edges Parallel to the Bend Line　｜
Minimum distance between cutout and bend　｜
Confirmation of nut interference during bending

Bending Interference

For sheet metal parts, the meviy platform performs interference analysis for the bending process.
The forming will be deemed impossible if the results of the analysis suggest there will be interference with the die.

Example 1) Model image before and after bending during normal conditions

Example 2) Model image where die interference occurs

If a warning message is displayed, check the part for any interference using “Check the interference image” and consider changing the shape.
After taking corrective action, re-upload the 3D model and check the revised quotation results.
The design guidelines for C-bends and stepped bends (Z-bends) are provided below as more detailed examples. See below.

Design Guidelines for C-Bends and Stepped Bends (Z-Bends)

To prevent die interference, design models with reference to the standard shapes shown below.

Modeling Rules	Example
When outer dimension A is less than or equal to outer dimension C, set inner dimension B so that it is greater than A. Outer dimensions A and C must be at least the minimum bending height (See machining limits: minimum bending height, mentioned above)
The stepped bend height should be equal to dimension A plus double the plate thickness (t). Dimension A must be equal to or greater than the minimum bending height (See machining limits: minimum bending height, mentioned above).

However, the meviy platform determines whether it is possible to manufacture the model based upon positive results of the interference analysis. (Examples given below)

Example 3) C-shaped bending interference:　Adjust the size of the channel web in order to clear any interference (the figure on the right shows the analysis image).

Example 4) Stepped bending interference:　Adjust the bending height to clear any interference (the figure on the right shows the analysis image).

Presence of Edges Parallel to the Bend Line

Any backgauges used in the bending process, along with the edges of parts, are taken into consideration in the interference analysis of the bending process. The angle of the part during the bending process may not be stable if there are no edges parallel to the bend line, creating a risk that the bend may not be made in the correct position. If the below message is displayed, consider changing the shape such that the model includes edges parallel to the bend line.

Example 1) No edges parallel to the bend line

Example 2) Edge parallel to the bend line [automatic quoting available]

Minimum distance between cutout and bend

The bending process is carried out by placing the workpiece (to be bent) on a die and punching it from above.
However, if the shape of the workpiece does not align on both ends of the die, it cannot be bent.

For the minimum distance between the cutout and the bend, we recommend the following.
Please note that if the value falls below the minimum value, the bending line may shift because part of the workpiece is no longer covered by the bending die.
The dimensions will be inaccurate, but will be processed as they are.
In the case of a part that falls below the limit value, it may not be possible to process it. In this case, we will contact you.

Modelling rules	Location
For plate thickness t, the limit value of h should be as follows 0.8 ≦ t ≦ 2.0, limit value = 5t 2.3 ≦ t ≦ 9.0, the limit value = 4t
For plate thickness t, the minimum and limit values of b should be as follows 0.8 ≦ t ≦2.0, guaranteed value = 2t, limit value = t 2.3 ≦ t ≦ 9.0, guaranteed value = none, limit value = 2t

Confirmation of nut interference during bending

In the interference analysis during bending, the analysis is performed with the 3D shape of the nut reproduced for the part where the nut can be mounted.
If interference with the die is found as a result of the analysis, the area will be judged that the nut cannot be attached.

When uploading a model to meviy, a “Quotation failure” error may occur.
Below is an overview of why these errors occur and how to resolve them,as well as some example errors.

What is a quotation failure? Case 1: Failure to read uploaded file Case 2: Unsupported shape Case 3: Plate thickness not available Case 4: Uneven plate thickness Case 5: Distance between features Case 6: Bend-to-hole distance Case 7: Undersized bend height Case 8: Interference during bending Case 9: Unrecognized holeshape Case 10: Shape recognition failure

What is a quotation failure?

When uploading a model to meviy, an error may occur where the model cannot be auto-quoted.

How to check for errors in the project list

After uploading a model to meviy, the “” or “” icon will appear if the model cannot be auto-quoted.
In this case, please go to the 3D Viewer and confirm the details of the error from the Precaution column.

How to check error messages in the 3D Viewer

Please open 3D viewer and check “Precaution”.
If you click “Check”, you will see error messages and a range for auto-quotation.
Depending on error cause, a range for auto-auotation may not be displayed.

How to locate an error

Clicking the “Confirm” button will highlight the error location in the model.
Once this error is resolved, automatic quoting will be possible.

Case 1: Failure to read uploaded file

This error occurs when a 3DCAD format or extension that is not supported by meviy is uploaded.
To resolve this, please check the formats supported by meviy and re-upload a supported format.

Notes

Please see below for the formats and extensions that can be uploaded to meviy.

Before You Begin＞Uploadable CAD File Formats

Case 2: Unsupported shape

This error is caused by uploading a shape that is not eligible for automatic quotation with meviy’s Sheet Metal Plate service.
To resolve this, please check the quotable shapes and modify the model accordingly.

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “There is an unsupported shape.”

Notes

See below for shapes supported by the Sheet Metal service.
→ [FA Mechanical Parts] Sheet Metal Parts＞Applicable parts/Materials＞Shapes Eligible for Quotation

Case 3: Plate thickness not available

This error occurs when the requested plate thickness is not supported.
To resolve this, modify the model to match the corresponding plate thicknesses.

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “There are no supported sheet thicknesses.”

Notes

The part thickness must match one of the gauge thicknesses supported by meviy Sheet Metal.

Please refer to the following for available sheet thicknesses.
→ [FA Mechanical Parts] Sheet Metal Parts＞Applicable parts/Materials＞Material, Surface Treatment, Size

Case 4: Uneven plate thickness

This error occurs when the plate thickness is not constant during modeling or when the R length setting is not within the correct range.
To resolve this, modify the model to create a uniform sheet thickness.

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “Model sheet thickness is non-uniform.”

Notes

Please see below for sheet metal modeling guidelines.
→ [FA Mechanical Parts] Sheet Metal Parts＞Design Guidelines＞Basic Modeling Rules

Case 5: Distance between features

This error occurs when the distance between holes and end faces, or between holes is below the limit.
To resolve this, please increase the distance between the hole and the end face/hole.

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “XX and XX are too close.”

Notes

See below for minimum distances between holes and end faces/holes.
→ [FA Mechanical Parts] Sheet Metal Parts＞Design Guidelines＞Range of Machining Limits

Please also use the measurement function to check the distance.
→ [FA Sheet Metal] Quotation Settings＞Measuring 3D models

If you have any questions, please request a manual quotation by meviy support. See below for assistance on manual quotations.
→Quotation conditions settings＞[FA Sheet Metal] Quotation Settings＞Information about manual quotation

Case 6: Bend-to-hole distance

This error occurs when the bend-to-hole distance is below the limit.
To resolve this, either increase the distance between the bend and the hole or create an opening on the bend line (clearance hole).

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “XX and XX are too close.”

Notes

See below for the required minimum distance between a hole and a bend.
→ [FA Mechanical Parts] Sheet Metal Parts＞Design Guidelines＞Range of Machining Limits

See below for rules on openings on the bend line.
→ [FA Mechanical Parts] Sheet Metal Parts＞Design Guidelines＞Range of Machining Limits

If you have any questions, please request a manual quotation by meviy support. See below for assistance on manual quotations.
→Quotation conditions settings＞[FA Sheet Metal] Quotation Settings＞Information about manual quotation

Case 7: Undersized bend height

This error occurs when the bending height is below the limit.
To resolve this, increase the bending height to a sufficient height.

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “The bend height is too small.”

Notes

See below for minimum bending heights.
→ [FA Mechanical Parts] Sheet Metal Parts＞Design Guidelines＞Range of Machining Limits

Case 8: Interference during bending

This error occurs when the part geometry causes interference during bending.
To resolve this, modify the part design to avoid interference.

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “The part and mold are interfering during bending.”

Notes

See below for guidelines on die interference during bending.
→ [FA Mechanical Parts] Sheet Metal Parts＞Design Guidelines＞Bending Conditions

Case 9: Unrecognized holeshape

This error occurs when there is an unrecognized hole shape.
To resolve this, please change the hole to a supported shape and re-upload the file.

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “There is an unsupported hole shape.”

Notes

See below for tapped hole recognition.
→ [FA Mechanical Parts] Sheet Metal Parts＞Design Guidelines＞Tapped Hole Identification and Selectable Sizes

→ [FA Mechanical Parts] Sheet Metal Parts＞Design Guidelines＞Friction Drilled/Tapped Holes Modeling and Sizes

Case 10: Shape recognition failure

This error occurs when there is a problem with the quality of the uploaded 3D CAD data, and the shape is deformed when mevyi is loaded.
If the shape is deformed, please try the following steps to see if you can get a quote.

State of original data

State after meviy is loaded

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “An error shape exists in the model.”
– “Failed to load file.”

1. Shape check of uploaded 3D CAD data

Check the shape of the uploaded 3D CAD data.
If there is a problem with the shape, correct it and upload the model again.

Notes

Visual check
– Are there any twisted surfaces?
– Are there any unintended geometric features displayed in the cross-section view?
– Are there any very small shapes or gaps?

Confirmation of the shape creation method
– Are there any 3D shapes created without drawing sketches?
– Shapes created by importing lines from DXF
– Shapes created using reference geometry or mating part geometry
– Are there any intersecting lines created by intersecting holes?
– etc.

Confirmation using checking tools
– Check for inconsistent shapes

If there is no problem with the shape, or if the loading situation does not improve after re-uploading the corrected file, please try the next step “2.

２．Changing the file format

Upload the file again in a different 3D CAD file format from the one you uploaded.

Notes

– If meviy supports the native format of the 3D CAD file you are using, please try quoting in the native format.
– If you are using an intermediate format, please try quoting in STEP or Parasolid format.

If modifying the geometry and changing the file format does not improve the situation, please contact our support.

No.	Standard Part	Classification of Standard Dimensions	Product lineup
			Standard Values*
			Standard			International Economy
			Normal bending		R bending (FR bending)	Normal bending		R bending (FR bending)
			Plate thickness ≦ 6.0mm	Plate thickness > 6.0mm	Plate thickness ≦ 3.2mm	Plate thickness ≦ 6.0mm	Plate thickness > 6.0mm	Plate thickness ≦ 3.0mm
1	Section with no bending	6 or less	±0.1	±0.3	±0.3	±0.4	–	±0.3
		More than 6, equal to or less than 30	±0.2	±0.5	±0.5	±0.6	–	±0.55
		More than 30, equal to or less than 120	±0.3	±0.8	±0.8	±0.8	–	±0.75
		More than 120, equal to or less than 400	±0.5	±1.2	±1.2	±1.05	–	±1.00
		More than 400, equal to or less than 1,000	±0.8	±2.0	±2.0	±1.45	–	±1.40
		More than 1,000, equal to or less than 2,000	±1.2	±3.0	±3.0	±2.0	–	±1.8
2	Section with bending	6 or less	±0.3	±0.5	±0.5	±0.9	–	±1.00
		More than 6, equal to or less than 30	±0.5	±1.0	±1.0	±1.3	–	±1.3
		More than 30, equal to or less than 120	±0.8	±1.5	±1.5	±1.6	–	±1.6
		More than 120, equal to or less than 400	±1.2	±2.5	±2.5	±2.0	–	±2.0
		More than 400, equal to or less than 1,000	±2.0	±4.0	±4.0	±2.8	–	±2.8
		More than 1,000, equal to or less than 2,000	±3.0	±6.0	±6.0	±3.2	–	±3.5

*Standard products with metal press work are manufactured to JIS B 0408 tolerance grade B (sheet thickness 6.0mm or less) and C (sheet thickness over 6.0mm).R-bending is grade C regardless of sheet thickness.
*International Economy products conform to the standards of the country of manufacture.
*If a painting/coating is specified, the standard value for material conditions is used.

The allowable dimensional tolerances are applicable only for dimensions for between holes on the same face and end-faces/perpendicular-faces that are adjacent as a result of the bending.
The tolerances are not applicable for hole-to-hole or hole-to-end face dimensions on non-adjacent faces (across multiple bent sections).

Example 1) Dimensions for which allowable dimensional tolerances are applicable

Example 2) Dimensions for which allowable dimensional tolerances are not applicable

Friction Drilled/Tapped Holes

No.	Standard Part		Standard Value		Example
1	Flange thickness		1/2 of plate thickness (reference value)
2	Flange height		Equal to plate thickness (reference value)

Countersunk Holes

No.	Nominal Diameter		M3	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12	M14	M16
1	Countersink Diameter (D)	Standard Dimensions	6.3	8.3	10.4	12.5	16.5	20.0	24.5	28.5	32.5
1	Countersink Diameter (D)	Maximum	6.9	9.6	11.1	13.3	17.8	22.4	26.5	30.5	34.5
2	Pilot Hole Diameter (d)	Standard Dimensions	3.4	4.3	5.3	6.5	8.5	10.5	12.5	14.5	16.5
2	Pilot Hole Diameter (d)	Maximum	4.7	7.0	8.4	9.9	13.8	14.2	14.5	16.5	18.5
3	Countersink Height (t)	Reference Dimensions	1.5～1.6	2.0～2.3	2.5～2.7	2.2～2.9	3.2～3.8	4.9～5.1	6.0	7.0	8.0

*Will be manufactured so that the head section does not protrude when using hex-socket countersunk bolts (JIS-B1194).

Press-fit nut

No.	Nominal diameter	M3	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12	Example
1	Width of two face	5.5	7.0	8.0	10.0	13.0	15.0	17.0
2	Hight of nut	2.1	2.3	3.1	4.1	4.6	6.1	7.1

*The values of press-fit nut are for reference only.
*The mounting angle (angle between one corner of the nut and the edge) of the nut (press-fit) is optional.

Weld (spot) nut

No.	Nominal diameter	M4	M5	M6	M8	M10	M12	Example
1	Width of two face	11.0	11.0	13.0	15.0	17.0	19.0
2	Hight of nut	4.2	4.2	5.2	6.7	8.2	9.8

*The values of weld (spot) nut are for reference only.
Nuts will be used equivalent to the values in the table above.
For weld (spot) nut, nuts with strength category 5 in accordance with JIS B1196:2010 are used.
*The mounting angle (angle between one corner of the nut and the edge) of the nut (spot weld) is optional.

Bending Specifications

Normal Bending

No.	Standard Part	Standard Value
1	Bend angle tolerance	Product lineup: Standard / International Economy Plate Thickness ≤ 10.0 mm: ±1.0° Plate Thickness > 10.0 mm: ±1.5°
2	Inner radius (r)	Plate thickness (reference value)
3	Outer radius (R)	R = plate thickness × 2 (reference value)

R-bend shape(FR bending)

No.	Standard Part	Standard Value
1	Bend angle tolerance	±2.0°
2	Inner R	Modeling dimension (Reference value)
3	Outer R	Inner R+Plate thickness (Reference value)

Protrusions from Bending

Standard Value	Example
As shown in the right hand example, bulging/protrusions of about 15% of the plate thickness can occur on each side.

Defects Caused by Bending

Standard Value

Example

As shown in the right hand example, defects have occurred in the bent die.

Since it is processed as FR bending (feed bending), die marks will be left on the R bending part.

■Without surface treatment (EN AW−5052 equiv.)
Inner bend	Outer bend

■Paint
Inner bend	Outer bend

Cracks caused by bending (EN AW−5052 equiv.)

Standard Value	Example
EN AW−5052 equiv. would have a slight crack when bent due to its material properties.	■EN AW−5052 equiv. (Thickness: 6.0 mm)

Exterior Appearance Finish

Cut Surface

Note that the appearance of the cut surface may vary depending on how it was cut.

(The cutting method cannot be specified.)

With laser processing

The cut surface will have a smooth edge.

With turret punch press machining

The machining surface will have a smooth curved shape.

Burring in the Pulling Direction

Standard Value	Example
As shown in the right hand example (from behind), burrs of 0.1 mm or less may occur as a result of the machining process.

Standard Values for Edge Breaking

Model Example	Part Example	Standard Value
Model Example	Part Example	Light Edge Breaking	C/R Edge Breaking Option Name: “All Around R0.2 or Larger / Corner C1”
	①Corner	Not Available	Chamfer model corners with C1 Corners less than 30° or greater than 170° are excluded Image of chamfered corner
	②Edges of sheet metal surfaces	Finish burrs and flash generated during sheet metal punching to approx. R0.1	Finish burrs and flash generated during sheet metal punching to R0.2 or larger (approx. R0.3)
	③Narrow Slit Area	No burrs or flash of 0.1 mm or larger	Finish burrs and flash to approx. R0.1
	④Narrow width, small holes	No burrs or flash of 0.1 mm or larger	Finish burrs and flash to approx. R0.1

Appearance of Edge Breaking

Finish of light Edge Breaking

There is a possibility of minor scratches on the appearance because a double-sided deburring machine is used for eliminating burrs.
Edge breaking and engraving cannot both be specified on the same model. The edge breaking process can cause the engraving to fade.
Transparent resin parts will have the edge breaking finish as standard.

Finish of C/R Edge Breaking (All Around R0.2 or Larger / Corner C1)

Edges of sheet metal surfaces are chamfered to R0.2 or larger using a double-sided deburring machine, and product corners are chamfered to C1 by laser processing.
Fine scratches may occur on the surface during Edge Breaking of edges of sheet metal surfaces.
C/R Edge Breaking is not available when combined with engraving service, as characters may become faint.

Caution

Cases Where Edge Breaking is Restricted

Since Edge Breaking is performed by a deburring machine before bending, narrow slit areas will have a fine chamfer finish (approx. R0.1).

Caution

Cases Where Corner Edge Breaking is Not available

1. Model corner includes curves

2. Acute angles less than 30° and obtuse angles greater than 170°

EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish) has a hairline finish on the main appearance surface. (See the figure on the right)
The polishing direction of the hairline finish is called the “hairline direction,” and in the meviy sheet metal service, the longitudinal direction of the unfolded drawing created by expanding the 3D model shape is used as the hairline direction.
If you would like to use a different direction, please contact meviy support for a quote.

Logic to determine the longitudinal direction of the development

Calculates the maximum rectangle of the unfolded drawing, and develops horizontally in the direction of the longest side of the rectangle.

Shape with arbitrary hairline direction

In some cases, the maximum rectangle of the unfolded drawing is not defined, or the longest side of the rectangle cannot be defined (See the figure on the right.). For such shapes, the hairline direction is optional, and you can specify the desired direction in the quotation in meviy support.

Effects on unfolded dimension calculation

The effect of expansion due to bending must be taken into account when calculating the unfolded dimensions for manufacturing.
In the case of EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline), the expansion is about twice the thickness of the plate at each bending point, so the unfolded dimensions become shorter by that amount. As a result, please note that the longitudinal direction in the 3D model and the unfolded drawing may be switched. (See the figure on the right)

EN AW 5052 equiv. (anodized clear/black) pre-finished materials can be processed. (See the figure on the right.)

Cut surfaces will not have a surface finish.

If surface treatment is required on the cut surfaces, select a material that is not pre-finished and specify anodizing as the surface treatment.

*Please click here for more information about materials.

Anodized Aluminum Sheet Appearance

Product Finish

There is a possibility the surface treatment may peel at bends.
Cut surfaces will not have a surface finish.

*There may be color differences depending on the part shape and surfaces to be cut. Film thickness cannot be specified.

*There may be slight color differences for pre-finished products depending on the delivery option selected. Performance is equivalent.

*Assembled nuts will not be anodized.

Hanging jig marks from plating and painting may remain (see figure on the right).
For information on modelling hanging holes, please refer to ‘Hanging Holes for Plating/Painting’.

Surface Treatment	Film thickness *1
Electroless Nickel Plating	5-10μm
Black Oxide	1μm-
Trivalent Chromate (clear)	5-15μm
Trivalent Chromate (Black)	8-13μm
Anodized (clear)	5-15μm
Anodized (Black)	10-15μm
Anodize (matt black)	10-15μm
Trivalent Chromate Passivation (SurTec 650)	0.1-1.0μm

Hanging jig marks may be left when painting (see diagram on right).

The base coat of painted products is iron phosphate coating.

The main quality standards are shown in the table below.

The values are approximate values.

	Powder Coating	Painting
Film thickness *1	80±30μm	80±30μm (With primer coating)	30±15μm (Without primer coating)
Baking temperature	180℃	140℃
Baking time	20 to 30 min.
Salt spray test *2	120 hours	72 hours

1: Not a guaranteed value as the coating thickness may vary depending on the shape. 2: Based on JIS Z2371 salt spray test method. (Powder coating: 60±5μm after baking at 180°C for 20 minutes, Painting: 25±5μm after baking at 100°C for 20 minutes)

We conduct confirmation using a film thickness gauge, peeling off with tape, and board test with a test piece.
The appearance is visually checked for color, dust, spots, dimples, etc., referring to the “Miscellaneous Materials Measurement Chart,” and the tapped holes are checked for functionality by passing bolts through them.

For cleaning, wipe with water or wipe with water after wiping with diluted neutral detergent using a soft cloth or sponge, and then wipe dry with dry cloth.

Please refrain from using petroleum solvents such as thinner, benzene, etc. and alcohol.

Engraving specifications

Set engraving

Engraving for sheet metal can only be input and positioned on the 3D viewer
when it is applied to the appearance surface.

Appearance of engraving

Engraving finishes

・The engraving of sheet metal is done by scribing.
・The width of the letters (approx. 0.1 mm), the depth of the engraving and the distances between the letters cannot be specified.
・Font size and angle are approximate values. We cannot guarantee accuracy.

important notice

・Depending on the material and machine, burn marks may occur in the area of the letters.
・Depending on the material, the finish of the engraving may be lighter.
・If the size of the engraved characters is small (approx. 3 to 5 mm) or if the shape of the characters is complicated, the characters may be crushed.

Standard Value	Example
There are no restrictions on the relationship between cut sections and hole positions. (Use caution when handling cut sections or the cutouts around holes as they are particularly sharp.)

General Tolerance Standards for Machining Dimensions

The tolerance for external dimensions is ±1.0. See the table below for the tolerances used for other sections.

Standard Part	Tolerance Grade		Classification of Standard Dimensions	Tolerance
Standard Part	Symbol	Description	Classification of Standard Dimensions	Tolerance
Dimensional tolerances for length dimensions, excluding chamfered parts	m	Medium	Equal to or greater than 0.5, equal to or less than 3	±0.1
			More than 3, equal to or less than 6	±0.1
			More than 6, equal to or less than 30	±0.2
			More than 30, equal to or less than 120	±0.3
			More than 120, equal to or less than 400	±0.5
			More than 400, equal to or less than 1,000	±0.8
			More than 1,000, equal to or less than 2,000	±1.2
Dimensional tolerances for length dimensions of chamfered parts	c	Rough	Equal to or greater than 0.5, equal to or less than 3	±0.4
			More than 3, equal to or less than 6	±1
			More than 6	±2

*General tolerances for JIS B 0405 cutting are used.

Standard Value	Example
If the internal angles of the model are sharp corners or are less than R3, machining of around R3 will be applied. (If you would like the internal angle to be finished to a sharp corner or to less than R3, contact meviy support for an estimate.)

Dimensional Changes for Clear Resin

Unlike metal, resin is a material that easily deforms as a result of temperature and humidity and changes in dimensions. Accuracy is assured in the following way:

Testing is conducted in a temperature- and humidity-controlled environment
Accuracy assurance is based on the results of inspections performed immediately before shipment.

General Tolerance Standards for Machining Dimensions

The tolerance for external dimensions is ±1.0. See the table below for the tolerances used for other sections.

Standard Part	Tolerance Grade		Classification of Standard Dimensions	Tolerance
Standard Part	Symbol	Description	Classification of Standard Dimensions	Tolerance
Dimensional tolerances for length dimensions, excluding chamfered parts	m	Medium	Equal to or greater than 0.5, equal to or less than 3	±0.1
			More than 3, equal to or less than 6	±0.1
			More than 6, equal to or less than 30	±0.2
			More than 30, equal to or less than 120	±0.3
			More than 120, equal to or less than 400	±0.5
			More than 400, equal to or less than 1,000	±0.8
			More than 1,000, equal to or less than 2,000	±1.2
Dimensional tolerances for length dimensions of chamfered parts	c	Rough	Equal to or greater than 0.5, equal to or less than 3	±0.4
			More than 3, equal to or less than 6	±1
			More than 6	±2

*General tolerances for JIS B 0405 cutting are used.

Standard Value	Example
If the internal angles of the model are sharp corners or are less than R3, machining of around R3 will be applied. (If you would like the internal angle to be finished to a sharp corner or to less than R3, contact meviy support for an estimate.)

Appearance of Composite Sheets

Countersink hole machining finish

Product finish

Countersunk holes and machined external surfaces will expose the core material.
Although deburring is performed, the surface may be sharp due to the characteristics of the material. Please be careful when unpacking and handling the product.
A protective sheet is attached to prevent scratches.

*There may be differences in color depending on the shape and surfaces to be processed.

Quality Assurance Scope for External Appearances

Cut surface		Marks from the hanging jig used during the application of the painting coat
With laser processing The cut surface will have a smooth edge.	With turret punch press machining The machining surface will have a smooth curved shape.

Surface

The external appearance surfaces must be free of blemishes caused by nails.
For surfaces that are not considered external appearance surfaces, some processing/machining marks may be present.

Burring in the pulling direction	Damage caused by bending	Protrusion from bending

Machined Sections (Punching, Bending)

Any burrs that exceed 0.1 mm that occurred as a result of the machining/processing will be removed.
*Does not include light chamfering or C-chamfering.
If chamfering or filleting is required on the external sections, include this in the modeling. However, this does not apply to chamfers and fillets in the plate thickness direction.
Note that the appearance of the cut surface may vary depending on the processing/machining method. (The processing/machining method cannot be specified.)
Marks may remain from the hanging jig used during the application of the painting coat.
Machining/processing marks from the die used during the bending process may remain.
*For EN 1.4301 equiv.#400 and EN 1.4301 equiv.(single-sided hairline finish), protective sheets are applied to external appearance surfaces to protect against the formation of defects.
Bulging/protrusions of about 15% of the plate thickness can occur on each side of the bent sections during the bending process.

Notes on the product appearance


EN 1.4301 equiv.(No.1) plate thickness 12㎜	EN 1.0038 equiv. plate thickness 16㎜

Cutting surface

For thick plates (over 6.0 mm), burn marks from laser cutting may be noticeable.


Unevenness inside the hole	Hole shape distored on the back side

Hole machining

Unevenness may occur inside the hole. Also, when viewed from the back side of the product, the shape of the hole may be slightly distorted.

Inspection Item

View of inspection (1)	View of inspection (2)

Inspection Details

External appearance inspection: Defects, dents, unevenness, condition of painting coat, condition of surface treatment (visual)
Dimensional check: Viewer display dimensions (digital Vernier calipers, goniometers, etc.)
Inspection frequency: As part of each process and immediately prior to shipment

Specifiable Dimensional Tolerances for Sheet Metal/Thin Shim Plates

No.	Standard Part	Classification of Standard Dimensions	Standard Values*
			Normal Bending		R-bend (FR bending)
			Plate Thicness ≦6.0mm	Plate Thicness >6.0mm	Plate Thicness ≦3.2mm
1	Section with no bending	6 or less	±0.1	±0.3	±0.1
		More than 6, equal to or less than 30	±0.2	±0.5	±0.2
		More than 30, equal to or less than 120	±0.3	±0.8	±0.3
		More than 120, equal to or less than 400	±0.5	±1.2	±0.5
		More than 400, equal to or less than 1,000	±0.8	±2.0	±0.8
		More than 1,000, equal to or less than 2,000	±1.2	±3.0	±1.2
2	Section with bending	6 or less	±0.3	±0.5	±0.5
		More than 6, equal to or less than 30	±0.5	±1.0	±1.0
		More than 30, equal to or less than 120	±0.8	±1.5	±1.5
		More than 120, equal to or less than 400	±1.2	±2.5	±2.5
		More than 400, equal to or less than 1,000	±2.0	±4.0	±4.0
		More than 1,000, equal to or less than 2,000	±3.0	±6.0	±6.0

General Tolerance: JIS B 0408 Grade B (Plate Thickness ≤6.0 mm), Grade C (Plate Thickness >6.0 mm)

If painting/coating is specified, the standard value for material conditions is used.
The allowable dimensional tolerances are applicable only for dimensions for between holes on the same face and end-faces/perpendicular-faces that are adjacent as a result of the bending.
*The tolerances are not applicable for hole-to-hole or hole-to-end face dimensions on non-adjacent faces (across multiple bent sections). See “Example of non-applicable dimensions” in the figure below.

Example	Example of non-applicable dimensions

Dimensional Assurance Range for Clear Resin

Standard Part	Tolerance Grade		Classification of Standard Dimensions	Tolerance
Standard Part	Symbol	Description	Classification of Standard Dimensions	Tolerance
Dimensional tolerances for length dimensions, excluding chamfered parts	m	Medium	Equal to or greater than 0.5, equal to or less than 3	±0.1
			More than 3, equal to or less than 6	±0.1
			More than 6, equal to or less than 30	±0.2
			More than 30, equal to or less than 120	±0.3
			More than 120, equal to or less than 400	±0.5
			More than 400, equal to or less than 1,000	±0.8
			More than 1,000, equal to or less than 2,000	±1.2
Dimensional tolerances for length dimensions of chamfered parts	c	Rough	Equal to or greater than 0.5, equal to or less than 3	±0.4
			More than 3, equal to or less than 6	±1
			More than 6	±2

*General tolerances for JIS B 0405 cutting are used.

General Tolerance Standards for Machining Dimensions

The tolerance for the external dimensions is ±1.0. See the table to the left for the tolerances for other sections.

Dimensional Changes for Clear Resin

For dimensional changes caused by temperature or humidity, accuracy is guaranteed based on the following conditions:
– The inspection is performed in a temperature-controlled environment.

– Accuracy assurance is based on the results of inspections performed immediately before shipment.

Clear Resin R

If the internal angles of the model are sharp corners or are less than R3, machining of around R3 will be applied.
See “Clear resin internal angle (R)” in the figure below
If you would like the internal angles to be finished to a sharp corner or to less than R3, contact meviy support for an estimate.

Clear resin internal angle (R)

Regarding the appearance of nut mounted products

Product with press-fit nut

EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating) and EN 1.0330 equiv. (Galvanized),EN AW-5052 equiv. ( pre-finished anodized plate (clear)) and EN AW-5052 equiv. ( pre-finished anodized plate (black)) may have some plating peeling due to nut mounting.
Installation of nuts near the edge of the plate may cause the edge to swell.

Product with weld (spot) nut

For products with spot-welded nuts on steel materials,remove burns by using a file or similar tool. Scratch marks may appear due to the filing.
EN 1.0330 equiv. (Electrolytic Zinc Plating) and EN 1.0330 equiv. (Galvanized) may have some plating peeling due to nut mounting.
Spot-welded nuts on stainless steel will be removed the burn marks by electrolytic polishing.
Also, polishing to remove burns is not performed because it causes plating to peel off.
The projection part of the weld nut may be eluted, but the following items are inspected to confirm that there is no problem with fastening.
Finish marks may remain.

– Bolts can pass through
– The projection part is not convex more than the material thickness

Regarding the Strength Warranty for Nut mounted Products

Product with press-fit nut

We do not guarantee the strength of products with press-fit nuts, but we will ship them after confirming that there are no problems with fastening.

Product with weld (spot) nut

We do not guarantee the strength of products with weld (spot) nuts, but we will ship them after confirming that there are no problems with fastening.In addition, periodic evaluations are conducted in accordance with JIS B1196.

Machining Direction

The machining direction can be perpendicular and parallel to the 6 rectangular faces.
Certain machining operations requiring angles relative to the XYZ axes may be performed using multi-axis machining centers or specialized fixtures.
*It is possible to process diagonal holes with the hole axis inclined to all 3 axes.

Machining Positions

The green areas below indicate points that can be machined. The yellow areas indicate points that cannot be machined and are therefore not possible with meviy.

Yellow areas can be adjusted or deleted to make an eligible shape.

(1) Pocket Shapes

The shape of a pocket (area cut by the end mill) varies depending on the placement of chamfers and curves (convex and concave). Here are some examples:

The green areas indicate points that can be machined. The yellow areas indicate points that cannot be machined and therefore cannot handled by meviy.
Yellow areas can be adjusted or deleted to make an eligible shape.

(2) Closed Pockets

With pockets that are enclosed by 4 faces, concave curves are required on all 4 corners (whether it is a through pocket or blind pocket), as shown in the left image below.
(Because pockets are machined with an end mill, sharp corners are not possible.)

When adding chamfers as in the images below, up to C15 is possible.
(Chamfers above C15 are machined with end mills, so a conical shape like that below is not possible.)

(3) Open Pockets ①

For pockets not surrounded by 4 faces, some shapes can be created without concave curves.

However, curves are required if the pocket is a blind hole. (This is because a curve will always be formed in the machining direction.)

When adding chamfers as in the images below, up to C15 is possible.
For shapes like the image on the right below, an end mill can be used for chamfering, so chamfers above C15 are possible.

Shapes like those below are machined with a chamfer cutter, so a curve like the left or middle images above will be made at the chamfered intersection.

(5) Holes ①

Unlike pockets, multi-directional machining can be used for holes.
It is possible to add multiple smaller holes or a slotted hole in the lower step of a counterbore hole.

(6) Holes ②

Multi-step holes with more than two steps are not possible. As in the left image below, the hole in the middle step must be the narrowest (in order to work with our system). The shapes shown in the middle and right images below (multiple stepped holes or the largest diameter in the middle step) are not possible with meviy.

(7) Slotted Holes ①

As with round holes, multi-directional machining can be used for slotted holes, and counterboring can be used to create multi-stepped holes.

(8) Slotted Holes ②

More than 2 steps are possible.
The middle step cannot be the longest hole, as in the right image below. However, unlike round holes, slotted holes can feature multiple steps that narrow from the top down, as in the middle image below.

(9) Holes + Chamfers or Curves ①

Chamfers around the mouth of a round or slotted hole are possible up to C15.
It is not possible to add convex curves to the rim of round or slotted holes.

(10) Holes + Chamfers or Curves ②

If the corner of a round or slotted hole is curved, the radius of curvature cannot exceed 0.5.

If a corner is C-chamfered or has a radius of curvature below 0.5, the end product may differ from the model. (If adding a curve and chamfer to a counterbore like the left image below, the hole is machined with an end mill, producing a corner that is sharp or within a 0.5 radius of curvature. For a precision or tapped hole with a pilot hole, like the right image below, the hole is machined by a drill, producing an angled surface.)

It is not possible to add a chamfer or curve to an already curved surface.

The following materials and surface treatments are possible.
*Depending on shape and size, hanging holes may be necessary for surface treatment. Refer to the Design Guidelines for information on hanging holes.

Material		Surface Treatment	Standard				International Economy
Material		Surface Treatment	Standard	Express	Rapid	Economy	International Economy

Steel	EN 1.0038 equiv.	No treatment	✓	✓	✓ *Partially not available	✓	✓
		Black Oxide			✓ *Partially not available
		Electroless Nickel			✓ *Partially not available
		Trivalent Chromate (Clear)			ー
		Trivalent Chromate (Black)		ー			ー
		Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)		✓			✓
		Low Temperature Black Chrome		ー			ー
		Phosphate Coating
		Nitriding
	EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar)	No treatment	✓	✓	ー	✓	ー
		Black Oxide
		Electroless Nickel
	EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material)	No treatment	✓	✓	ー	✓	ー
		Black Oxide
		Electroless Nickel
		Trivalent Chromate (Clear)
	EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar)	No treatment	✓	✓	ー	✓	ー
		Black Oxide
		Electroless Nickel
	EN 1.1191 equiv.	No treatment	✓	✓	✓ *Partially not available	✓	–
		Black Oxide
		Electroless Nickel
		Trivalent Chromate (Clear)			–
		Trivalent Chromate (Black)		–
		Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)		✓
		Low Temperature Black Chrome		–
		Phosphate Coating
		Nitriding
	EN 1.1206 equiv.	No treatment	✓	✓	✓ *Partially not available	✓	✓
		Black Oxide			✓ *Partially not available
		Electroless Nickel			✓ *Partially not available
		Trivalent Chromate (Clear)			ー
		Trivalent Chromate (Black)		ー			ー
		Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)		✓			✓
		Low Temperature Black Chrome		ー			ー
		Phosphate Coating
		Nitriding
	EN 1.1206 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC)	No treatment	✓	✓	ー	✓	✓
		Black Oxide
		Electroless Nickel
		Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)
		Trivalent Chromate (Clear)
		Trivalent Chromate (Black)		ー			ー
		Nitriding		ー			ー
	EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)	No treatment	✓	ー	ー	✓	✓
		Black Oxide
		Electroless Nickel
		Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)
		Trivalent Chromate（Clear）
		Trivalent Chromate（Black）					ー
		Low Temperature Black Chrome
		Phosphate Coating
		Nitriding
Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel	NAK55 equiv.	No treatment	✓	✓	ー	✓	ー
		Black Oxide
		Electroless Nickel Plating
		Trivalent Chromate (Clear)
		Trivalent Chromate (Black)		ー
		Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)
		Low Temperature Black Chrome
	EN 1.2379 equiv.	No treatment	✓	ー	ー	✓	ー
		Black Oxide
		Electroless Nickel
		Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)
		Nitriding
	EN 1.1545 equiv.	No treatment	✓	–	–	✓	–
		Black Oxide
		Electroless Nickel
		Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)
		Nitriding
	EN 1.2510 equiv.	No treatment	✓	–	–	✓	–
		Black Oxide
		Electroless Nickel
		Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)
		Nitriding
	DC53 ® (Daido)	No treatment	✓	–	–	✓	–
		Black Oxide
		Electroless Nickel
		Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)
		Nitriding
Stainless steel	EN 1.4305 equiv.	No treatment	✓	✓	ー	✓	✓
	EN 1.4305 equiv.	Low Temperature Black Chrome		ー			ー
	EN 1.4305 equiv. (annealed material)	No treatment
	EN 1.4305 equiv. (annealed material)	Low Temperature Black Chrome
	EN 1.4301 equiv.	No treatment		✓			✓
	EN 1.4301 equiv.	Low Temperature Black Chrome		ー			ー
	EN 1.4301 equiv. (annealed material)	No treatment
	EN 1.4301 equiv. (annealed material)	Low Temperature Black Chrome
	EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar)	No treatment		✓
	EN 1.4401 equiv.	No treatment		ー			✓
	EN 1.4401 equiv.	Low Temperature Black Chrome		✓			ー
	EN 1.4404 equiv.	No treatment		ー
	EN 1.4404 equiv.	Low Temperature Black Chrome		ー
	EN 1.4016 equiv.	No treatment		✓			✓
	EN 1.4016 equiv.	Low Temperature Black Chrome		ー			ー
Aluminium	EN AW−2017 equiv.	No treatment	✓	✓	✓ *Partially not available	✓	✓
		Clear Anodize			ー		✓
		Clear Anodize (matte)					ー
		Black Anodize					✓
		Black Anodize (matte)
		Hard Anodize (clear)		ー
		Hard Anodize (clear, matte)		✓			ー
		Red Anodize		ー
		Gold Anodize		ー
		Electroless Nickel		✓
	EN AW−5052 equiv.	No treatment	✓	✓	✓ *Partially not available	✓	✓
		Clear Anodize			ー		✓
		Clear Anodize (matte)					ー
		Black Anodize					✓
		Black Anodize (matte)
		Hard Anodize (clear)		ー
		Hard Anodize (clear, matte)		✓			ー
		Red Anodize		ー
		Gold Anodize		ー
		Electroless Nickel		✓
	EN AW−5083 equiv.	No treatment	✓	✓	ー	✓	ー
		Clear Anodize
		Clear Anodize (matte)
		Black Anodize
		Black Anodize (matte)
		Hard Anodize (clear)
		Hard Anodize (clear, matte)
		Red Anodize		ー
		Gold Anodize
		Electroless Nickel
	EN AW−6061 equiv.	No treatment	✓	✓	ー	✓	✓
		Clear Anodize					✓
		Clear Anodize (matte)					ー
		Black Anodize					✓
		Black Anodize (matte)
		Hard Anodize (clear)		ー
		Hard Anodize (clear, matte)		✓			ー
		Red Anodize		ー
		Gold Anodize		ー
		Electroless Nickel		✓
	EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar)	No treatment	✓	✓	ー	✓	ー
		Clear Anodize
		Black Anodize
	EN AW−7075 equiv.	No treatment	✓	✓	✓ *Partially not available	✓	✓
		Clear Anodize	✓	✓	ー		✓
		Clear Anodize (matte)					ー
		Black Anodize					✓
		Black Anodize (matte)		ー
		Hard Anodize (clear)		ー
		Hard Anodize (clear, matte)		✓			ー
		Red Anodize		ー
		Gold Anodize		ー
		Electroless Nickel		✓
Copper & Brass	EN CW004A equiv. (Oxygen-free)	No treatment	✓	✓	ー	✓	ー
	EN CW008A equiv. (ETP)
	Brass EN CW509L equiv. (Yellow)
Resin	POM (Acetal, Standard, white)	No treatment	✓	✓	ー	✓	ー
	POM (Acetal, Standard, black)
	MC Nylon (Standard, blue)
	MC Nylon (Standard, ivory)
	MC Nylon (Weather resistance, black ash)
	MC Nylon (anti-static, black)
	MC Nylon (Conductive, black)			ー
	Bakelite (Paper, natural color)
	Bakelite (Paper, black)
	Bakelite (Cloth, natural)
	Fluorine (PTFE, Standard, white)
	UHMWPE (Standard, white)			✓
	UHMWPE (Conductive, black)			ー
	ABS (Standard, natural color)			✓
	PEEK (Standard, grey-brown)			ー
	PP (Standard, white)
	PET (Glass filled, brown)
	PPS (Standard, natural color)

*Steel between materials EN 1.1191 equiv and EN 1.1203 equiv may be used as an equivalent to EN 1.1206 equiv.
*Steel between materials EN 1.1191 equiv and EN 1.1206 equiv may be used as an equivalent to EN 1.1191 equiv.
*EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar) and EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar) are not compatible with trivalent chromate.
*EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material) is not compatible with trivalent chromate (black) or hard chrome plating.
*The film thickness of hard chrome plating (flash plating) is less than 5μ. The hardness (Vickers) is about Hv750~, and it is difficult get the plating on holes and pockets.
*Hard chrome plating for International Economy products is a mixture of flash plating and non-flash plating.
*The value of EN 1.1206 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC) cannot be guaranteed and cannot be specified.
*Pre-hardened steel between 37 and 43 HRC may be used as an equivalent to NAK55.
*Black anodize (Matte) is not applicable for EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar).
*Thin plate standards (thickness 3㎜≤Z<5㎜）are not applicable for surface treatment.
*Not required for anodized aluminum if the displayed agreement is agreed to.
(However, a wire mark may be left)
*The thickness of Clear Hard Anodizing is approximately 10 to 30 μm. The color will vary depending on the thickness of the coating.
*Phosphating surface treatment will be either zinc phosphate or manganese phosphate. The type cannot be selected and the color and other characteristics vary for each.
*PPS (standard, natural color) does not contain glass fiber.
*Please click here for the hardness after heat treatment and here for quality assurance.
*The reference value for electrical resistivity for MC nylon (conductive) is 1-10² Ω・m and for MC nylon (antistatic) is 10⁴~10⁶ Ω・m.
*Matte treatments will have either a chemical or blasting pre-treatment. The type cannot be specified. (If the type needs to be specified, please request a manual quotation.)
*Nitriding treatment will be either, gas nitriding or salt bath nitrocarburizing. The type cannot be specified. (If the type needs to be specified, please request a manual quotation.)
*Please refer to the table below for the surface hardness after nitriding treatment. (Hardness is for reference only and is not covered by quality assurance)

Material	Reference hardness after nitriding
EN 1.0038 equiv.	HRC38~44 (HV400~500)
EN 1.1191 equiv. EN 1.1206 equiv. EN 1.1206 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC)	HRC33~49 (HV350~600)
EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)	HRC44~56 (HV500~800)
EN 1.2379 equiv.	HRC59~66 (HV900~1300)
DC53 ® (Daido)	HRC61～67(HV1000～1400)
EN 1.1545 equiv.・EN 1.2510 equiv.	HRC41～56(HV450～800)

*Copper and brass are easily damaged due to their low hardness, and are prone to discoloration and rust due to moisture and handling. Please use caution when handling parts after delivery.
*EN CW614N equiv. are currently only available for manual quotation.
*Passivation is currently only available for Manual quotation. EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar) and EN 1.4016 equiv. are not available with passivation.

The materials used are listed in the table below. The materials used comply with JIS (Japanese Industry Standard), equivalent to DIN standard.

No	Material	DIN Alloy	DIN No.	JIS	USA (AISI)	GB	Notes
1	EN 1.0038 equiv.	S235JR	1.0038	SS400	1018 Carbon Steel	Q235	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 3101.
2	EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material)	S235JR (annealed)	1.0038 equiv. (annealed)	SS400 (annealed）	1018 Carbon Steel (annealed)	–
3	EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar)	S235JR (flat bar)	1.0038 (flat bar)	SS400-D	1018 Carbon Steel (flat bar)	–
4	EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar)	C45 (flat bar)	1.1191 (flat bar)	S45C-D	1049 Carbon Steel (flat bar)	–	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4051.
5	EN 1.1191 equiv.	C45	1.1191	S45C	1045 Carbon steel	#45	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4051.
5	EN 1.1191 equiv.	C45	1.1191	S50C	1045 Carbon steel	#45
6	EN 1.1206 equiv.	Ck50	1.1206	S45C	1049 Carbon Steel	45#	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4051.
				S50C
				S55C
7	EN 1.1206 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC)	Ck50 (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC)	1.1206 (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC)	S50C (tempered)	1049 Carbon Steel (tempered)	45#tempered	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4051. The hardness is between 20 and 34 HRC, it cannot be specified.
8	EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)	34CrMo4 (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)	1.7220 (Reference Hardness: 26-32 HRC)	SCM440	4140 Alloy Steel (tempered)	42CrMo4	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4053.
9	NAK55 equiv.	NAK55	NAK55		NAK55	–	The hardness is equivalent to pre-hardened steel with a hardness of 37 to 43 HRC.
10	EN 1.2379 equiv.	X155CrVMo12-1	1.2379	SKD11	D2 Tool Steel	–	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4044.
11	DC53 ® (Daido)	–	–	–	DC53 Tool Steel	–	–
12	EN 1.1545 equiv.	C105U	1.1545	SK105	SK105 Tool Steel	–	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4401.
13	EN 1.2510 equiv.	100MnCrW4	1.2510	SKS3	O1 Tool Steel	9CrWMn	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4404.
14	EN AW – 2017 equiv.	Al-Cu4MgSi	3.1325	A2017[T3,T351]	2017 Aluminum Alloy	2A12	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS H 4000.
15	EN AW – 5052 equiv.	Al-Mg2.5	3.3523	A5052[H32,H34,H112]	5052 Aluminum Alloy	5052 H112
16	EN AW – 5083 equiv.	AlMg4.5Mn0.7	3.3547	A5083	5083 Aluminum Alloy	–
17	EN AW – 6061 equiv.	Al-Mg1SiCu	3.3211	A6061[T6,T651]	6061 Aluminum Alloy	6061 T6
18	EN AW – 6063 equiv. (flat bar)	AlMg0,7Si (flat bar)	3.206 (flat bar)	A6063S	6063 Aluminum Alloy (flatbar)	–
19	EN AW – 7075 equiv.	Al-Zn6MgCu	3.4365	A7075[T6,T651]	7075 Aluminum Alloy	7075 T6
20	EN 1.4305 equiv.	X10CrNiS18-9	1.4305	SUS303	303 Stainless Steel	X8CrNiS18-9	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4304.
21	EN 1.4305 equiv. (annealed material)	X10CrNiS18-9 (annealed)	1.4305 (annealed)	SUS303 (annealed)	303 Stainless Steel (annealed)	–
22	EN 1.4301 equiv.	X5CrNi18.10	1.4301	SUS304	304 Stainless Steel	06Cr19Ni10
23	EN 1.4301 equiv. (annealed material)	X5CrNi18-10 (annealed)	1.4301 (annealed)	SUS304 (annealed)	304 Stainless Steel (annealed)	–
24	EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar)	X5CrNi18-10 (flat bar)	1.4301 (flatbar)	SUS304-D	304 Stainless Steel (flatbar)	–
25	EN 1.4401 equiv.	X5CrNiMo17122	1.4401	SUS316	316 Stainless Steel	0Cr17Ni12Mo2
26	EN 1.4404 equiv.	X5CrNiMo17-12-2	1.4401	SUS316L	316L Stainless Steel	–
27	EN 1.4016 equiv.	X6Cr17	1.4016	SUS430	430 Stainless Steel	1Cr17
28	EN CW004A Equiv. (Oxygen-free)	CW004A (Cu-ETP)	2.0060 / 2.0065	C1020	Copper C1020	–	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 3100.
29	EN CW008A Equiv. (ETP)	CW008A (Cu-OF)	2.004	C1100	Copper C1100	–	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 3100.
30	EN CW509L Equiv. (Brass)	CW509L (CuZn40)	2.036	C2801P	Copper C2801P	–	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 3250.
31	EN CW614N Equiv.	CW614N (CuZn39Pb3)	2.0401	C3604-LCd (Brass)	Brass C3604-LCd	–	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 3250.

Caution

Steel types that are not included in the JIS standard, or for which there is no comparable steel even if a JIS standard exists, are not listed.
The steel types listed for comparison are reference standards.
Steel between materials EN 1.1191 equiv and EN 1.1203 equiv may be used as an equivalent to EN 1.1206 equiv.
Please note that the chemical composition may be different.

Caution

For some materials with surface treatment, this is not possible depending on shape and size.

Standard products: Product lineup conforms to JIS standards
International Economy products: Product lineup is offered at the lowest price while in compliance with meviy quality standards. Products conform to the industrial standards of the country of manufacture

List of delivery options

Product lineup	Options	Definition				End of part number	Order closing time
Product lineup	Options	Standard	Merit	Shipping date	Applicable Product (compared to Standard Shipping)	End of part number	Order closing time
Standard	Rapid	MISUMI Quality Click here for details	Shortest Lead Time	7days-	Selected products	-R	4:30
	Express		Shortest Lead Time	9days-	Except for Thin plate standards (thickness 3㎜≦Z≦5㎜)	-E	7:00
	Standard		－	11days-	－	–	12:00
	Economy		Same quality at a low price with a long lead time	25days-	All products in principle	-L	12:00
International Economy			Lowest Price	16days-	Selected products	-C	11:00

*During summertime, the order closing time is extended by 1 hour.
The materials and surface treatments supported by each delivery service vary. Please check here for details.

Lead Time Selection Restrictions

Quotation Conditions	Rapid(-R)	Express(-E)	Standard	Economy(-L)
Material	Partial support	Partial support	Supported	Supported
Surface treatment	Partial support	Partial support	Supported	Supported
Engraving is specified	Not Supported	Not Supported	Supported	Supported
Thin plate standards（3≤Z＜5）	Not Supported	Not Supported	Supported	Supported
Geometric tolerances specified	Not Supported	Not Supported	Supported	Supported
Surface roughness is specified (excluding holes)	Not Supported	Not Supported	Supported	Supported
General surface roughness is specified Ra3.2 and Rz12.5	Not Supported	Not Supported	Supported	Supported
Grinding specified, finefinish specified	Not Supported	Not Supported	Supported *+4 days	Supported *+4 days
Inch tap	Not Supported	Not Supported	Supported	Supported
Length (X) : More than 600mm or Width (Y) : More than 400mm	Not Supported	Supported *+5 days	Supported *+9 days	Not Supported
Thickness (Z) : More than 70mm	Not Supported	Not Supported	Supported *+6 days	Not Supported
Full part hardening (Conventional hardening and vacuum hardening) specified	Not Supported	Supported *+3 days-	Supported *+4 days	Not Supported

*Please refer to this page for lead time selection restrictions due to material and surface treatment.

How to select the options

STEP1:

Click “Confirm the quotation conditions” button.

STEP2:

A list of shipping dates will be displayed, allowing you to select a delivery date.

Notes

– Default setting is standard shipping

Steel
Pre-Hardened Steel
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
Copper & Brass
Resin

Material Standards and Materials Used

Steel

Material Features

Material	Features
EN 1.0038 equiv.	This is a rolled steel material for general structural use, widely used in Japan. Its name derives from its tensile strength of 400 N/mm² or higher. It is cost-effective and easy to process, making it suitable for a wide range of applications including machinery and construction.
EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material)	EN 1.0038 equiv. that has undergone annealing (heating to high temperature followed by slow cooling). This treatment relieves residual stress, reducing the risk of warping or distortion. Suitable for parts with high material removal rates or complex shapes.
EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar)	A polished version of EN 1.0038 equiv. with a smooth surface finish. As a standardized material, it is widely available and more cost-effective than regular EN 1.0038 equiv. Mechanical properties are equivalent to EN 1.0038 equiv., and it is often used for parts where appearance is prioritized over precision.
EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar)	A polished version of EN 1.1191 equiv. with a smooth surface finish. As a standardized material, it is widely available and more cost-effective than regular EN 1.1191 equiv. Mechanical properties are equivalent to EN 1.1191 equiv.
EN 1.1191 equiv.	This is a structural carbon steel containing approximately 0.45% carbon, which is where its name comes from. It is characterised by its relatively good workability. Its strength and wear resistance can be improved through heat treatment (such as hardening) and tempering.
EN 1.1206 equiv.	A structural carbon steel containing approximately 0.5% carbon. It has relatively good machinability and can be heat-treated to enhance strength and wear resistance.
EN 1.1206 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC)	EN 1.1206 equiv. that has been hardened and tempered. This treatment increases hardness and removes residual stress. It offers a good balance of hardness and toughness, making it suitable for parts requiring strength and wear resistance.
EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)	A material that combines high strength and toughness. Heat treatment (e.g., hardening) can further improve strength and wear resistance. Commonly used in automotive and machinery components where durability is critical.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar)	400~510	215~355	21 or more	360~485	380~485	215~355	2.0×10⁵	2.0×10⁵	7.87	6.96×10⁶	58	11.7×10⁻⁶
EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material)	400~510	215~355	21 or more	360~485	380~485	215~355	2.0×10⁵	2.0×10⁵	7.87	6.96×10⁶	58	11.7×10⁻⁶
N 1.1191 equiv. EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar)	570~750	330~490	20 or more	600	600	330~490	2.0×10⁵	2.0×10⁵	7.87	6.0×10⁶	45	11.9×10⁻⁶
EN 1.1206 equiv.	620~780	350~520	18 or more	650	650	350~520	2.0×10⁵	2.0×10⁵	7.8	6.0×10⁶	44	11.7×10⁻⁶
EN 1.1206 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC)	700~850	400~600	18 or more	700	700	400~600	2.0×10⁵	2.0×10⁵	7.8	6.0×10⁶	44	11.7×10⁻⁶
EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)	950~1100	800~950	12 or more	1000	1000	800~950	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.85	6.0×10⁶	42.7	11.0×10⁻⁶

Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel

Material Features

Material	Features
NAK55 equiv.	A type of steel manufactured by “”Daido Steel”” that has been pre-hardened through heat treatment. It features high hardness (HRC 37–43) and excellent machinability. In addition to strength and wear resistance, it is suitable for applications requiring dimensional accuracy. Commonly used in mold making and machinery industries.
EN 1.2379 equiv.	A type of alloy steel designed for tooling applications. It offers high hardness and wear resistance, and can be further strengthened through heat treatment such as quenching. Although its corrosion resistance is lower than stainless steel, it is relatively high among tool steels. Widely used in molds, jigs, and gauges where hardness and wear resistance are critical.
DC53 ® (Daido)	It is a type of cold-die steel, and because the primary carbide is refined, it has superior machinability and grindability compared to EN 1.2379 Equiv., and has the characteristics of easy dimensional accuracy. In addition, it has better wear resistance and toughness than EN 1.2379 Equiv., and has good hardenability.
EN 1.1545 equiv.	It is a type of carbon tool steel (JIS-SK), and among Tool Steel for Cold Work, it has a high carbon content and excellent hardness and wear resistance. It is used for tools that generate less heat because it is characterized by a decrease in hardness when used at high temperatures.
EN 1.2510 equiv.	It is an alloy tool steel for cold working and has high hardness and wear resistance. It also has relatively good toughness and is used for cold mold parts such as shear blades, punches, dies, and gauges.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
NAK55 equiv.	1100~1300	950~1150	10 or more	1200	1200	950~1150	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.8	5.0×10⁶	30	11.5×10⁻⁶
EN 1.2379 equiv.	1800~2000	1500~1700	5 or more	1900	1900	1500~1700	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.8	4.0×10⁶	20	12×10⁻⁶
DC53 ® (Daido)	1890	1780	1 or more	2100	2100	1700~1900	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.87	4.0×10⁶	23.9	12.2×10⁻⁶
EN 1.1545 equiv.	900~1050	750~900	15 or more	950	950	750~900	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.85	6.0×10⁶	42	11.0×10⁻⁶
EN 1.2510 equiv.	1000~1300	850~1100	10 or more	1100	1100	850~1100	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.85	4.5×10⁶	25	12.2×10⁻⁶

Aluminum

Material Features

Material	Features
EN AW−2017 equiv.	An aluminum alloy known as “”Duralumin,”” offering excellent machinability and strength. Due to its copper content, it has slightly lower corrosion resistance compared to other aluminum alloys. Widely used in aircraft and vehicle components.
EN AW−5052 equiv.	This is the most common aluminum alloy, known for its excellent machinability. It is widely available, corrosion-resistant, and used across many fields due to its versatility.
EN AW – 5083 equiv.	An aluminum alloy with superior corrosion resistance compared to EN AW−5052 equiv. It performs well in environments with high concentrations of seawater or chemicals. Commonly used in marine components.
EN AW−6061 equiv.	An aluminum alloy with enhanced corrosion resistance and heat treatability. Among aluminum alloys, it offers top-class corrosion resistance. T6 tempering (artificial aging) provides high tensile strength and yield strength. Ideal for use in seawater and outdoor environments.
EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar)	A standardized aluminum alloy with excellent extrudability. Although its strength is lower than EN AW – 6061 equiv., it is widely used in construction, civil engineering, and machinery parts as shaped materials such as angles and channels.
EN AW−7075 equiv.	Also known as “”Super Duralumin,”” this alloy combines high strength with lightweight properties. It offers excellent heat treatability and top-class strength and impact resistance among aluminum alloys. Ideal for applications requiring both light weight and high strength.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
EN AW−2017 equiv.	390~500	250~350	10–18	450	450	250~350	7.2×10⁴	7.2×10⁴	2.79	2.0×10⁷	130	23.6×10⁻⁶
EN AW−5052 equiv.	210~265	125~190	12–20	230	230	125~190	7.0×10⁴	7.0×10⁴	2.68	2.5×10⁷	138	23.8×10⁻⁶
EN AW – 5083 equiv.	270~350	150~250	10–20	300	300	150~250	7.0×10⁴	7.0×10⁴	2.66	2.5×10⁷	121	25.0×10⁻⁶
EN AW−6061 equiv.	260~310	240~270	8–15	280	280	240~270	6.9×10⁴	6.9×10⁴	2.7	2.5×10⁷	167	23.6×10⁻⁶
EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar)	190~240	150~200	12–25	210	210	150~200	6.9×10⁴	6.9×10⁴	2.7	2.5×10⁷	201	23.5×10⁻⁶
EN AW−7075 equiv.	510~580	430~500	7–12	550	550	430~500	7.1×10⁴	7.1×10⁴	2.8	2.0×10⁷	130	23.6×10⁻⁶

Stainless Steel

Material Features

Material	Features
EN 1.4305 equiv.	An austenitic stainless steel with improved machinability and processability. It maintains high corrosion resistance and strength while offering excellent machinability, making it suitable for complex-shaped components. Its corrosion and weldability are lower than EN 1.4301 equiv. Commonly used in single parts such as bolts and shafts.
EN 1.4305 equiv. (annealed material)	EN 1.4305 equiv. that has undergone annealing (high-temperature heating followed by slow cooling). This treatment relieves residual stress, reducing the risk of warping or distortion. Suitable for parts with high material removal rates or complex shapes.
EN 1.4301 equiv.	This is an austenitic stainless steel with enhanced corrosion resistance and weldability. Its versatility and availability make it widely used across various industries. It maintains high corrosion resistance and strength while offering excellent weldability, making it suitable for equipment and machinery applications.
EN 1.4301 equiv. (annealed material)	EN 1.4301 equiv. that has undergone annealing to relieve residual stress. This reduces the risk of warping or distortion, making it suitable for parts with high material removal rates.
EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar)	A polished version of EN 1.4301 equiv. with a smooth surface finish. As a standardized material, it is widely available and more cost-effective than regular EN 1.4301 equiv. Mechanical properties are equivalent to EN 1.4301 equiv.
EN 1.4401 equiv.	An austenitic stainless steel with improved corrosion and pitting resistance compared to EN 1.4301 equiv. Suitable for environments exposed to seawater or salt-laden air, where corrosion could lead to critical failures.
EN 1.4404 equiv.	It has a lower carbon content than EN 1.4401 Equiv. and has high intergranular corrosion resistance (resistance to corrosion along the crystal-to-crystal interface), so it can be specified in places where corrosion resistance and pitting corrosion resistance are required, including seawater.
EN 1.4016 equiv.	This is a magnetic stainless steel made from ferritic stainless alloy. Unlike austenitic stainless steel, it contains no nickel and has lower corrosion resistance. Its versatility and availability make it widely used in everyday applications, including the food industry.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
EN 1.4305 equiv.	520~750	205 or more	40–60	600	600	205~310	1.93×10⁵	1.93×10⁵	7.93	1.4×10⁶	16.2	17.3×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4305 equiv. (annealed material)	500~700	200 or more	45–65	580	580	200~300	1.93×10⁵	1.93×10⁵	7.93	1.4×10⁶	16.2	17.3×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4301 equiv. EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar)	520~750	205 or more	40–60	600	600	205~310	1.93×10⁵	1.93×10⁵	7.93	1.4×10⁶	16.2	17.3×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4301 equiv. (annealed material)	500~700	200 or more	45–65	580	580	200~300	1.93×10⁵	1.93×10⁵	7.93	1.4×10⁶	16.2	17.3×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4401 equiv.	520~700	205 or more	40–60	580	580	200~300	1.93×10⁵	1.93×10⁵	7.98	1.3×10⁶	13	15.9×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4404 equiv.	480~680	177 or more	45–65	560	560	170~280	1.93×10⁵	1.93×10⁵	7.98	1.3×10⁶	13	15.9×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4016 equiv.	450~600	205 or more	20–30	500	500	250~350	2.0×10⁵	2.0×10⁵	7.7	1.0×10⁶	26	10.４×10⁻⁶

Copper & Brass

Material Features

Material	Features
EN CW004A Equiv. (Oxygen-free)	High-purity copper with a purity of 99.96% or higher. It offers excellent electrical and thermal conductivity and is resistant to embrittlement at low temperatures. Unlike EN CW004A Equiv., it contains almost no residual oxygen, making it free from hydrogen embrittlement and suitable for use in hydrogen atmospheres. More expensive than EN CW004A Equiv.
EN CW008A Equiv. (ETP)	High-purity copper with a purity of 99.9% or higher. Contains trace amounts of residual oxygen, which can cause hydrogen embrittlement. Less expensive than EN CW004A Equiv.. Due to its excellent electrical and thermal conductivity, it is suitable for electrodes and heat sinks in non-hydrogen environments.
Brass EN CW509L Equiv. (Yellow)	An alloy of copper and zinc, commonly known as brass. Compared to pure copper, it has higher mechanical strength. It has a gold-like appearance and is prone to tarnishing. Forms a protective oxide layer on the surface, providing good corrosion resistance.
EN CW614N equiv.	An alloy of copper and zinc, also classified as brass. Compared to EN CW505L Equiv. , it offers lower cutting resistance and produces easily breakable chips during machining. More suitable for precision components.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
EN CW004A Equiv. (Oxygen-free)	195~265	120~185	35 or more	185~257	185~265	ー	1.1×10⁵	1.1×10⁵	8.94	5.80×10⁷	391	17.6×10⁻⁶
EN CW008A Equiv. (ETP)	195~265	120~185	35 or more	185~257	185~265	ー	1.1×10⁵	1.1×10⁵	8.94	5.80×10⁷	391	17.6×10⁻⁶
Brass EN CW509L Equiv. (Yellow)	315~410	190~287	30 or more	290~390	300~390	ー	1.0×10⁵	1.0×10⁵	8.39	1.62×10⁷	159	20.8×10⁻⁶
EN CW614N equiv.	335~540	270~410	10 or more	ー	400~450	ー	1.0×10⁵	1.0×10⁵	8.43	1.51×10⁷	117	20.5×10⁻⁶

Resin

Material Features

Material	Features
POM (Acetal, Standard, white)	An engineering plastic known as POM or Duracon. It offers high mechanical strength, wear resistance, and chemical resistance. Excellent machinability and cost-efficiency. Compared to MC Nylon, it has lower water absorption and higher wear resistance, resulting in superior dimensional stability over long-term use.
POM (Acetal, Standard, black)
MC Nylon (Standard, blue)	Provides excellent mechanical strength, chemical resistance (except strong acids), thermal properties, and wear resistance. Due to its high water absorption, dimensional stability is relatively poor.
MC Nylon (Standard, ivory)
MC Nylon (Conductive, black)	A grade of MC Nylon with added electrical conductivity. Volume resistivity: 1–100 Ω·m. Due to MC Nylon’s inherent water absorption, dimensional changes may occur in outdoor environments. More expensive than antistatic MC Nylon.
MC Nylon (Anti-static, black)	A grade of MC Nylon with antistatic properties. Volume resistivity: 10–1000 kΩ·m. Higher resistivity and lower cost than conductive MC Nylon. Dimensional changes may occur in outdoor environments due to water absorption.
MC Nylon (Weather resistance, black ash)	A grade of MC Nylon with enhanced resistance to outdoor degradation. While it offers excellent weather resistance, water absorption may still cause dimensional changes in wet environments.
Bakelite (Paper, natural color)	A thermosetting laminated material with excellent heat resistance and mechanical strength. Relatively low cost. Strength varies depending on the direction of applied force relative to the lamination. Low warpage but high water absorption; brittle and poor impact resistance.
Bakelite (Paper, black)
Bakelite (Cloth, natural)	A laminated material using cloth instead of paper as the base. Offers higher strength and better mechanical properties than paper-based Bakelite. More expensive. Shares similar characteristics regarding lamination direction, warpage resistance, and brittleness.
Fluorine (PTFE, Standard, white)	A fluoropolymer with outstanding heat resistance, chemical resistance, cold resistance, and sliding properties. Lower hardness compared to other resins, prone to burrs. Wide usable temperature range, but large volume changes with temperature reduce dimensional stability. Ideal for high-temperature or chemically aggressive environments.
UHMWPE (Standard, white)	Polyethylene with a molecular weight over 1 million. Features low density, excellent wear resistance, impact absorption, and sliding properties. Lower cost than PTFE. High thermal expansion and poor dimensional stability. Difficult burr removal and rough surface finish.
UHMWPE (Conductive, black)	A conductive version of standard UHMW-PE. Maintains low density, excellent wear resistance, impact absorption, and sliding properties. High thermal expansion and poor dimensional stability. Difficult burr removal and rough surface finish.
ABS (Standard, natural color)	A cost-effective resin with good mechanical strength and impact resistance. Excellent shock absorption. Good machinability and suitable for adhesive bonding.
PEEK (Standard, grey-brown)	A high-performance thermoplastic with top-tier heat resistance and mechanical strength. Exceptional dimensional stability, chemical resistance, wear resistance, and strength. Very expensive. Resistant to most acids, bases, and organic solvents even at high temperatures.
PP (Standard, white)	The lightest and most affordable resin. Excellent wear resistance, water resistance, chemical resistance, and electrical insulation. Among general-purpose resins, it has the highest heat resistance. Hard and strong in tension. Difficult to bond or print due to chemical resistance. Poor weather resistance; degrades in sunlight and becomes brittle at low temperatures.
PET (Glass filled, brown)	A composite material based on PET, filled with short glass fibers and inorganic fillers. Compared to nylon and polyacetal, it offers superior heat resistance, electrical properties, strength, and dimensional stability. Excellent water resistance, electrical properties, and processability. Lower wear resistance.
PPS (Standard, natural color)	A super engineering plastic with excellent heat resistance, dimensional stability, chemical resistance, mechanical strength, and wear resistance. Resistant to most chemicals below 200°C. Similar heat resistance to PEEK but more affordable. Low water absorption and thermal expansion, offering high dimensional stability.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Rockwell Hardness	Specific Gravity	Continuous Service Temperature (°C)
POM (Acetal, Standard, white) POM (Acetal, Standard, black)	60~68	89~108	40~75	2988	R118	1.41	95~100
MC Nylon (Standard, blue) MC Nylon (Standard, ivory)	96	110	30	3432	R120	1.16	120
MC Nylon (Conductive, black)	69	118	10	2500–2700	R119	1.2	120
MC Nylon (Anti-static, black)	75	118	7	2500–2700	R117	1.23	120
MC Nylon (Weather resistance, black ash)	83	110	40	3334	R120	1.16	120
Bakelite (Paper, natural color) Bakelite (Paper, black)	100~150	110~200	1.0-2.0	7600~9700	M110±10	1.35	150~180
Bakelite (Cloth, natural)	65~110	98~167	1.0-2.0	7600~9700	M115±10	1.35	150~180
Fluorine (PTFE, Standard, white)	13.7~34.3	–	200~400	400~600	R20	2.2	260
UHMWPE (Standard, white)	21~45	22~26	300 or more	500~826	R50-56	0.94	80
UHMWPE (Conductive, black)	35	25	300 or more	913	R52-60	0.95	80
ABS (Standard, natural color)	39~54	64~81	18	1900-2800	R105~115	1.05	60~95
PEEK (Standard, grey-brown)	98-116	170-175	20-40	4200-4345	M100-120	1.32	250~260
PP (Standard, white)	33-34	51	33	1400	R126	0.91	100
PET (Glass filled, brown)	95~110 (Length) / 55~65 (Width)	190~220 (Length) / 95~125 (Width)	2.4 (Length) / 1.9 (Width)	ー	R120	1.63~1.74	120
PPS (Standard, natural color)	79-85	128-142	23-27	3300	M95-100	1.35	220

Surface Treatment – Features / Appearance

Surface Treatments	Features	Appearance

Electroless Nickel Plating	A surface treatment that forms a protective film through chemical reactions without using electricity. It enables uniform coating even on complex shapes, maintains high dimensional accuracy, and is compatible with various materials including insulators. Widely used across industries due to its excellent performance.
Black Oxide	A surface treatment that forms black rust on steel surfaces to protect the underlying material. It suppresses the formation of red rust and enhances corrosion resistance. Its refined appearance and low processing cost make it suitable for both industrial products and interior applications.
Trivalent Chromate (clear)	A surface treatment that forms a chromium layer on metal surfaces through electrochemical reaction. The chromium film provides high hardness, excellent wear resistance, corrosion resistance, and a mirror-like gloss. The resulting layer significantly improves the durability and appearance of the base material. The white tone refers to the color of the film formed after chemical treatment.
Trivalent Chromate (Black)	A surface treatment that forms a chromium layer on metal surfaces through electrochemical reaction. The chromium film offers high hardness, wear resistance, corrosion resistance, and a glossy black finish. The coating enhances both the durability and visual quality of the material. The black tone is the color of the film that appears after chemical treatment.
Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)	A surface treatment developed for industrial applications that achieves superior hardness, wear resistance, and corrosion resistance compared to traditional chromate processing. The resulting film reaches a hardness of HV700–1000, significantly enhancing the durability of sliding components.
Low Temperature Black Chrome	An electroplating process performed at low temperatures that provides durability comparable to hard chrome. It offers excellent corrosion, wear, and heat resistance, along with strong adhesion that minimizes the risk of coating cracks.
Phosphate Coating	A surface treatment that forms a phosphate layer on metal surfaces to improve rust resistance, wear resistance, and paint adhesion. It is widely used in automotive and consumer electronics components requiring long-term reliability.
Nitriding	A thermal process that diffuses nitrogen into the metal surface to increase hardness. It enhances wear, fatigue, and corrosion resistance while minimizing distortion, making it suitable for automotive parts, machinery components, and molds.
Clear Anodize	A process that forms a thick alumina layer on aluminum surfaces to improve corrosion resistance, wear resistance, electrical insulation, and dyeability. It is highly decorative and can be dyed in various colors. The white anodized finish is colorless and transparent, resembling the natural silver-white of aluminum.
White Anodizing (Matte Finish)	A surface treatment that combines anodizing with blasting and chemical texturing to create fine surface irregularities, reducing light reflection and producing a matte finish. It is commonly used in optical equipment. The white finish is colorless and transparent, close to the natural aluminum tone.
Black Anodize	A surface treatment that forms a thick alumina layer and enhances corrosion resistance, wear resistance, insulation, and dyeability. After treatment, the surface is dyed black, making it suitable for decorative and functional applications.
Black Anodize (matte)	A surface treatment that includes anodizing, blasting, and chemical texturing to reduce surface reflectivity and achieve a matte black finish. It is widely used in optical components where low brightness is required.
Hard Anodize (clear)	A process performed in cold sulfuric acid to form a thick, hard alumina film with improved hardness and wear resistance compared to standard anodizing. It is used in industrial fields such as automotive and aerospace, where both durability and lubricity are required. The color tone ranges from yellow-brown to natural aluminum.
Hard Anodizing (White Matte Finish)	A surface treatment that combines hard anodizing with blasting and chemical texturing to reduce light reflection and produce a matte finish. It is used in optical components and has a color tone similar to yellow-brown or natural aluminum.
Red Anodize	A surface treatment that forms a thick alumina layer to improve corrosion resistance, wear resistance, insulation, and dyeability. After anodizing, the surface is dyed red, making it suitable for decorative applications.
Gold Anodize	A surface treatment that forms a thick alumina layer with enhanced corrosion resistance, wear resistance, insulation, and dyeability. The surface is dyed gold after anodizing, making it ideal for decorative purposes.
Passivation	A surface treatment that forms an ultra-thin oxide coating on the metal surface to enhance corrosion resistance. It prevents rust from forming and contributes to a more uniform appearance and improved cleanliness.

Surface Treatment Characteristics

Surface Treatments	Corrosion Resistance	Wear Resistance	Hardness	Appearance / Decorative Quality	Electrical Conductivity
Electroless Nickel Plating	〇	〇	〇	△	〇
Black Oxide	△	×	×	△	〇
Trivalent Chromate (clear)	△	×	×	△	〇
Trivalent Chromate (Black)	△	×	×	△	〇
Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)	〇	〇	〇	〇	△
Low Temperature Black Chrome	〇	△	△	〇	〇
Phosphate Coating	△	△	△	×	×
Nitriding	〇	〇	〇	×	×
Clear Anodize	〇	△	△	〇	×
White Anodizing (Matte Finish)	〇	△	△	〇	×
Black Anodize	〇	△	△	〇	×
Black Anodize (matte)	〇	△	△	〇	×
Hard Anodize (clear)	〇	〇	〇	△	×
Hard Anodizing (White Matte Finish)	〇	〇	〇	△	×
Red Anodize	〇	△	△	〇	×
Gold Anodize	〇	△	△	〇	×
Passivation	〇	×	×	△	×

Due to facility limitations, we are unable to provide quotations for parts that require the following machining steps. Thank you for your understanding.

5-axis machining

Welding

Wire-cut EDM

Electrical discharge machining (EDM)

V-groove Machining

How to set up Through Hardening

Lead time for Heat Treated products

*Days to Ship varies depending on the size.
*If a surface treatment is specified, +2 days will be added to the lead time.

Material	Heat Treatment Type	Size (X)	Standard Shipping	Expedite Days to Ship
EN 1.2379 equiv.	Conventional Hardening Vacuum Hardening	150㎜ or less	14 days~	12 days~
EN 1.2379 equiv.		More than 150㎜	18 days~	15 days~
EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)		150㎜ or less	14 days~	12 days~
EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)		More than 150㎜	18 days~	15 days~
EN 1.1206 equiv.		150㎜ or less	14 days~	12 days~
EN 1.1206 equiv.		More than 150㎜	18 days~	15 days~

Selectable Hardness

Material	Standard hardness	Selectable hardness range (HRC)
EN 1.2379 equiv.	HRC58~63	HRC50~63
EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)	HRC50~55	HRC30~55
EN 1.1206 equiv.	HRC35~45	HRC30~50

When specifying a hardness range, there must be 5 (HRC) or more between minimum and maximum values. Example: HRC40~45
When specifying a minimum hardness, only the lowest value for the desired hardness (HRC) must be entered.
When specifying a minimum hardness, the value entered can be up to 5 HRC less than the maximum allowable hardness value. Example: For EN 1.2379 equiv., HRC58~
*Hardness (HRC) is guaranteed to be above the minimum specified hardness value.

Heat Treated product size

Dimensions	Minimum	Maximum
X	10mm	300mm
Y	10mm	150mm
Z	8mm	60mm

Quality assurance for Heat Treated products

Caution

The hardened depth and distribution of heat treated areas may vary depending on the thickness and shape of the material.
When parts are heat treated, the outer surface tends to be harder, while the inner areas tend to remain softer. During inspection the hardening will be confirmed to be uniform on average.
The surface can be cleaned by sandblasting after hardening. The accuracy is not reduced by this process. The blasting method cannot be specified.
Grinding may be performed during the finishing process.
Grinding cannot be specified. Whether to grind is decided in the factory under the aspect of quality assurance.
Hardness measurement marks may remain in areas. To confirm the inspection points in advance, please add information in the comments and request a manual quote.

Inspection marks

Heat Treated Finish

EN 1.2379 equiv.
Surface Treatment: Electroless nickel

EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)
Surface Treatment: None

EN 1.1206 equiv.
Surface Treatment: Electroless nickel

List of Standards

・Standard
Length(X)：10mm or more – 1000mm or less
Width(Y)：10mm or more – 600mm or less
Thickness(Z)：5mm or more – 70mm or less
・Thin plate standards
Length(X) / Width(Y)：5mm or more – 100mm or less
Thickness(Z)：3mm or more – less than 5mm
・Thick plate standard
Length(X) / Width(Y)：70mm or more – 400mm or less
Thickness(Z)：70mm or more – less than 130mm
・Flat bar standards
Length(X)：10mm or more – 500mm or less
Width(Y)：10mm or more – 125mm or less
Thickness(Z)：5mm or more – 30mm or less

Tip

The list of standards shows the size ranges available for automatic quotation. See below for details on applicable sizes for each material.
See table below for available width (Y) and thickness (Z) for polished flat bars. Manual quotes are available for sizes up to (X) 2,000mm x (Y) 600mm x (Z) 200mm.
* Please click here for the details of Manual quotation.

Automatic Quotation Size Thickness (Z)

[ mm ]

[Material] Steel, Stainless steel, Aluminum	Thickness (Z)
[Material] Steel, Stainless steel, Aluminum	Thin plate standards（3≤Z＜5）	Standard（5≤Z≤70）	Thick plate standard（70＜Z≤130）
EN 1.0038 equiv., EN 1.1191 equiv., EN 1.1206 equiv.	Supported	Supported	Supported
EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material), EN 1.1206 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC)	Not Supported	Supported	Not Supported
EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC), NAK55 equiv., EN 1.2379 equiv., DC53 ® (Daido), EN 1.1545 equiv., EN 1.2510 equiv.	Not Supported	Supported	Not Supported
EN AW – 2017 equiv., EN AW – 5052 equiv., EN AW − 5083 equiv., EN AW – 6061 equiv., EN AW – 7075 equiv.	Supported	Supported	Supported
EN 1.4305 equiv.・EN 1.4305 equiv. (annealed material)	Supported	Supported	Not Supported
EN 1.4301 equiv.・EN 1.4301 equiv. (annealed material)	Supported	Supported	Not Supported
EN 1.4401 equiv.	Supported	Supported *Z≤68	Not Supported
EN 1.4404 equiv.	Not Supported	Supported	Not Supported
EN 1.4016 equiv.	Supported	Supported *Z≤30	Not Supported

[ mm ]

[Material] Resin	Thickness (Z)
[Material] Resin	Thin plate standards（3≤Z＜5）	Standard（5≤Z≤70）	Thick plate standard（70＜Z≤130）
MC Nylon (Weather resistance, black ash), MC Nylon (Standard, ivory)	Not Supported	*Z≤50	Not Supported
MC Nylon (Conductive, black)	Not Supported	*Z≤30	Not Supported
MC Nylon (Anti-static, black)	Not Supported	*Z≤50	Not Supported
UHMWPE (Conductive, black)	Not Supported	*Z≤50	Not Supported
PET (Glass filled, brown)	Not Supported	*Z≤50	Not Supported
PTFE (Standard, white)	Not Supported	*Z≤30	Not Supported
Bakelite (Paper, natural color), Bakelite (Paper, black), Bakelite (Cloth, natural color)	Not Supported	*Z≤30	Not Supported
PPS (Standard, natural color)	Not Supported	*Z≤30	Not Supported
Resin materials other than the above	Not Supported	*Z≤60	Not Supported

*The standard thickness for resin materials is Z≤60.

Automatic Quotation Size Length (X) and Width (Y)

[Material] Steel, Stainless steel, Aluminum		Width (Y)
[Material] Steel, Stainless steel, Aluminum		5≤	≤10	≤70	≤100	≤200	≤300	≤400	≤500	≤600
Total Length (X)	5≤	Thin plate standards（3≤Z＜5） All applicable materials
	≤10
	≤70
	≤100
	≤250		EN 1.1206 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC)		Thick plate standard（70＜Z≤130） All applicable materials
	≤300		NAK55 equiv., EN 1.2379 equiv.
	≤400		DC53 ® (Daido), EN 1.1545 equiv., EN 1.2510 equiv. , EN 1.4404 equiv., EN CW004A equiv. (Oxygen-free), EN CW008A equiv. (ETP), Brass EN CW509L equiv. (Yellow)
	≤500		Standard（5≤Z≤70） EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material), EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC), EN 1.4305・1.4301 equiv. (annealed material), 1.4401・1.4016 equiv.
	≤600
	≤1000		EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.1191 equiv. EN 1.1206 equiv. EN AW – 2017・5052・A5083・6061・7075. EN 1.4301 equiv. EN 1.4305 equiv.

[Material] Resin		Width (Y)
[Material] Resin		5≤	≤10	≤70	≤100	≤200	≤300	≤400	≤500	≤600
Total Length (X)	5≤
	≤10		Standard（5≤Z≤70）
	≤70
	≤100
	≤200
	≤300
	≤400
	≤500		Fluorine (PTFE, Standard, white)
	≤600		All applicable materials except PTFE
	≤1000

Caution

Automatic quotation sizes shown may not be supported depending on other quotation conditions.
Surface treatment cannot be specified for thin plate products.
If you have any questions, please contact meviy support.

Flat bar

Flat Bar (Common): X dimension 10≤X≤500

EN 1.0038 equiv.(flat bar)		Width Y
Total Length X	5				16	19		22	25			32	38		44		50
	6				16	19		22	25	28		32	38	40	44	45	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	8				16	19		22	25		30	32	38				50
	9				16	19		22	25			32	38		44	45	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	10	10		15	16		20	22	25		30	32	38	40			50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	12		12		16	19	20	22	25			32	38		44	45	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	16				16	19	20	22	25			32	38		44	45	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	19					19		22	25			32	38		44	45	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	22							22	25			32	38		44		50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	25								25			32	38		44	45	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	30										30						50		65	75		100	125

EN 1.1191 equiv.(flat bar)		Width Y
Total Length X	5		16	19	22	25		32
	6		16	19	22	25		32	38	44	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	9		16	19	22	25		32	38	44	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	12	12	16	19	22	25		32	38	44	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	16		16	19	22	25		32	38	44	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	19			19	22	25		32	38	44	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	22				22	25		32	38	44	50		65	75		100	125
	25					25		32	38	44	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	30						30				50		65	75		100	125

EN 1.4301 equiv.(flat bar)		Width Y
Total Length X	5			15	16	19	20	22	25	30	32	35	38	40		50	60	65	75	90	100
	6			15	16	19	20	22	25	30	32	35	38	40	45	50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	8				16						32		38			50
	9			15	16	19	20	22	25		32		38	40		50	60	65	75	90	100	125
	10	10		15		19	20		25	30	32		38	40		50		65	75		100	125
	12		12		16	19	20		25	30	32		38	40		50		65	75	90	100	125
	16				16	19	20		25		32		38	40		50		65	75		100	125
	19					19			25		32		38			50		65	75		100	125
	22							22			32		38			50		65	75		100
	25								25		32		38			50		65	75		100	125
	30									30						50		65	75		100

EN AW – 6063 equiv.(flat bar)		Width Y
Total Length X	5			15	20		30	40	50	60	100
	6			15	20		30	40	50	60	100
	8			15	20		30	40	50	60	100
	10	10		15	20		30	40	50	60	100
	12		12	15	20		30	40	50	60	100
	15			15	20		30	40	50	60	100
	20				20		30	40	50	60	100
	25					25	30	40	50	60	100
	30						30	40	50	60	100

Material Density

[Material]		Material density (g/cm3)
Steel	EN 1.0038 equiv., EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material), EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar)	7.87
	EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv., EN 1.1206 equiv.	7.87
	EN 1.1206 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC), NAK55 equiv., EN 1.2379 equiv., DC53 ® (Daido), EN 1.1545 equiv., EN 1.2510 equiv.	7.8
Aluminum	EN AW – 2017 equiv.	2.79
	EN AW – 5052 equiv.	2.68
	EN AW − 5083 equiv.	2.6
	EN AW – 6061 equiv.	2.7
	EN AW – 6063 equiv. (flat bar)	2.69
	EN AW – 7075 equiv.	2.8
Stainless Steel	EN 1.4305 equiv.	7.93
	EN 1.4305 equiv. (annealed material)	7.93
	EN 1.4301 equiv.	7.93
	EN 1.4301 equiv. (annealed material)	7.93
	EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar)	7.93
	EN 1.4401 equiv., EN 1.4404 equiv.	7.98
	EN 1.4016 equiv.	7.7
Copper & Brass	EN CW004A Equiv. (Oxygen-free)	8.94
	EN CW008A Equiv. (ETP)	8.94
	Brass EN CW509L Equiv. (Yellow)	8.43
	EN CW614N equiv.	8.5
Resin	POM (Acetal, Standard)	1.41
	MC Nylon (Standard, Weather resistance)	1.16
	MC Nylon (Conductive)	1.2
	MC Nylon (Anti-static, black)	1.2
	Bakelite (Paper,Cloth)	1.4
	Fluorine (PTFE, Standard)	2.2
	UHMWPE (Standard)	0.94
	UHMWPE (Conductive)	0.95
	ABS (Standard)	1.05
	PEEK (Standard)	1.32
	PP (Standard)	0.91
	PET (Glass filled)	1.63
	PPS (Standard)	1.35

In general, the product will be true to the 3D CAD data. However, in the following cases, there may be differences between the 3D CAD data and the actual product.

Internal/External Sharp Corners

If an external corner is sharp or is less than C0.5, the finish will be as follows:
· External corner C0.1 to 0.5 or less
For internal sharp corners, the finish will be as follows:
· Internal corner R0.1 to R0.5 or less

The bottom shape of the blind hole

Even if the bottom of the model is flat, the finished product may be a cone shape due to processing characteristics, and vice versa. This may cause the hole to penetrate, interfere with other shape elements, deform, or bulge.
If not acceptable, please fill the comment field of hole information instructions with “hole diameter(ø), depth, flat bottom” and request a manual quotation from meviy support. We will shortly provide you a formal quotation.

Pilot Hole for Tapped/Precision Hole

The pilot-hole depth may not be machined exactly as shown in the model, and if the effective depth (h) exceeds the reference value [model depth minus pilot-hole remaining depth] the pilot hole may penetrate through and interfere with other shape elements.

The pilot-hole diameter may also not be machined exactly as shown in the model.

Pilot-hole depth reference value = pitch × 2.5 + 2 mm

Pilot-hole remaining depth reference value = 2.7 mm

Corner relief shape for pocket grinding

When grinding is specified on the inner surface of a pocket, a relief shape is created in the corners.

Relief groove Width 2~3mm, Max. 4mm

Relief hole Ø2~3 approx. Ø4 max.

The manufacturing process takes the 3D CAD data to be exact.

Do not forget to model the following shape elements.

Radius (R) Required for End-Mill Trajectory End Point/Turnaround Point.

The end-mill trajectory will always have an R at the end point and the turnaround point.

Please model an R of at least 0.75 based on end-mill diameter and blade length.

The R required for an automatic estimate depends on the depth of the pocket machining.

The larger the R, the larger the diameter of the end mill that can be used. This means a shorter machining time and a lower cost.

No Modeling Required for End-Mill Nose R

Do not model nose R.(The nose R is the minuscule R at the corner of the end-mill tip.)

If a nose R is present, the machining direction cannot be accurately determined, and an automatic estimate is not possible.

Chamfers Over C0.5 Must be Modeled

Chamfers greater than C0.5 must be modeled.

For external sharp corners or corners of C0.5 and smaller, this finish will be C0.1 to 0.5 or less.

Hanging Holes for Surface Treatment Must Be Modeled

For trivalent chromate, Hard Chrome Plating, all anodized aluminum, and passivation, the part requires holes from which it can be hung and immersed in the treatment material.
Model the hanging holes with a combination of two or more of the following shapes. You can use any of the shapes multiple times in the same combination.
• Through holes of ø3.5 or greater (precision holes cannot be used)
• Slotted holes with a width of 3.5 or greater (precision slotted holes cannot be used)
• Closed pockets with width 3.5 or greater
• Tapped through-holes of M5 or greater

Recognizing straight holes |
Recognizing tapped holes |
Settings for insert holes |
Recognizing countersunk holes |
Recognizing other types of hole |
Recognizing slotted holes |

Shape Elements Identified as Holes

In the CNC Milling service, the following shape elements are identified as holes.
Elements identified as holes can be switched to straight holes or precision holes.
If the hole diameter meets certain criteria, you can also switch to tapped holes, insert holes or countersunk holes.
For one-step holes and two-step holes, the hole type can be changed at each step.
See here for positions where a chamfer can be created in one-step and two-step holes.
You can also specify the dimensional tolerance from the hole center.

Blind cylindrical shape
with flat hole base

Blind cylindrical shape with conical hole base

Blind cylindrical shape with flat hole base
+90° chamfer at entrance

Blind cylindrical shape with conical hole base
+90° chamfer at entrance

Through cylinder

Through cylinder
+90° chamfer at entrance

Through cylinder
+90° chamfer at entrance (both sides)

One-step hole

Two-step hole
(with center section the smallest)

Recognizing Straight Holes

Any shape that is identified as a hole, but is not initially recognized to be a tapped hole or a countersunk hole, is identified as a straight hole.

Settings for Precision Holes

Any shape identified as a hole can be changed to a precision hole by changing the hole diameter tolerance type of the straight hole. See here for more information about how to switch to precision holes.

Recognizing Tapped Holes

meviy sets the pilot-hole diameter based on the user-set “Tapped Hole Identification Settings” and the file extension (see table below). If the model’s hole diameter matches the settings, it is identified as a tapped hole.

If holes have not been automatically assigned as tapped holes at initial upload, you can also change the hole type manually as long as the hole diameter is within the threshold.

You can also change from tapped holes to straight or insert holes.

Select “User Settings” in the user menu in the top-right of the screen.
You can change the settings from the “Tapped Hole Identification Settings” menu.
Once you have changed the settings, click “Change.”

For native files: select the CAD program used to create the file
For intermediate files: select the CAD program used to create the file
*In order to improve the accuracy of the automatic assignment of tapped holes, you should always try to select the original CAD program used to create the file.
Example: CATIA → SOLIDWORKS (upload) CAD Software Settings
✓ Select: CATIA
X Don’t select: SOLIDWORKS
*If the native file is different from the CAD software settings, the CAD software setting logic will be used for recognizing tapped holes.

Please note

It is recommended that you use the hole commands to model holes. The machining service is designed for modeling generated with the various CAD hole commands, and using the hole commands improves the accuracy of the automatic assignment of tapped holes.

(Automatic tapped-hole assignment can also be used when modeling with cutting. However, if there is any discrepancy in the logic, tapped holes cannot be automatically assigned, and holes may end up as straight holes or other types of hole.)

Please note (SOLIDWORKS users only)

The machining service refers to the CAD names in the SOLIDWORKS Tapped Hole Identification Settings as “SOLIDWORKS(A)” and “SOLIDWORKS(B).” The differences between the two are as shown below.

Select according to your modeling specifications.

If a user of modeling specification “SOLIDWORKS(B)” has set the CAD name to “Use file type” in the Tapped Hole Identification Settings, the “SOLIDWORKS(A)” logic will take precedence.

“SOLIDWORKS(B)” users must set the CAD name to “SOLIDWORKS(B).”

The tapped hole identification logic for the machining service is shown below.

*The machining service’s tapped hole identification logic is designed to round to three decimal places.

*The CAD in the following tables assumes the default versions of the following are used.

It may not work, depending on version upgrades and personal settings.

Autodesk Inventor 2023	Siemens PLM-NX 2206
CATIA V5-R62022	Solid Edge 2023
Creo 9.0	SOLIDWORKS 2023
Pro/Engineer 19.0	I-deas
Onshape 1.154.6978	iCAD SX V8L3-00A
Autodesk Fusion 2.0.10813	IRONCAD 2021

Automatic Tapped-Hole Assignment

Recommended Tapped Hole Identification Setting: CAD Software

Model Hole Diameter	(1) Upload Model: Native/Intermediate File
(ø) mm	(2) Tapped- Hole Identification Setting: CAD Name
Tap Size (Coarse)	Creo Onshape SW(A)	Solid Edge IronCAD	NX	CATIA V5 Inventor	SW(B) iCAD SX	Autodesk Fusion
M2	1.6		1.6	1.57	2	1.62
M2.5	2.05		2.05	2.01	2.5	2.08
M3	2.5		2.5	2.46	3	2.53
M4	3.3		3.3	3.24	4	3.33
M5	4.2		4.2	4.13	5	4.23
M6	5		5	4.92	6	5.04
M8	6.8		6.8	6.65	8	6.78
M10	8.5		8.5	8.38	10	8.53
M12	10.2		10.3	10.11	12	10.27
M14	12		12.1	11.84	14	12.02
M16	14		14	13.84	16	14.02

Not Recommended: Tapped- Hole Identification Setting "Use File Type"

Model Hole Diameter	(1) Upload Model: Native File
(ø) mm	(2) Tapped- Hole Identification Settings: Use File Type
Tap Size (Coarse)	Creo Onshape SW(A)	Solid Edge IronCAD NX	CATIA V5 Inventor	SW(B) iCAD SX	Autodesk Fusion
M2	1.6		1.57	2	1.62
M2.5	2.05		2.01	2.5	2.08
M3	2.5		2.46	3	2.53
M4	3.3		3.24	4	3.33
M5	4.2		4.13	5	4.23
M6	5		4.92	6	5.04
M8	6.8		6.65	8	6.78
M10	8.5		8.38	10	8.53
M12	10.2		10.11	12	10.27
M14	12		11.84	14	12.02
M16	14		13.84	16	14.02

Model Hole Diameter	(1) Upload Model: Native File
(ø) mm	(2) Tapped- Hole Identification Settings: Use File Type
Tap Size (Coarse)	STEP Parasolid ACIS JT PRC I-DEAS
M2	1.57/1.6/1.62/2
M2.5	2.01/2.05/2.08
M3	2.46/2.5/2.53/3
M4	3.24/3.3/3.33/4
M5	4.13/4.2/4.23
M6	4.92/5/5.04/6
M8	6.65/6.75/6.78/6.8/8
M10	8.38/8.5/8.53/10
M12	10.11/10.2/10.25/10.27/10.3
M14	11.84/12/12.02/12.1
M16	13.84/14/14.02/16

Tapped-Hole Manual Assignment

Tap Size (Coarse/Fine)	Model hole diameter (ø) mm
M2	1.5 to 2
M2.5	2 to 2.5
M3	2.4 to 3
M4	3.2 to 4
M5	4.1 to 5
M6	4.9 to 6
M8	6.6 to 8
M10	8.3 to 10
M12	10.1 to 12
M14	11.8 to 14
M16	13.8 to 16

*SW(A) when created with the SOLIDWORKS hole specification options “Screw pilot-hole drill diameter” and “Thread”
*SW(B) when created with the SOLIDWORKS hole specification option “Remove thread”

Settings for Insert Holes

Insert Material:
EN 1.4301 equiv.

When the quoted material is made of aluminum or resin, the machining service can select insert holes within the threshold using logic equivalent to the tapped-hole identification logic.

The insert material is EN 1.4301 equiv.

There are four nominal lengths for each diameter: 0.5D, 1D, 1.5D and 2D.

However, the number of selectable diameters is M2 to M12, unlike for tapped holes.

Recognizing Countersunk Holes

Conical shapes that meet the following conditions will be identified as countersunk holes.

Model the conical shape with an angle of 90°.

Set so that the hole diameter ratio D/d is:
greater than 1.4 (D>1.4d) when d is 4.0 [mm] or less.
greater than 1.7 (D>1.7d) when d is greater than 4.0 [mm].

Recognizing Other Types of Hole

The shapes shown below are recognized as other types of hole. The service is not available if these other types of hole are present.

Decreasing two-step hole

Non-90° entrance chamfer

Tapered hole

Oblique hole

Fillet at entrance

Machined thread

Recognizing Slotted Holes

The following shape elements are recognized as slotted holes. Shape elements recognized as slotted holes can be changed to precision holes using the dialog box. You can also specify the dimensional tolerance from the arc center.

Through-hole shape with width = 2R

Through-hole shape with width = 2R,
90° chamfer at entrance (one side)

Through-hole shape with width = 2R,
+90° chamfer at entrance (both sides)

Blind hole with width = 2R

Blind hole with width = 2R,
+90° chamfer at entrance

+90° U-shaped through slot where width = 2R

U-shaped through slot with width = 2R,
with 90° chamfer at entrance (one side)

U-shaped through slot with width = 2R,
+90° chamfer at entrance (both sides)

U-shaped blind slot with width = 2R

U-shaped blind slot with width = 2R
+90° chamfer at entrance

As shown below, if there is a thin wall below the machining limit, out of tolerance will occur due to tearing or shape deformation during manufacturing. *If there is an overlap between the limit values, the larger value will be given priority.

If the thin wall is below the limit, the “Quality Agreement” will be displayed on the screen. Please check the relevant area on the 3D viewer and answer whether you agree with tears, deformations and out of tolerance.

If you disagree, we will not be able to provide an automatic quotation. If you disagree but still want the same quality as the model, please write “disagree with the quality agreement” or something similar in the comment box and request a manual quote from meviy support. After that, you will receive an official quotation response shortly.

"Straight hole", "Precision hole", "Tapped hole": Thin wall between cylindrical area and other shape elements

Thin Walls between Straight Holes and Other Shape Elements

[mm]

All materials (Steel, Prehardened Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Polyacetal, MC Nylon, Fluorine, UHMWPE, ABS, PEEK, Bakelite)

Diameter

ø2 or more

ø5 or less

More than ø5

Machining Limit

0.8

1.0

Thin Walls between Precision Holes and Other Shape Elements

[mm]

Steel, Pre-Hardened Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel
Diameter	ø2 or more
Machining Limit	0.8

[mm]

POM, MC Nylon, Fluorine, UHMWPE, ABS, PEEK
Diameter	ø2 or more
Machining Limit	1.5

[mm]

Bakelite
Diameter	ø2 or more
Machining Limit	2.0

Thin Walls between Tapped Holes and Other Shape Elements

[mm]

All materials (Steel, Prehardened Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Polyacetal, MC Nylon, Fluorine, UHMWPE, ABS, PEEK, Bakelite)
Nominal Diameter	M2 or higher M5 or lower	M6 or higher M10 or lower	M12 or higher
Machining Limit	0.8	1.0	1.5

Thin Walls between Insert Holes and Other Shape Elements

[mm]

All materials (Steel, Prehardened Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Polyacetal, MC Nylon, Fluorine, UHMWPE, ABS, PEEK, Bakelite)
Nominal Diameter	M2 or higher M5 or lower	M6 or higher M10 or lower	M12
Machining Limit	2.0	3.1	3.9

Thin Walls between Countersunk Holes and Other Shape Elements

[mm]

All materials (Steel, Prehardened Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Polyacetal, MC Nylon, Fluorine, UHMWPE, ABS, PEEK, Bakelite)

Diameter (D, d)

ø2 or more

ø5 or less

More than ø5

Machining Limit

0.8

1.0

Thin Walls between Countersunk Holes and Other Shape Elements

[mm]

Steel, Pre-Hardened Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel
Nominal Diameter	ø3 or more ø6 or less	More than ø6
Machining Limit	0.8	1.0

[mm]

POM, MC Nylon, Fluorine, UHMWPE, ABS, PEEK, Bakelite
Nominal Diameter	ø3 or more
Machining Limit	1.0

Other Arrangements of Thin Walls and Other Shape Elements

Thin Walls between Straight Section of Slotted Holes and Other Shape Elements

[mm]

All materials (Steel, Prehardened Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Polyacetal, MC Nylon, Fluorine, UHMWPE, ABS, PEEK, Bakelite)
Machining Limit	1.0

Thin Walls between Other Sections of Slotted Holes and Other Shape Elements

[mm]

All materials (Steel, Prehardened Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Polyacetal, MC Nylon, Fluorine, UHMWPE, ABS, PEEK, Bakelite)
Machining Limit	1.0

Thin Walls between Other Sections of Slotted Holes and Other Shape Elements

[mm]

All materials (Steel, Prehardened Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Polyacetal, MC Nylon, Fluorine, UHMWPE, ABS, PEEK, Bakelite)
Machining Limit	1.0

Thin Walls between Other Sections of Pockets and Other Shape Elements

[mm]

All materials (Steel, Prehardened Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Polyacetal, MC Nylon, Fluorine, UHMWPE, ABS, PEEK, Bakelite)
Machining Limit	1.0

Hole Tip and Other Shape Elements

[mm]

All materials (Steel, Prehardened Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel, Polyacetal, MC Nylon, Fluorine, UHMWPE, ABS, PEEK, Bakelite)
Machining Limit	2.0

What is a quotation failure? Case 1: Failure to read uploaded file Case 2: Unsupported shape Case 3: Maximum Size Issue Case 4: Unsupported holes Case 5: Pocket depth limit exceeded Case 6: Insufficient pocket width Case 7: Insufficient depth of blind holes Case 8: Pocket_Unprocessable pin corner Case 9: Shape recognition failure

When uploading a model to meviy, a “Quotation failure” error may occur.
Below is an overview of why these errors occur and how to resolve them, as well as some example errors.

What is a quotation failure?

When uploading a model to meviy, an error may occur where the model cannot be auto-quoted.

How to check for errors in the project list

After uploading a model to meviy, the “” or “” icon will appear if the model cannot be auto-quoted.
In this case, please go to the 3D Viewer and confirm the details of the error from the Precaution column.

How to check error messages in the 3D Viewer

Please open 3D viewer and check “Precaution”.
If you click “Check”, you will see error messages and a range for auto-quotation.
Depending on error cause, a range for auto-auotation may not be displayed.

Notes

In addition to the red text in the message box, the Quality Agreement may be provided in an orange message.
For more information on the quality agreement, please refer to the following

→Quotation conditions settings＞[CNC Milling] Quotation Settings＞Confirming Approvals

How to locate an error

Clicking the “Confirm” button will highlight the error location in the model.
Once this error is resolved, automatic quoting will be possible.

Case 1: Failure to read uploaded file

This error occurs when a 3DCAD format or extension that is not supported by meviy is uploaded.
To resolve this, please check the formats supported by meviy and re-upload a supported format.

Notes

Please see below for the formats and extensions that can be uploaded to meviy.

Before You Begin＞Uploadable CAD File Formats

Case 2: Unsupported shape

This error is caused by uploading a shape that is not eligible for automatic quotation with meviy CNC Milling service.
To resolve this, please check the quotable shapes and modify the model accordingly.

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “Unsupported shapes_Support”

Notes

See below for shapes supported by the CNC Milling service.
→CNC Milling＞Applicable Parts/Materials＞Quotable Shapes

See below for Unsupported shapes by the CNC Milling service.
→CNC Milling＞Applicable Parts/Materials＞Ineligible Shapes

Case 3: Maximum Size Issue

This error is caused by exceeding meviy’s auto-quotable size.
To resolve this, reduce the overall size of the part to meet meet meviy’s size requirements.

Tip

If any of the following messages are displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “Blank_Length”
– “Blank_Width”
– “Blank_Thickness”

Notes

See below for sizes that can be quoted by meviy.
→CNC Milling＞Applicable Parts/Materials＞Quotable Sizes

If you have any questions, please request a manual quotation by meviy support. See below for assistance on manual quotations.
→Quotation conditions settings＞[CNC Milling] Quotation Settings＞Information about manual quotation

Case 4: Unsupported holes

This error occurs when there is an unrecognized hole shape.
To resolve this, please change the hole to a supported shape and re-upload the file.

Tip

Error message will be displayed in the 3D Viewer
– “Unsupported hole type”

Notes

Please see below for the recognition conditions of each hole type.
→CNC Milling＞Design Guidelines＞Recognizing Different Types of Hole

If you have any questions, please request a manual quotation by meviy support. See below for assistance on manual quotations.
→Quotation conditions settings＞[CNC Milling] Quotation Settings＞Information about manual quotation

Caution

Tapered holes, holes with a fillet at the edge, and undercuts are not supported by a manual quotation

Case 5: Pocket depth limit exceeded

This error occurs when the corner radius inside the pocket does not fit into the meviy standard.
To resolve this, increase the corner radius to increase the tool diameter, or remove the corner radius to change the machining direction.

Tip

meviy recognizes the machining direction and tool diameter by the radius of the pocket corner.
Increasing the corner radius will increase the tool diameter and increase the possible cut depth.

If any of the following messages are displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “Pocket_Maximum depth_Minimum radius restricted”
– “Pocket_Maximum depth_Minimum width restricted”
– “Pocket_Maximum depth_Minimum radius and minimum width not restricted”

Notes

Please see below for pocket dimensions that can be quoted.
→CNC Milling＞Accuracy and Machining Specifications＞Standards for Different Hole and Pocket Types

Case 6: Insufficient pocket width

This error occurs when the specified machining depth is too deep for the pocket width.
Tool diameter is determined by the minimum pocket width. Narrower pocket widths make the tool thinner and thus prevent deeper machining.
To resolve this, increase the pocket width or reduce the pocket depth.

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “Pocket_Width_Minimum value”

Notes

Please see below for pocket dimensions that can be quoted.
→CNC Milling＞Applicable Parts/Materials＞Quotable Shapes

Please see below for tool diameters and accompanying machining depths.
→CNC Milling＞Accuracy and Machining Specifications＞Standards for Different Hole and Pocket Types

Case 7: Insufficient depth of blind holes

This error occurs when the blind hole is too deep, and causes the tool holder to collide with the part.
To resolve this, adjust the hole depth, diameter, or position to prevent collision.

Tip

This error occurs when the corner radius inside the pocket does not fit into the meviy standard.
To resolve this, increase the corner radius to increase the tool diameter, or remove the corner radius to change the machining direction.

If any of the following messages are displayed in the 3D Viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “Pocket_Maximum depth_Minimum radius restricted”
– “Pocket_Maximum depth_Minimum width restricted”
– “Pocket_Maximum depth_Minimum radius and minimum width not restricted”

Notes

Please see below for tool diameters and accompanying machining depths.
→CNC Milling＞Accuracy and Machining Specifications＞Standards for Different Hole and Pocket Types

Case 8: Pocket_Unprocessable pin corner

This error occurs when a pin angle remains in a corner.
The solution is to use the R proposal function or change the design.

Tip

Please see below for shapes that can be quoted.
→CNC Milling＞Applicable Parts/Materials＞Quotable Shapes

Caution

A corner pin angle is defined as a pin angle with no corner R required in the machining direction.
Shape patterns include obtuse corners as well as those shown at left.

Case 9: Shape recognition failure

This error occurs when there is a problem with the quality of the uploaded 3D CAD data, and the shape is deformed when meviy is loaded.
If the shape is deformed, please try the following steps to see if you can get a quote.

State of original data

State after meviy is loaded

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “An error shape exists in the model.”
– “Failed to load file.”

1. Shape check of uploaded 3D CAD data

Check the shape of the uploaded 3D CAD data.
If there is a problem with the shape, correct it and upload the model again.

Notes

Visual check
– Are there any twisted surfaces?
– Are there any unintended geometric features displayed in the cross-section view?
– Are there any very small shapes or gaps?

Confirmation of the shape creation method
– Are there any 3D shapes created without drawing sketches?
– Shapes created by importing lines from DXF
– Shapes created using reference geometry or mating part geometry
– Are there any intersecting lines created by intersecting holes?
– etc.

Confirmation using checking tools
– Check for inconsistent shapes

If there is no problem with the shape, or if the loading situation does not improve after re-uploading the corrected file, please try the next step 2.

２．Changing the file format

Upload the file again in a different 3D CAD file format from the one you uploaded.

Notes

– If meviy supports the native format of the 3D CAD file you are using, please try quoting in the native format.
– If you are using an intermediate format, please try quoting in STEP or Parasolid format.

If modifying the geometry and changing the file format does not improve the situation, please contact our support.

CNC Milling service does not display dimensions or tolerances when 3D CAD data is uploaded other than external dimensions and hole information, assuming that the customer specifies tolerances of their choice.
This section describes the finish of parts where dimensions and tolerances are not displayed.

Default General Tolerance Standards for Machined Dimensions
(Standard products conform to JIS B 0405:1991/JIS B 0419:1991, International Economy products can conform JIS B 0405:1991/JIS B 0419:1991 or GB/T 1804-2000/GB/T 1184-1995.)

The following standards are applied to the origin according to machining standards.

The origin can be moved to any position.

Length, Excluding Chamfer, Dimensional Tolerances

[mm]

Product lineup	Tolerance Grade		Base Dimensions
Product lineup	Symbol	Description	≥0.5 ≤3	>3 ≤6	>6 ≤30	>30 ≤120	>120 ≤400	>400 ≤1000
JIS	m	Medium	±0.1	±0.1	±0.2	±0.3	±0.5	±0.8
GB	m	Medium	±0.1	±0.1	±0.2	±0.3	±0.5	±0.8

Tolerances for Chamfer Length Dimensions (Corner Radius or Corner Chamfer Dimensions)

[mm]

Product lineup	Tolerance Grade		Base Dimensions
Product lineup	Symbol	Description	≥0.5 ≤3	>3 ≤6	>6
JIS	C	Rough	±0.4	±1	±2
GB	m	Medium	±0.4	±1	±2

Angle Dimensional Tolerances

[mm]

Product lineup	Tolerance Grade		Length of the Shorter Angle Edge
Product lineup	Symbol	Description	≤10	>10 ≤50	>50 ≤120	>120 ≤400	>400
JIS	m	Medium	±1°	±30′	±20′	±10′	±5′
GB	m	Medium	±1°	±30′	±20′	±10′	±5′

General Tolerances of Perpendicularity

[mm]

Product lineup	Tolerance Grade	Nominal Length of the Shorter Edge
Product lineup	Symbol	≤100	>100 ≤300	>300 ≤1,000
JIS	K	0.4	0.6	0.8
GB	K	0.4	0.6	0.8

General Tolerances of Straightness and Flatness

[mm]

Product lineup	Tolerance Grade	Nominal Length
Product lineup	Symbol	≤10	>10 ≤30	>30 ≤100	>100 ≤300	>300 ≤1,000
JIS	K	0.05	0.1	0.2	0.4	0.6
GB	K	0.05	0.1	0.2	0.4	0.6

(Related) Changing a design’s origin.

Width (Y) and thickness (Z) tolerances of polished flat bar

The following standards are applied to polished flat bars, depending on the material. As for tolerances for overall length (X) and other dimensions, “Standard for normal tolerances for machining dimensions without indication (extracted from JIS B 0405:1991/JIS B 0419:1991)” is applied as in the case of other materials.

EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar) Excerpt from JIS G 3123:2004/ JIS G 4318:2016

Tolerance Grade		Width Tolerance/Thickness Tolerance
Symbol	Description	>	3	6	10	18	30	50	80	120
Symbol	Description	≤	6	10	18	30	50	80	120	180
IT	13		-0.18-0	-0.22-0	-0.27-0	-0.33-0	-0.39-0	-0.46-0	-0.54-0	-0.63-0

EN AW – 6063 equiv. (flat bar) Excerpt from JIS H 4040:2015

Thickness	Width	Thickness Tolerance	Width Tolerance	Thickness	Width	Thickness Tolerance	Width Tolerance

	30		±0.39		20
5	15	±0.26	±0.33	12	12	±0.33	±0.33
	20		±0.39		15	±0.33	±0.33
	30		±0.39		20	±0.39	±0.39
	40	±0.33	±0.52		30		±0.39
	50		±0.52		40		±0.52
	60		±0.78		50		±0.52
	100		±1.00		60	±0.46	±0.78
6	15	±0.26	±0.33		100	±0.52	±1.00
	20		±0.39	15	15	±0.39	±0.39
	40	±0.33	±0.52		30
	50		±0.52		40		±0.52
	60		±0.78		50		±0.52
	100		±1.00		60	±0.46	±0.78
8	15	±0.33	±0.33		100	±0.52	±1.00
	20		±0.39	20	20	±0.39	±0.39
	30		±0.39		30	±0.39	±0.39
	40		±0.52		40	±0.46	±0.52
	50		±0.52		50	±0.46	±0.52
	60	±0.39	±0.78		60	±0.52	±0.78
	100	±0.46	±1.00		100	±0.59	±1.00
10	10	±0.33	±0.33	25	25	±0.39	±0.39
	15		±0.33		30	±0.39	±0.39
	20		±0.39		40	±0.46	±0.52
	30		±0.39		50	±0.46	±0.52
	40		±0.52		60	±0.52	±0.78
	50		±0.52		100	±0.59	±1.00
	60	±0.39	±0.78	30	30	±0.46	±0.46
	100	±0.46	±1.00		40		±0.52
					50		±0.52
					60	±0.52	±0.78
					100	±0.59	±1.00

Resin Precision Assurance

Unlike metal, resin is a material that easily changes shape or dimensions due to factors such as temperature and humidity. Due to this, precision assurance is performed under the following conditions:
· Inspections are performed in temperature-controlled environments.
· Precision assurance is based on the results of inspections performed immediately before shipment.

Surface Roughness

The default surface roughness reference value is √Ra6.3 (√Rz25).
When selecting the surface roughness symbol “Ra” in the user settings or initial quotation conditions, 6.3 or 3.2 can be selected.
When selecting the surface roughness symbol “Rz”, 25 or 12.5 can be selected.
The surface roughness is displayed in the tree view and in the bottom left corner of the 3D viewer.

Surface Roughness

Symbol	Selected Value
Ra	6.3	3.2
Rz	25	12.5

Internal and External Corners

For external sharp corners or corners of C0.5 and smaller, the finish will be as follows:
· Corners C0.1 mm to 0.5 mm or less

For internal sharp corners, the finish will be as follows:
· Internal corners R0.1 to R0.5 mm or less

Dimensional Tolerances

When uploading 3D CAD data, you can specify any dimensions/tolerances for parts where dimensions and tolerances are not displayed.

The minimum specifiable value ranges for tolerances depends on the combination of shape elements.

Depending on other settings, in-range precision may not be covered by the service.

Shape Elements and Minimum Value Ranges for Tolerances

[mm]

Steel, Pre-Hardened Steel, Stainless Steel, Aluminum
Shape Element ①/Shape Element ②	Blank Surface	Pockets	Precision Holes/Other Hole Types	Precision Slotted Holes	Straight Holes (No Precision) Tapped Holes/Countersunk Holes/Slotted Holes
Blank Surface *1	0.02	0.02	0.02	0.02	0.2
Pockets *2	–	0.02
Precision Holes/Other Hole Types		–
Precision Slotted Holes			–
Straight Holes (No Precision) Tapped Holes/Countersunk Holes/Slotted Holes			–	–

*If the range is less than 0.2, Trivalent Chromate (clear) is not available as a surface treatment via the service.

[Minimum dimensional tolerance range specifiable for large sizes (X>600)]

Shape Element ①/Shape Element ②	Blank Surface	Pockets	Precision Holes/Other Hole Types	Precision Slotted Holes	Straight Holes (No Precision) Tapped Holes/Countersunk Holes/Slotted Holes
Blank Surface *1	0.1(±0.05）	0.1(±0.05）	0.1(±0.05）	0.1(±0.05）	0.2（±0.1）
Pockets *2	–	0.04（±0.02）	0.04（±0.02）	0.04（±0.02）
Precision Holes/Other Hole Types		–	0.04（±0.02）
Precision Slotted Holes			–
Straight Holes (No Precision) Tapped Holes/Countersunk Holes/Slotted Holes			–	–

[mm]

Resin
Shape Element ①/Shape Element ②	Blank Surface	Pockets	Precision Holes/Other Hole Types	Precision Slotted Holes	Straight Holes (No Precision) Tapped Holes/Countersunk Holes/Slotted Holes
Blank Surface *1	0.1	0.1	0.1	0.1	0.2
Pockets *2	–	0.1
Precision Holes/Other Hole Types		–
Precision Slotted Holes			–
Straight Holes (No Precision) Tapped Holes/Countersunk Holes/Slotted Holes			–	–

[mm]

Polished flat bar (EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar), EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar))
Shape Element ①/Shape Element ②	Blank Surface	Pockets	Precision Holes/Other Hole Types	Precision Slotted Holes	Straight Holes (No Precision) Tapped Holes/Countersunk Holes/Slotted Holes
Blank Surface *1	0.2	ー	0.2	0.2	0.2
Pockets *2	ー
Precision Holes/Other Hole Types
Precision Slotted Holes			ー
Straight Holes (No Precision) Tapped Holes/Countersunk Holes/Slotted Holes			ー	ー

*1 Blank Surface: The entire surface used for external dimensions.

*2 Pocket: A cutting surface other than a blank surface.

Application conditions for overlapping dimensions

Duplicate dimension checks are performed for meviy milled products.
Duplicate dimensions cannot be set to avoid duplicate instructions.

Logic (1)
Holes of the same diameter that exist on the same plane are treated as holes of the same group.
If you specify dimensional tolerances for holes, or holes and blank and pocket surfaces, the dimensions are also applied to the holes on the same coax in the same group, and the duplicate is determined.

When dimensional tolerances are specified for ‘H-001’, they shall also apply to ‘H-002’ on the same axis and within the same group.

If you want to specify different dimension tolerances for H-001 and H-002, you first need to split the group.

Logic (2)

Dimensions that can be expressed by calculating other dimensions are judged to be duplicated.

When dimensions are set to ‘50’ and “150”, the dimension ‘100’ – which can be expressed as 150 minus 50 – will be flagged as a duplicate.

Visualization of features whose dimensions are covered

Dimensions are indicated by highlighting or a dotted line.

■How to view 3DViewer

Click on a dimension to highlight the hole to which the dimension is applied.
(In the image, the hole in the bottom left and the hole in the upper left)

■How to view a simple 2D diagram

Dimensions are applied to holes, which are indicated by a dotted line.

Important Points when Specifying Dimensional Tolerances for Precision Holes

As mentioned above under “Dimensional Tolerance”, when specifying dimensional tolerance for a precision hole, the minimum tolerance value (range) is generally 0.04.

However, there is an exception where the minimum tolerance value (range) is 0.2.

*The orange area is the effective depth range of a precision hole.

0-Step/1-Step Holes (Counterbored Holes), Blind

0-Step/1-Step hole (counterbored hole), blind

⇒ Minimum tolerance value (range): 0.04

0-Step Holes, Through

Dimensional tolerance specification on the effective depth side ⇒ minimum tolerance value (range): 0.04

Dimensional tolerance specification on the effective depth side and opposite side ⇒ minimum tolerance value (range): 0.2

Dimensional tolerance specification on effective depth full-length holes ⇒ minimum tolerance value (range): 0.04

1-Step Holes (Counterbored), Through

Dimensional tolerance specification on the upper side ⇒ minimum tolerance value (range): 0.04

If the lower step is the total length of the effective depth, lower step side dimensional tolerance specification ⇒ minimum tolerance value (range): 0.04

If the lower step is not the total length of the effective depth, lower step side dimensional tolerance specification ⇒ minimum tolerance value (range): 0.2

2-Step Holes

Dimensional tolerance specification on the side of the step with a set effective depth ⇒ minimum tolerance value (range): 0.04

Dimensional tolerance specification on the central step effective depth and opposite side ⇒ minimum tolerance value (range): 0.04

Dimensional tolerance specification on the central step effective depth and opposite side ⇒ minimum tolerance value (range): 0.2

Dimensional tolerance specification on steps with set effective depth and opposite side ⇒ minimum tolerance value (range): 0.2

Hole depth tolerance and effective depth tolerance

You can specify a hole depth tolerance for a blind straight hole and an effective depth tolerance for a precision hole.

Minimum range of specifiable tolerances

	Tolerance range
Automatic Quotation	0.1 or more
Manual Quotation	0.04≤Range＜0.1

Minimum range of specifiable tolerances for surface treatments, nitriding and heat treatment selections

	Automatic Quotation	Manual Quotation	Unable to quote
Trivalent Chromate (clear)	0.2 or more	0.08≤Range＜0.2	less than 0.08
Trivalent Chromate (Black)
Hard Anodize (clear)
Hard Anodizing (White Matte Finish)	Unable to quote
Nitriding	Unable to quote
Hardening	0.2 or more	0.08≤Range＜0.2	less than 0.08

Hole types that can have hole depth and effective depth tolerance specified

Hole types that can specify hole depth tolerance	Straight hole (blind only)	Slotted hole (blind only)
Hole types that can specify effective depth tolerance	Precision hole
Hole types that cannot specify either	Tapped	Insert	Pilot holes	countersunk hole

Precautions

If a hole depth tolerance is specified for a straight hole, the hole bottom shape is automatically specified as flat.

Angular tolerances

You can specify angular tolerances for the angles between surfaces.
You can select the blank side or pocket side.

Specifiable tolerance range

	Tolerance range (Θ)
Automatic Quotation	0.16°≤Θ≤10°
Manual Quotation	0.02°≤Θ＜0.16°

When selecting heat treatment and nitriding, the following tolerance ranges can be specified

	Tolerance range (Θ)
Automatic Quotation	2°≤Θ≤10°
Manual Quotation	0.02°≤Θ＜2°

*General tolerances will also be estimated by the ｍanual Quotation.

Unit of angular dimension

The unit of angular dimension is in decimal notation. (e.g. 30.5°±0.2°)
*Notation in minutes and seconds (sexagesimal) is not supported.

Processing examples

Surfaces for which angular tolerance cannot be specified

You cannot specify angular tolerances for the following surfaces.

hole opening

Chamfer

R-side

Surfaces that are not parallel to the six sides

*The dimensions displayed on the selected surfaces must be parallel to one of the XYZ surfaces.

surfaces that are too small

*The selected area must be at least 9 mm².

Surfaces with an angle of 180°

Precautions

One-sided tolerances are quoted by the ｍanual quotation.
In the event of overlapping dimensions, we will prioritise the following in order.
Geometric tolerances＞Position tolerance＞Angular tolerances＞General tolerances for positional dimensions＞General angular tolerances

Hole dimension notation follows the guidelines outlined below.

Straight Holes*If the bottom of the hole is specified as flat, (flat hole bottom) will be added at the end of the notation on the viewer.

[mm]

Through/Blind	Blind		Through
Hole diameter tolerance	No	Yes	No	Yes
Image
Viewer Notation	ø4↧15	ø4H7(+0.012/0) ↧15/Pilot Hole ↧18	ø4 THRU	ø4H7(+0.012/0) ↧15/Pilot Hole Thru

Straight HolesWhen adding hole depth tolerances

[mm]

Through/Blind	Blind		Through
Hole diameter tolerance	No	Yes	Yes
Image
Viewer Notation	Φ4↧15±0.1 (Flat bottom)	Φ4H7 (+0.012/0) ↧15±0.1 (Flat bottom)/Pilot Hole ↧18	Φ4H7 (+0.012/0) ↧15±0.1/Pilot Hole Thru

Tapped Holes

[mm]

Through/Blind	Blind		Through
Coarse/Fine	Coarse	Fine	Coarse	Fine
Image
Viewer Notation	M10↧25	M10x1.25 ↧25/Pilot Hole ↧30	M10 THRU	M10x1.25 THRU

Insert Holes

[mm]

Through/Blind	Blind	Through
Coarse/Fine	Coarse	Coarse
Image
Viewer Notation	M10 INS-2D/Pilot Hole ↧30	M4 INS-2D THRU

1-Step Holes

[mm]

Through/Blind	Blind	Through
Precision	No	No
Image
Viewer Notation	凵 ø8 ↧3	凵 ø8 ↧3
Viewer Notation	ø4 ↧15	ø4 THRU

1-Step HolesWhen adding hole depth tolerances

[mm]

Through/Blind	Blind
Precision	No
Image
Viewer Notation	凵 ø8 ↧3
Viewer Notation	Φ4↧15±0.1 (Flat bottom)

*If the upper or lower level is a precision/tapped hole, the value after the ↧ symbol indicates the effective depth.

2-Step Holes

[mm]

Through/Blind	Blind
Precision	No
Image
Viewer Notation	凵ø8↧3
	ø4 THRU
	(On the opposite side)凵ø8↧3

Countersunk Holes

[mm]

Through/Blind	Through
Image
Viewer notation	ø8.6, ø4.5

Straight holes　|
Auto-Quotable Accuracy Ranges |
Tapped holes |
Insert holes |
1-Step Holes |
2-Step Holes |
Countersunk holes |
Slotted holes |
Precision slotted holes |
Pockets

Straight Holes

Holes that are machined with drills or end mills that do not have a specified precision are referred to as “straight holes” on the cutting service. Tools used for machining have different auto-quotable machining depths.

The maximum value is included as an approximation.

The maximum value may vary depending on other quoted conditions such as shape and material. Thank you for your understanding.

Drill Machining

[mm]

Steel, Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel, Aluminum, Stainless Steel
Diameter	Machining Depth (Approximate)
1.0 ≤ Diameter ≤ 1.9	40
2.0 ≤ Diameter ≤ 3.2	150
3.3 ≤ Diameter ≤ 4.2	180
4.3 ≤ Diameter ≤ 6.9	200
7.0 ≤ Diameter ≤ 9.9	220
10 ≤ Diameter ≤ 20	300

[mm]

Resin
Diameter	Machining Depth (Approximate)
1.0 ≤ Diameter ≤ 1.9 (Increments of 0.1)	≤ Diameter * 10
2	≤ Diameter * 15
2.1 ≤ Diameter ≤ 3.0 (Increments of 0.1)	≤ Diameter * 14
3.1 ≤ Diameter ≤ 4.2 (Increments of 0.1)	≤ Diameter * 13
4.3 ≤ Diameter ≤ 5.7 (Increments of 0.1)	≤ Diameter * 12
5.8 ≤ Diameter ≤ 6.8 (Increments of 0.1)	≤ Diameter * 11
6.9 ≤ Diameter ≤ 9.7 (Increments of 0.1)	≤ Diameter * 10
9.8 ≤ Diameter ≤ 13 (Increments of 0.1)	≤ Diameter * 9

End Mill Machining

The machining depth of diameters without the drill is as follows:

[mm]

Steel, Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel
Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.999	3.5	≤10	9	11	≤40
3.5	4.5	≤12	11	13	≤50
4.5	6	≤16	13	17	≤60
6	7	≤20	17	21	≤80
7	9	≤30	21	No Restrictions	≤100

[mm]

Aluminum
Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.999	3.5	≤10	9	11	≤40
3.5	4.5	≤12	11	13	≤50
4.5	6	≤16	13	17	≤60
6	7	≤25	17	21	≤80
7	9	≤30	21	No Restrictions	≤100

[mm]

Stainless Steel
Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.999	3.5	≤10	9	11	≤32
3.5	4.5	≤12	11	13	≤40
4.5	6	≤16	13	17	≤48
6	7	≤20	17	21	≤64
7	9	≤24	21	No Restrictions	≤80

[mm]

Resin
Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.999	3.5	≤7.5	11	13	≤30
3.5	4.5	≤10	13	18	≤40
4.5	7	≤15	18	No Restrictions	≤60
7	11	≤20	–

[mm]

Polished flat bar (EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar), EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar))
Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.999	3.5	≤14	9	11	≤34
3.5	4.5	≤17	11	13	≤44
4.5	6	≤19	13	17	≤54
6	7	≤22	17	21	≤64
7	9	≤24	21	No Restrictions	≤74

Example: Drilling a straight hole with a diameter of 12.9 in EN 1.0038 equiv.
The tool to be used is a drill and the machining depth is up to 200 mm.
Example 2: Drilling a straight hole with a diameter of 13.1 in EN 1.0038 equiv.
The tool to be used is an end mill and the machining depth is up to 48 mm.

Auto-Quotable Accuracy Ranges

A straight hole can be changed to a precision hole by setting the “Hole Diameter Tolerance Type.” By changing to a precision hole, the accuracy and effective depth for the diameter can be specified.

End Mill Machining

[mm]

Diameter		Accuracy Ranges
>	≤	Fit Tolerance	Bidirectional Tolerance Minimum Value	Unidirectional Tolerance Minimum Value (Range)
–	3	Grade IT7 or higher	0.005	0.01
3	6		0.006	0.012
6	10		0.008	0.015
10	18		0.009	0.018
18	30		0.011	0.021
30	50		0.013	0.025
50	80		0.015	0.03
80	120		0.018	0.035
120	180		0.02	0.04
180	250		0.023	0.046
250	315		0.026	0.052
315	400		0.029	0.057
400	500		0.032	0.063

Auto-Quotable Effective Depths

[mm]

Steel, Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel
Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.999	3.5	≤10	9	11	≤40
3.5	4.5	≤12	11	13	≤50
4.5	6	≤16	13	17	≤60
6	7	≤20	17	21	≤80
7	9	≤30	21	No Restrictions	≤100

[mm]

Aluminum
Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.999	3.5	≤10	9	11	≤40
3.5	4.5	≤12	11	13	≤50
4.5	6	≤16	13	17	≤60
6	7	≤25	17	21	≤80
7	9	≤30	21	No Restrictions	≤100

[mm]

Stainless Steel
Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.999	3.5	≤10	9	11	≤32
3.5	4.5	≤12	11	13	≤40
4.5	6	≤16	13	17	≤48
6	7	≤20	17	21	≤64
7	9	≤24	21	No Restrictions	≤80

[mm]

Resin
Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.999	3.5	≤5	11	13	≤20
3.5	4.5	≤6	13	18	≤24
4.5	7	≤8	18	21	≤36
7	10	≤12	21	No Restrictions	≤40
10	11	≤16	–

[mm]

Polished flat bar (EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar), EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar))
Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Diameter		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.999	3.5	≦7	9	11	≦31
3.5	4.5	≦11	11	13	≦39
4.5	6	≦15	13	17	≦47
6	7	≦19	17	21	≦63
7	9	≦23	21	No Restrictions	≦73

The auto-quotable effective depths are different due to reamer machining when fit tolerance is H7 for the following diameters.

[mm]

Diameters Using Reamer	Effective Depth (Approximate)
Diameters Using Reamer	EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.1191 equiv. EN 1.1206 equiv.	Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel	EN 1.0038 equiv.　(annealed material)	Stainless Steel	Aluminum	Resin	Polished flat bar (EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar), EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar))

2	≤ Diameter * 10	≤ Diameter * 9	≤ Diameter * 6	≤ Diameter * 9	≤ Diameter * 10	≤ Diameter * 12	≤ Diameter * 6
3		≤ Diameter * 9	≤ Diameter * 8	≤ Diameter * 9		≤ Diameter * 12	≤ Diameter * 8
4		≤ Diameter * 10	≤ Diameter * 10	≤ Diameter * 8		≤ Diameter * 10	≤ Diameter * 10
5				≤ Diameter * 10		≤ Diameter * 15
6						≤ Diameter * 8
7						≤ Diameter * 6
8/9						≤ Diameter * 5
10/11				≤100		≤ Diameter * 5
12/13
14/15/16	≤ Diameter * 9	≤ Diameter * 9	≤ Diameter * 9				≤ Diameter * 9
17/18/19/20	≤ Diameter * 8	≤ Diameter * 8	≤ Diameter * 8				≤ Diameter * 8

Tapped Holes

The available tap sizes and specifiable effective depths for the cutting service are as follows.

If the tap flute is shallow, it may not be possible to secure 2 threads due to the head shape and point cut of the tool. To secure the fastening force, please set 3 or more threads.

Quotable Tap Effective Depths

[mm]

Tap Diameter	Pitch	Coarse	Fine	Effective Depth (Approximate)

Tap Diameter	Pitch	Coarse	Fine	Steel (except EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material)), Aluminum, Stainless Steel	EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material)	Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel	Resin	Polished flat bar (EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar), EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar))

M2	0.25		✓	≤ Tap Diameter * 5	≤ Tap Diameter * 3	≤ Tap Diameter * 4	≤ Tap Diameter * 6	≤ Tap Diameter * 2
M2	0.4	✓			≤ Tap Diameter * 3		≤ Tap Diameter * 6
M2.5	0.35		✓		≤ Tap Diameter * 3		≤ Tap Diameter * 5
M2.5	0.45	✓			≤ Tap Diameter * 3		≤ Tap Diameter * 5
M3	0.35		✓		≤ Tap Diameter * 4	≤ Tap Diameter * 5	≤ Tap Diameter * 4	≤ Tap Diameter * 3
M3	0.5	✓			≤ Tap Diameter * 4		≤ Tap Diameter * 5
M4	0.5		✓		≤ Tap Diameter * 5		≤ Tap Diameter * 4
M4	0.7	✓					≤ Tap Diameter * 5
M5	0.5		✓				≤ Tap Diameter * 4
M5	0.8	✓					≤ Tap Diameter * 5
M6	0.75		✓				≤ Tap Diameter * 4
M6	1	✓					≤ Tap Diameter * 5
M8	0.75		✓				≤ Tap Diameter * 4
	1		✓				≤ Tap Diameter * 4
	1.25	✓					≤ Tap Diameter * 5
M10	0.75		✓				≤ Tap Diameter * 4
	1		✓
	1.25		✓
	1.5	✓					≤ Tap Diameter * 5
M12	1		✓				≤ Tap Diameter * 4
	1.25		✓
	1.5		✓
	1.75	✓					≤ Tap Diameter * 4
M14	1		✓				≤ Tap Diameter * 3
	1.25		✓
	1.5		✓
	2	✓					≤ Tap Diameter * 2
M16	1		✓				≤ Tap Diameter * 3
	1.5		✓
	2	✓

Quotable Tap Effective Depths

[mm]


Tap Diameter	Coarse	Fine	Effective Depth (Approximate)
Tap Diameter	Coarse	Fine	Steel (except EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material)), Aluminum, Stainless Steel	EN 1.0038 equiv. (annealed material)	Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel	Resin	Polished flat bar (EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar), EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar))

No.4-40	✓		≤ Tap Diameter * 3	－	－	－	－
No.6-32	✓
No.8-32	✓
No.10-24	✓
No.10-32		✓
1/4-20	✓
1/4-28		✓
5/16-18	✓
3/8-16		✓
3/8-24	✓
1/2-13	✓
5/8-11	✓

Insert Holes

The available insert sizes and specifiable effective depths for the cutting service are as follows.

Quotable Sizes

[mm]

Tap Diameter	Pitch	Coarse	Nominal length (Aluminum and resin)	Polished flat bar (EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar), EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar))
M2	0.4	✓	0.5D, 1D, 1.5D, 2D	1D,1.5D,2D
M2.5	0.45	✓	0.5D, 1D, 1.5D, 2D	1D,1.5D,2D
M3	0.5	✓	0.5D, 1D, 1.5D, 2D	1D,1.5D,2D
M4	0.7	✓	0.5D, 1D, 1.5D, 2D	1D,1.5D,2D
M5	0.8	✓	0.5D, 1D, 1.5D, 2D	1D,1.5D,2D
M6	1	✓	0.5D, 1D, 1.5D, 2D	1D,1.5D,2D
M8	1.25	✓	0.5D, 1D, 1.5D, 2D	1D,1.5D,2D
M10	1.5	✓	0.5D, 1D, 1.5D, 2D	1D,1.5D,2D
M12	1.75	✓	0.5D, 1D, 1.5D, 2D	1D,1.5D,2D

1-Step Holes

For 1-step holes, the upper and lower step can be different combinations of hole and diameter tolerance types. The precision and standards for tapped and precision holes are described above. *Insert holes can also be selected wherever tap holes are selectable. (Only for aluminum and resin)

Upper Step	Straight hole	Straight hole	Straight hole	Precision hole	Precision hole	Precision hole	Tapped hole	Tapped hole
Lower Step	Straight hole	Precision hole	Tapped hole	Straight hole	Precision hole	Tapped hole	Straight hole	Tapped pilot hole

*When the upper step is a tapped hole, a cone shape at the border between the upper and lower steps may occur while machining the pilot hole.

2-Step Holes

For 2-step holes, the upper, middle and lower step can be different combinations of hole diameter tolerance types and hole types. The precision and standards for tapped and precision holes are described above.
*Insert holes can also be selected wherever tap holes are selectable. (Only for aluminum and resin)

Upper Step	Straight hole	Straight hole	Straight hole	Straight hole	Straight hole	Straight hole	Straight hole
Middle Step	Straight hole	Straight hole	Straight hole	Precision hole	Precision hole	Tapped hole	Tapped hole
Lower Step	Straight hole	Precision hole	Tapped hole	Precision hole	Straight hole	Precision hole	Straight hole

Upper Step	Straight hole	Tapped hole	Tapped hole	Tapped hole	Tapped hole	Tapped hole	Tapped hole	Precision hole
Middle Step	Tapped pilot hole	Straight hole	Straight hole	Straight hole	Tapped pilot hole	Tapped pilot hole	Tapped pilot hole	Straight hole
Lower Step	Tapped hole	Straight hole	Precision hole	Tapped hole	Straight hole	Precision hole	Tapped hole	Straight hole

Upper Step	Precision hole	Precision hole	Precision hole	Precision hole	Precision hole	Precision hole	Precision hole
Middle Step	Straight hole	Straight hole	Precision hole	Precision hole	Tapped hole	Tapped hole	Tapped pilot hole
Lower Step	Precision hole	Tapped hole	Precision hole	Straight hole	Precision hole	Straight hole	Tapped hole

*When the upper or lower step is a tapped hole, a cone shape at the border between it and the middle step may occur while machining the pilot hole.

Countersunk Holes

Countersunk holes are machined as per the model.

Slotted Holes

The auto-quotable machining depth varies depending on the width.

Auto-Quotable Effective Depths

[mm]

Steel, Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel
Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤10	8	10	≤40
3	4	≤12	10	12	≤50
4	5	≤16	12	16	≤60
5	6	≤20	16	20	≤80
6	8	≤30	20	No Restrictions	≤100

[mm]

Aluminum
Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤12.5	8	10	≤40
3	4	≤15	10	12	≤50
4	5	≤20	12	16	≤60
5	6	≤25	16	20	≤80
6	8	≤30	20	No Restrictions	≤100

[mm]

Stainless Steel
Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤10	8	10	≤32
3	4	≤12	10	12	≤40
4	5	≤16	12	16	≤48
5	6	≤20	16	20	≤64
6	8	≤24	20	No Restrictions	≤80

[mm]

Resin
Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤7.5	10	12	≤30
3	4	≤10	12	18	≤40
4	6	≤15	18	No Restrictions	≤60
6	10	≤20	–

[mm]

Polished flat bar (EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar), EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar))
Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤14	8	10	≤34
3	4	≤17	10	12	≤44
4	5	≤19	12	16	≤54
5	6	≤22	16	20	≤64
6	8	≤24	20	No Restrictions	≤74

Precision Slotted Holes

A slotted hole can be changed to a precision slotted hole by setting the “Hole Diameter Tolerance Type.” You can specify precision for pitch direction of precision slotted holes within the following ranges. Effective depth tolerance is the model depth,

regardless of pitch.

Precision Ranges that can be Specified

[mm]

Width		Accuracy Ranges
>	≤	Fit Tolerance	Minimum Bidirectional Tolerance	Minimum Unidirectional Tolerance Range
–	3	Grade IT7 or higher	0.005	0.01
3	6		0.006	0.012
6	10		0.008	0.015
10	18		0.009	0.018
18	30		0.011	0.021
30	50		0.013	0.025
50	80		0.015	0.03
80	120		0.018	0.035
120	180		0.02	0.04
180	250		0.023	0.046
250	315		0.026	0.052
315	400		0.029	0.057
400	500		0.032	0.063

Auto-Quotable Effective Depths

[mm]

Steel, Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel
Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)	Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤10	8	10	≤40
3	4	≤12	10	12	≤50
4	5	≤16	12	16	≤60
5	6	≤20	16	20	≤80
6	8	≤30	20	No Restrictions	≤100

[mm]

Aluminum
Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)	Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤12.5	8	10	≤40
3	4	≤15	10	12	≤50
4	5	≤20	12	16	≤60
5	6	≤25	16	20	≤80
6	8	≤30	20	No Restrictions	≤100

[mm]

Stainless Steel
Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)	Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤10	8	10	≤32
3	4	≤12	10	12	≤40
4	5	≤16	12	16	≤48
5	6	≤20	16	20	≤64
6	8	≤24	20	No Restrictions	≤80

[mm]

Resin
Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)	Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤5	10	12	≤20
3	4	≤6	12	16	≤24
4	6	≤8	16	18	≤32
6	8	≤12	18	20	≤36
8	10	≤16	20	No Restrictions	≤40

[mm]

Polished flat bar (EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar), EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar))
Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)	Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤7	8	10	≤31
3	4	≤11	10	12	≤39
4	5	≤15	12	16	≤47
5	6	≤19	16	20	≤63
6	8	≤23	20	No Restrictions	≤73

Pockets

All machining points that do not fall under the category of holes or slotted holes are classified as pockets.
Pockets also have an auto-quote range for width, depth and R size (if any).
For shapes with a chamfer of C15 or less that can be machined with a chamfer cutter, there is no depth limit.

Pocket Width/Depth Compatibility Table

[mm]

Steel, Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel
Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤10	8	10	≤40
3	4	≤12	10	12	≤50
4	5	≤16	12	16	≤60
5	6	≤20	16	20	≤80
6	8	≤30	20	No Restrictions	≤100

[mm]

Aluminum
Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤12.5	8	10	≤40
3	4	≤15	10	12	≤50
4	5	≤20	12	16	≤60
5	6	≤25	16	20	≤80
6	8	≤30	20	No Restrictions	≤100

[mm]

Stainless Steel
Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)	Width		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤10	8	10	≤32
3	4	≤12	10	12	≤40
4	5	≤16	12	16	≤48
5	6	≤20	16	20	≤64
6	8	≤24	20	No Restrictions	≤80

[mm]

Resin
Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)	Width		Effective Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Effective Depth (Approximate)
2.5	3	≤7.5	10	12	≤30
3	4	≤10	12	18	≤40
4	6	≤15	18	No Restrictions	≤60
6	10	≤20

Pocket R/Height Compatibility Table

[mm]

Steel, Pre-Hardened Steel & Tool Steel
R		Machining Depth (Approximate)	R		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
0.74	1.5	≤15	5	6	≤50
1.5	3	≤20	6	8	≤60
3	4	≤30	8	10	≤80
4	5	≤40	10	No Restrictions	≤100

[mm]

Aluminum
R		Machining Depth (Approximate)	R		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
0.74	1.5	≤15	5	6	≤50
1.5	3	≤20	6	8	≤60
3	4	≤30	8	10	≤80
4	5	≤40	10	No Restrictions	≤150

[mm]

Stainless Steel
R		Machining Depth (Approximate)	R		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
0.74	1.5	≤15	5	6	≤40
1.5	3	≤20	6	8	≤48
3	4	≤24	8	10	≤64
4	5	≤32	10	No Restrictions	≤80

[mm]

Resin
R		Machining Depth (Approximate)	R		Machining Depth (Approximate)
>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)	>	≤	Machining Depth (Approximate)
1.249	1.5	≤7.5	5	6	≤30
1.5	2	≤10	6	10	≤40
2	3	≤15	10	No Restrictions	≤50
3	5	≤20

Dimensional value decimal places are rounded and displayed as follows:

The dimension values displayed in the 3D viewer are the target values for machining.

Dimensional Value	Precision	Description

External Dimensions, Additional Dimensions (No Tolerance)	0.00	External dimensions, modeled at 11.4567, with no tolerance setting ⇒ 11.46
Holes (excluding precision holes) Slotted holes (excluding precision holes)	0.0	Slotted hole, modeled at 11.456, with no tolerance setting ⇒ 11.5
With tolerance setting: 1 decimal place Target: External dimensions, additional dimensions, precision holes, precision slotted holes	0.01	Precision hole, modeled at 11.4567 with tolerance ±0.1 ⇒ 11.46
With tolerance setting: 2 decimal places Target: External dimensions, additional dimensions, precision holes, precision slotted holes	0.00	Precision slotted hole, modeled at 11.4567 with tolerance ±0.05 ⇒ 10.46
With tolerance setting: 3 decimal places Target: External dimensions, additional dimensions, precision holes, precision slotted holes	0.000	Precision slotted hole, modeled at 11.4567 with tolerance H7 ⇒ 11.457

Maximum part size and supported material

300mm x 300mm (if the engraving is on the TOP/BOTTOM side)
200mm x 200mm (if the engraving is on the FRONT/BACK side)
200mm x 200mm (if the engraving is on the LEFT/RIGHT side)

* Please see the table below for materials and surface treatment.

Classification	Material	Surface Treatment
Steel	EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.0038 equiv. (Annealed Material) EN 1.1191 equiv. EN 1.1206 equiv. EN 1.1206 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 20-34HRC)	No treatment Electroless Nickel Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating) Trivalent Chromate (Clear) Trivalent Chromate (Black)
Pre-Hardened Steel	NAK55 equiv.	No treatment Electroless Nickel Plating Hard Chrome Plating(Flash Plating) Trivalent Chromate (Clear) Trivalent chromate (Black)
Tool Steel	DC53 ® (Daido)・EN 1.1545 equiv.・EN 1.2510 equiv.・EN 1.2379 equiv.	No treatment
		Electroless Nickel
		Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)
Aluminum	EN AW−2017 equiv. EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW−5083 equiv. EN AW−6061 equiv. EN AW−7075 equiv.	No treatment Clear Anodized Black Anodized Electroless Nickel
Stainless Steel	EN 1.4305 equiv. EN 1.4301 equiv. EN 1.4401 equiv. EN 1.4404 Equiv. EN 1.4016 equiv.	No treatment Passivation
Copper & Brass	EN CW004A equiv. (Oxygen-free)	No treatment
	EN CW008A equiv. (ETP)
	Brass EN CW509L equiv. (Yellow)

*For surface-treated products, the engraving process is carried out “after” surface treatment.

Processing method

“Engraving is done either by “laser cutting” or “machining”.
*You cannot specify the engraving process
*Surface-treated products will be engraved in the following order.
- Laser cutting: After surface treatment
- Machining: Before surface treatment

Possible locations for setting engraving

The engraving instructions can be given on TOP, BOTTOM, FRONT, BACK, LEFT, and RIGHT surfaces (flat surfaces). *Pocket flat surfaces with a depth of 15 mm or less are also available for engraving.

Available number of engraving settings

Several engraving instructions are available for different surfaces.

Character Specifications

Half-width alphanumeric characters and some symbols (+-. #$%&()=*:? /_~) can be freely entered.
*Line feed and space input are also supported.

Character size	3-15mm（Can be specified with 1 mm pitch）
Character size	17.5-30mm（Can be specified with 2.5 mm pitch）

*Font (font, spacing) and line spacing cannot be specified.

*The letter size of the engraving are only reference values. DimSensional accuracy is not guaranteed.

The size definition of the engraved characters is as follows.

i.e., When specifying a font size of 10mm

Angle description

The angle can be specified in 45 degree steps (0 to 360 degrees).
　*The angle is only a rough standard value. Angle accuracy is not guaranteed.

Shipping Days

Normal delivery time (11 days-), long delivery time service (25 days-).
*There is no additional delivery date due to engraving.

Quality Control

Quality precautions for engraving
1. Burrs and burn marks may occur on the engraving area.
2. Some characters may be smashed if a 3 to 5 mm engraving character size is specified.
3. Depending on the material and surface treatment, there is a possibility that the engraving characters may become blurred.
4 The letter size and angle of the engraving are only reference values. DimSensional accuracy is not guaranteed.
5. Depending on the content of the characters, there may be cases where the size differs from the specified size
6. Depending on the total length of the engraving, there is a possibility of discrepancies in letter spacing and height (ref.: 90 mm or more).

Information on engraving quality can be found on the following page

External Appearance Quality Control Range

Milling Face

EN 1.0038 equiv.	EN AW−5052 equiv.	EN 1.4301 equiv.
Untreated surface

EN 1.0038 equiv.	EN AW−5052 equiv.	EN 1.4301 equiv.

No hooks and a dot gauge guarantee of scratches of 0.7 mm or smaller.
Surface roughness: √Ra6.3 or 3.2 [√Rz25 or 12.5]

The surface roughness value conforms to the value set by the user.
Depending on the material and size, the product may be shipped with an untreated surface (polishing and rolling).

Surface Treatment

Suspension method image	Surface treatment suspension and electrode contact marks

	Anodized aluminum (black)	Anodized aluminum(clear)

Since film thickness management is difficult for small diameter precision holes, etc., additional machining may be carried out after processing, and as a result, the surface treatment may not remain on the cutting surface.
Suspension marks and electrode contact marks from surface treatment may remain on the product.
The color of the surface-treated product is not guaranteed.
The exact color spec cannot be specified using Munsell or RAL values.
Color may very, even among products with the same material and surface treatment.

Example of Red anodizing

Example of Gold anodizing

Please refer to the pictures on the left for the color of Red and Gold anodized products.

Inspection Item

Inspections are Carried Out at Each Work Stage and Before Shipment

Dimensional tolerance inspection

Using a micrometer

Fit tolerance inspection

Using a limit plug gauge

Geometric tolerance inspection

Measurement method: Measure at multiple points using a dial gauge, feeler gauge, height gauge, etc. on a surface plate.
*Specifying the measurement method or providing an inspection certificate is not available.

Screw inspection, etc.

ISO2-grade (JIS B 2025) equivalent Bolts pass through in principle.

Appearance inspection

Inspection with roughness standard specimen,dot gauge,and roughness tester.

Surface Roughness Inspection

Inspection with roughness measuring instruments and surface roughness comparators

For surfaces for which no roughness has been specified, a check is made to ensure that the value is within the general tolerance range. For surfaces with specified roughness, a check is made to ensure that the roughness is within the surface roughness range. If the specified value is Ra0.8 or Rz 3.2 or less, test measurements are taken at two or three points with a test length of 5 mm.

Angular Tolerance Inspection

Using an angle gauge

Dimensional Assurance Range

Corner chamfering

For sharp corners (C0.5 mm and smaller), the external corner chamfer tolerance is C0.1 mm to 0.5 mm, and the internal corner radius tolerance is R0.5 mm or less.

Chamfering unspecified hole entrances

Entrance chamfer is 0.1 to 0.5 mm or less.

Ensure the specified geometric tolerances

Specified values are guaranteed per 100 mm.
i.e., If a flatness of 0.05/100mm is specified

– The geometric tolerances for a 100 x 100 plot surface area is considered above

Quality inspection during engraving

Processing method

“Engraving is done either by “laser cutting” or “machining”.
*The processing method cannot be specified

Quality precautions for engraving

1. There may be burrs or burns on the engraved area.
2. If the font size is 3-5mm, depending on the characters, there may be insufficient space between the characters or the characters may be crushed.
3. Depending on the material and surface treatment, the finish of the engraving may be lighter.
4. The “font size and angle” on the engraving are approximate values. Dimensional accuracy is not guaranteed.
5. Depending on the text content, the size may differ from the specified size.
6. Depending on the total length of the engraving, discrepancies in character spacing and height may occur (guideline: length 90mm or more)

Example of engraved surface

No surface treatment

Laser engraving
（Material：EN 1.4301 equiv.）

Engraving by machine
（Material：EN 1.4301 equiv.）

With surface treatment

Laser engraving
（Material：EN AW−5052 equiv.）
*Black anodize

Engraving by machine
（Material：EN AW−5052 equiv.）
*Clear anodize

Quenching Quality Standards

About hardening quality assurance

The hardness value specified is guaranteed and will be measured and confirmed before shipping.

Material:EN 1.2379 equiv., Surface Treatment:Electroless nickel

Material:EN 1.1206 equiv., Surface Treatment:Electroless nickel

Finish without grinding

Material:EN 1.1206 equiv., Surface Treatment:Electroless nickel

Finish with grinding

Inspection marks

Caution

The hardened depth and distribution of heat treated areas may vary depending on the thickness and shape of the material.
When parts are heat treated, the outer surface tends to be harder, while the inner areas tend to remain softer. During inspection the hardening will be confirmed to be uniform on average.
The surface can be cleaned by sandblasting after hardening. The accuracy is not reduced by this process. The blasting method cannot be specified.
Grinding may be performed during the finishing process.
Grinding cannot be specified. Whether to grind is decided in the factory under the aspect of quality assurance.
Hardness measurement marks may remain in areas. To confirm the inspection points in advance, please add information in the comments and request a manual quote.

Packaging

Interior		Exterior
Product packaging	Simple 2D diagram	Multiple	Single

Includes simple 2D diagrams 2 layers of bubble wrap around each side The product label will be affixed to the outside before sending.		Sent in a box or bubble wrap bag.

Depending on the size or quantity, it will be a long and heavy item, so it may be delivered separately on a pallet. In that case, the customer needs to receive the cargo with a forklift and dispose of the pallet. In addition, we do not ship high-weight items overseas.

pallet + Stretch Film

pallet + Rolled corrugated cardboard

Turning Parts is a machining service that supports not only lathe machining for inner and outer diameter machining, groove machining and threading, but also supports machining and wire cutting for shapes that require additional machining .
The applicable shapes are as follows. The range of supported shapes will be expanded soon.

Tip

For shapes not supported for automatic quotation, a manual quotation can be provided. Please do not hesitate to contact us.
*Economy Shipping cannot be selected for manual quotations.

Outer Diameter Machining

Inner Diameter Machining

Groove Outer Diameter

V-groove

tapered groove

radius (R) groove

Negative groove

Groove Inner Diameter

Internal Thread*

External Thread*

Hole

External Keyway

Internal Keyway

Notch (Pocket)

*Thread shapes are not recognized.

Click here for how to set up External Thread.

Click here for how to set up Internal Thread.

Click here for how to set up Hole.

Points to note

End Face Groove*

Outermost crown diameter

Outer-most taper diameter

Hexagon

Hexagonal Hole

Internal tapered pipe thread*

External tapered pipe thread*

*The bottom curve is provided by manual quotation.

Points to note

*Parts with modeled in threads cannot be recognized.

*Angle for tapered shapes that can be recognized is between 0° and 2.5°.

Caution

Depending on the exact shape or dimensions, it may not be possible to machine the above shapes.

In the recognition of meviy, there are instances where automatic quoting is successful, and we may be prompted to discuss shape changes after placing an order for shapes falling under the categories below.

Gear shape

Eccentric

Set Collar

Oblique Hole

Knurling

Blind Internal Keyway

V-Groove (end faces)

Curved Shape of Side Pocket Opening

Curved Shape on Bottom of End Face Groove

Conical tip

Pipe Welding

Welding

T-grooves

Undercut

Free-form surface

Continuous convex R

Sphere

Engraving

The following materials,surface treatment,heat treatment and size are applicable.
*For information on tolerance restrictions for certain materials and surface treatments, please see page “ Specifiable Dimensional Tolerances“

Material and Surface Treatment

	Material		Surface Treatment	Standard
	Material		Surface Treatment	Standard	Economy	Express	Rapid
Steel	EN 1.1191 equiv. EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.7220 equiv. EN 1.7220 equiv. (26 to 32 HRC) EN 1.2510 equiv. EN 1.2379 equiv. EN 1.2344 equiv. EN 1.3505 equiv.		No treatment Black oxide Electroless nickel Hard chrome plating(Flash Plating) Trivalent chromate (Clear) Trivalent chromate (Black) LTBC- surface treatment Salt bath nitriding Phosphating (Manganese)	✓	✓	ー	ー

*Phosphating (Manganese) is not available for EN 1.2379 equiv. and EN 1.2344 equiv.

	Material		Surface Treatment	Standard
	Material		Surface Treatment	Standard	Economy	Express	Rapid
Aluminum	EN AW−2017 equiv. EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW−5056 equiv. EN AW−6061 equiv. EN AW−7075 equiv.		No treatment Black anodize Black anodize (Matt) Clear anodize Hard anodize (Clear)	✓	✓	ー	ー

	Material		Surface Treatment	Standard
	Material		Surface Treatment	Standard	Economy	Express	Rapid
Stainless Steel	EN 1.4305 equiv. EN 1.4301 equiv. EN 1.4401 equiv. EN 1.4404 equiv. EN 1.4125 equiv.		No treatment	✓	✓	ー	ー

*Passivation is currently only available for Manual quotation. EN 1.4125 equiv. is not available with passivation.

	Material		Surface Treatment	Standard
	Material		Surface Treatment	Standard	Economy	Express	Rapid
Copper	EN CW614N equiv.		No treatment	✓	✓	ー	ー

Caution

Since brass products have the following characteristics, please be careful how to handle them after delivery.

Fragile
Due to low moisture resistance, there is a susceptibility to discoloration and rusting
Discoloration due to sweat on direct contact with the hand

	Material		Surface Treatment	Standard
	Material		Surface Treatment	Standard	Economy	Express	Rapid
Resin	POM (Acetal, Standard, white) POM (Acetal, Standard, black) MC Nylon (Standard, blue) MC Nylon (Weather resistance, black ash) MC Nylon (Conductive, black) MC Nylon (Anti-static, black) ABS (Standard, black) ABS (Standard, natural color) PC (Standard, transparent) PC (Standard, black) PP (Standard, natural color) Flourine (PTFE, Standard, white) PEEK (Standard, grey-brown) PPS (Standard, natural color) * Acrylic (Standard, transparent) UHMWPE (Standard, white) PVC (Standard, grey)		No treatment	✓	✓	ー	ー

*Glass fiber is not filled.

Heat Treatment

The blue area in the table below is the applicable combination of Material and Heat treatment type.

Hardness by material

Material	Through Hardening						Surface Hardening
	Conventional Hardening			Vacuum Quenching			Induction Hardening
	Standard Hardness (HRC)	Selectable Hardness (HRC)	Upper limit of minimum hardness specification (HRC)*	Standard Hardness (HRC)	Selectable Hardness (HRC)	Upper limit of minimum hardness specification (HRC)*	Standard Hardness (HRC)	Selectable Hardness (HRC)	Upper limit of minimum hardness specification (HRC)*

EN AW−5052 equiv.
EN 1.1191 equiv.	40-45	30-45	～40	40-45	30-45	～40	52-58	Not supported
EN 1.0038 equiv	Not supported
EN 1.7220 equiv.	35-40	30-45	～40	35-40	30-45	～40	52-58	Not supported
EN 1.7220 equiv. (26 to 32 HRC)	50-55	30-55	～50	50-55	30-55	～50	52-58
EN 1.2510 equiv.	58-63	40-63	～58	58-63	40-63	～58	58-63
EN 1.2379 equiv.	58-63	50-63	～58	58-63	50-63	～58	Not supported
EN 1.2344 equiv.	50-55	40-55	～50	50-55	40-55	～50	Not supported
EN 1.3505 equiv.	58-63	35-63	～58	58-63	35-63	～58	57-63	Not supported
EN AW−2017 equiv.	Not supported
EN AW−5056 equiv.
EN AW−6061 equiv.
EN AW−7075 equiv.
EN 1.4305 equiv.
EN 1.4301 equiv.
EN 1.4401 equiv.
EN 1.4404 equiv.
EN 1.4125 equiv.	58-63	45-63	～58	55-60	45-63	～58	Not supported
EN CW614N equiv.	Not supported

*Hardness (HRC) is guaranteed to be above the minimum specified hardness value.
*About 5 mm around the specified range will be hardened due to the characteristics of Induction Hardening.

Size	Outer Diameter (D)	Full Length (L)
Thorough Hardening	2≦D≦300	3≦L≦300
Surface Hardening	6≦D≦300	5≦L≦300

(Reference) Surface hardness after Salt bath nitriding

Material	Salt bath nitriding
EN 1.1191 equiv.	HRC45.3～57.8
EN 1.7220 equiv.	HRC52.3～65.6
EN 1.0038 equiv.	HRC52.3～65.6
EN 1.2510 equiv.	HRC52.3～65.6
EN 1.2379 equiv.	HRC67.0～72.7
EN 1.2344 equiv.	HRC67.0～71.5
EN 1.3505 equiv.	HRC52.3～65.6

Size

The blue area in the table below is applicable range.

Delivery time varies depending on the shape.

Material
Steel・Stainless Steel
EN 1.1191 equiv. EN 1.0038 equiv. EN 1.7220 equiv. From ø10 EN 1.7220 equiv. (26 to 32 HRC) EN 1.2510 equiv. EN 1.2379 equiv. EN 1.2344 equiv. From ø10 EN 1.3505 equiv. EN 1.4305 equiv. EN 1.4301 equiv. EN 1.4401 equiv. EN 1.4404 equiv. EN 1.4125 equiv.

		Full Length (L)
		2≦L<10	10≦L≦50	50<L≦100	100<L≦130	130<L≦150	150<L≦200	200<L≦250	250<L≦300	300<L≦500	500<L≦1000	1000<L≦1500
Outer Diameter (D)	3≦D≦10
	10<D≦20									*	*	*
	20<D≦50									*	*	*
	50<D≦100
	100<D≦140
	140<D≦200							*	*
	200<D≦250
	250<D≦300
	300<D≦500

*If the total length exceeds 300mm, the material size must be a “standard material” to be available for Automatic quotation.
→HELP>Technical Information>CNC Turning>Accuracy and Machining Specifications>Accuracy and Machining Specifications>Standard material correspondence table

Material
Aluminum
EN AW−2017 equiv. EN AW−5052 equiv. EN AW−5056 equiv. EN AW−6061 equiv. EN AW−7075 equiv.

		Full Length (L)
		2≦L<10	10≦L≦50	50<L≦100	100<L≦130	130<L≦150	150<L≦200	200<L≦250	250<L≦300	300<L≦500	500<L≦1000
Outer Diameter (D)	3≦D≦10
	10<D≦20
	20<D≦50
	50<D≦75

Material
Copper
EN CW614N equiv.

		Full Length (L)
		2≦L<10	10≦L≦50	50<L≦100	100<L≦130	130<L≦150	150<L≦200	200<
Outer Diameter (D)	3≦D≦10
	10<D≦20
	20<D≦50
	50<D≦100
	100<D≦150
	150<

Material
Resin①
POM (Acetal, Standard, white) POM (Acetal, Standard, black) MC Nylon (Standard, blue) MC Nylon (Weather resistance, black ash) ABS (Standard, natural color) ABS (Standard, black) PP (Standard, natural color)

		Overall Length (L)
		1≦L<2	2≦L<10	10≦L≦50	50<L≦100	100<L≦130	130<L≦150	150<L≦200	200<L≦250	250<L≦300	300<L≦500	500<L≦1000
Outer Diameter (D)	3≦D≦10
	10<D≦20
	20<D≦50
	50<D≦100
	100<D≦150
	150<D≦200
	200<D≦250
	250<D≦300
	300<D≦500

Material
Resin②
PC (Standard, transparent) PC (Standard, black) PEEK (Standard, grey-brown)

		Overall Length (L)
		1≦L<2	2≦L<10	10≦L≦50	50<L≦100	100<L≦130	130<L≦150	150<L≦200	200<L≦250	250<L≦300	300<L≦500	500<L≦1000
Outer Diameter (D)	3≦D≦10
	10<D≦20
	20<D≦50
	50<D≦100
	100<D≦150
	150<D≦200
	200<D≦250
	250<D≦300
	300<D≦500

Material
Resin③
PPS (Standard, natural color) UHMWPE (Standard, white)

		Overall Length (L)
		1≦L<2	2≦L<10	10≦L≦50	50<L≦100	100<L≦130	130<L≦150	150<L≦200
Outer Diameter (D)	3≦D≦10
	10<D≦20
	20<D≦50
	50<D≦100
	100<D≦200			Up to L20

Material
Resin④
Acrylic (Standard, transparent) Up to ø80 PVC (Standard, grey)

		Overall Length (L)
		1≦L<2	2≦L<10	10≦L≦50	50<L≦100	100<L≦130	130<L≦150	150<L≦200
Outer Diameter (D)	3≦D≦10
	10<D≦20
	20<D≦50
	50<D≦100

Material
Resin⑤
Flourine (PTFE, Standard, white)

		Overall Length (L)
		1≦L<2	2≦L<10	10≦L≦50	50<L≦100	100<L≦130	130<L≦150	150<L≦200
Outer Diameter (D)	3≦D≦10
	10<D≦20
	20<D≦50
	50<D≦100

Material
Resin⑥
MC Nylon (Conductive, black)

		Overall Length (L)
		1≦L<2	2≦L<10	10≦L≦50	50<L≦100	100<L≦130	130<L≦150	150<L≦200
Outer Diameter (D)	3≦D≦10
	10<D≦20
	20<D≦50
	50<D≦100
	100<D≦150			Up to L30

Material
Resin⑦
MC Nylon (Anti-static, black)

		Overall Length (L)
		1≦L<2	2≦L<10	10≦L≦50	50<L≦100	100<L≦130	130<L≦150	150<L≦200
Outer Diameter (D)	3≦D≦10
	10<D≦20
	20<D≦50

The materials and surface treatments supported by each delivery service vary. Please check here for details.

List of delivery options

Product lineup	Options	Definition				End of part number	Order Closing time
Product lineup	Options	Standard	Merit	Shipping days	Applicable Product (compared to Standard Shipping)	End of part number	Order Closing time
Standard	Rapid	Conforms to JIS standards	－	－	－	－	－
	Express		－	－	－	－	－
	Standard		－	10days-	－	－	12:00
	Economy		Same quality at a low price with a long lead time	24days-	All products	-L	12:00

*The standard lead time for this delivery option example is standard lead time length (8 days) + surface treatment (2 days) = 10 days.
→CNC Turning > Applicable Parts/Materials >Delivery options by material and finish

Steel
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
Copper & Brass
Resin

Material Standards and Materials Used

Steel

Material Features

Material	Features
EN 1.0038 equiv.	This is a rolled steel material for general structural use, widely used in Japan. Its name derives from its tensile strength of 400 N/mm² or higher. It is cost-effective and easy to process, making it suitable for a wide range of applications including machinery and construction.
EN 1.1191 equiv.	A structural carbon steel containing approximately 0.45% carbon. It offers good machinability and can be heat-treated to improve strength and wear resistance. Commonly used in shafts, gears, and pins.
EN 1.7220 equiv.	An alloy steel containing chromium and molybdenum, offering high strength and toughness. It has excellent hardenability and is suitable for high-strength bolts, shafts, and gears after heat treatment.
EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)	A material that combines high strength and toughness. Heat treatment (e.g., hardening) can further improve strength and wear resistance. Commonly used in automotive and machinery components where durability is critical.
EN 1.2510 equiv.	An alloy tool steel designed for cold working applications. It features high hardness, excellent wear resistance, and good toughness, making it suitable for shear blades, punches, dies, and gauges.
EN 1.2379 equiv.	A type of alloy steel designed for tooling applications. It offers high hardness and wear resistance, and can be further strengthened through heat treatment such as quenching. Although its corrosion resistance is lower than stainless steel, it is relatively high among tool steels. Widely used in molds, jigs, and gauges where hardness and wear resistance are critical.
EN 1.2344 equiv.	A chromium, molybdenum, and vanadium alloy tool steel designed for high-temperature applications. It maintains strength under heat and resists thermal fatigue and cracking. Heat treatment improves durability and dimensional stability.
EN 1.3505 equiv.	A bearing-grade steel with very high hardness and wear resistance. It has excellent hardenability and is suitable for precision applications such as bearings, rollers, gauges, and fine mechanical components.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
EN 1.0038 equiv.	400~510	215~355	21 or more	360~485	380~485	245~355	2.0×10⁵	2.0×10⁵	7.87	6.96×10⁶	58	11.7×10⁻⁶
EN 1.1191 equiv.	570~750	330~490	20 or more	600	600	330~490	2.0×10⁵	2.0×10⁵	7.87	6.0×10⁶	45	11.9×10⁻⁶
EN 1.7220 equiv.	900~1050	750~900	15 or more	950	950	750~900	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.85	6.0×10⁶	42	11.0×10⁻⁶
EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC)	950~1100	800~950	12 or more	1000	1000	800~950	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.85	6.0×10⁶	42.7	11.0×10⁻⁶
EN 1.2510 equiv.	1000~1300	850~1100	10 or more	1100	1100	850~1100	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.85	4.5×10⁶	25	12.2×10⁻⁶
EN 1.2379 equiv.	1800~2000	1500~1700	5 or more	1900	1900	1500~1700	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.8	4.0×10⁶	20	12×10⁻⁶
EN 1.2344 equiv.	1200~1400	1000~1200	10 or more	1300	1300	1000~1200	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.73	4.0×10⁶	25	13.3×10⁻⁶
EN 1.3505 equiv.	1570~1960	700~850	10 or more	900	900	700~850	2.1×10⁵	2.1×10⁵	7.8	6.0×10⁶	46.6	12.5×10⁻⁶

Aluminum

Material Features

Material	Features
EN AW−2017 equiv.	An aluminum alloy known as “”Duralumin,”” offering excellent machinability and strength. Due to its copper content, it has slightly lower corrosion resistance compared to other aluminum alloys. Widely used in aircraft and vehicle components.
EN AW−5052 equiv.	Has a lower magnesium content than EN AW−5056 equiv., offering superior formability and weldability. It has high corrosion resistance and moderate strength among aluminum alloys, and is a commonly used widely available material.
EN AW−5056 equiv.	An aluminum alloy with high magnesium content, offering excellent corrosion resistance, strength, and weldability. It is widely used in extruded round bars for structural components such as frames and supports.
EN AW−6061 equiv.	An aluminum alloy with enhanced corrosion resistance and heat treatability. Among aluminum alloys, it offers top-class corrosion resistance. T6 tempering (artificial aging) provides high tensile strength and yield strength. Ideal for use in seawater and outdoor environments.
EN AW−7075 equiv.	Also known as “”Super Duralumin,”” this alloy combines high strength with lightweight properties. It offers excellent heat treatability and top-class strength and impact resistance among aluminum alloys. Ideal for applications requiring both light weight and high strength.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
EN AW−2017 equiv.	390~500	250~350	10~18	450	450	250~350	7.2×10⁴	7.2×10⁴	2.79	2.0×10⁷	130	23.6×10⁻⁶
EN AW−5052 equiv.	210~265	125~190	12~20	230	230	125~190	7.0×10⁴	7.0×10⁴	2.68	2.5×10⁷	138	23.8×10⁻⁶
EN AW−5056 equiv.	290~350	200~270	10~20	320	320	200~270	7.0×10⁴	7.0×10⁴	2.66	2.5×10⁷	130	23.8×10⁻⁶
EN AW−6061 equiv.	260~310	240~270	8~15	280	280	240~270	6.9×10⁴	6.9×10⁴	2.7	2.5×10⁷	167	23.6×10⁻⁶
EN AW−7075 equiv.	510~580	430~500	7~12	550	550	430~500	7.1×10⁴	7.1×10⁴	2.8	2.0×10⁷	130	23.6×10⁻⁶

Stainless Steel

Material Features

Material	Features
EN 1.4305 equiv.	An austenitic stainless steel with improved machinability and processability. It maintains high corrosion resistance and strength while offering excellent machinability, making it suitable for complex-shaped components. Its corrosion and weldability are lower than EN 1.4301 equiv. Commonly used in single parts such as bolts and shafts.
EN 1.4301 equiv.	This is an austenitic stainless steel with enhanced corrosion resistance and weldability. Its versatility and availability make it widely used across various industries. It maintains high corrosion resistance and strength while offering excellent weldability, making it suitable for equipment and machinery applications.
EN 1.4401 equiv.	An austenitic stainless steel with improved corrosion and pitting resistance compared to EN 1.4301 equiv. Suitable for environments exposed to seawater or salt-laden air, where corrosion could lead to critical failures.
EN 1.4404 equiv.	Has a lower carbon content than EN 1.4401 equiv. and higher resistance to intergranular corrosion (corrosion along the crystal-to-crystal interface). It can be used in environments requiring corrosion and pitting resistance such as seawater.
EN 1.4125 equiv.	The hardest type of stainless steel, capable of achieving high strength, hardness, and wear resistance through heat treatment. It is ideal for durable mechanical and precision parts such as bearings, shafts, pins, and molds.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
EN 1.4305 equiv.	520~750	205 or more	40~60	600	600	205~310	1.93×10⁵	≈1.93×10⁵	7.93	1.4×10⁶	16.2	17.3×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4301 equiv.	520~750	205 or more	40~60	600	600	205~310	1.93×10⁵	≈1.93×10⁵	7.93	1.4×10⁶	16.2	17.3×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4401 equiv.	520~700	205 or more	40~60	580	580	200~300	1.93×10⁵	≈1.93×10⁵	7.98	1.3×10⁶	13	15.9×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4404 equiv.	480~680	177 or more	45~65	560	560	170~280	1.93×10⁵	1.93×10⁵	7.98	1.3×10⁶	13	15.9×10⁻⁶
EN 1.4125 equiv.	1900~2100	1500 or more	5~10	2000	2000	1500~1700	2.0×10⁵	≈2.0×10⁵	7.7	0.8×10⁶	24	10.２×10⁻⁶

Copper & Brass

Material Features

Material	Features
EN CW614N equiv.	An alloy of copper and zinc, also classified as brass. Compared to EN CW505L Equiv. , it offers lower cutting resistance and produces easily breakable chips during machining. More suitable for precision components.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Yield (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Compressive strength (N/mm2)	Yield point (N/mm2)	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Flexural modulus (N/mm2)	Specific Gravity	Electrical Conductivity (S/m)	Thermal Conductivity (W/m・K)	Coefficient of Linear Expansion (/℃)
EN CW614N equiv.	335~540	270~410	≥10	ー	400~450	ー	96000	1.0×10⁵	8.43	1.51×10⁷	117	20.5×10⁻⁶

Resin

Material Features

Material	Features	Appearance
POM (Acetal, Standard, white)	An engineering plastic known as POM or Duracon. It offers high mechanical strength, wear resistance, and chemical resistance. Excellent machinability and cost-efficiency. Compared to MC Nylon, it has lower water absorption and higher wear resistance, resulting in superior dimensional stability over long-term use.
POM (Acetal, Standard, black)
MC Nylon (Standard, blue)	Provides excellent mechanical strength, chemical resistance (except strong acids), thermal properties, and wear resistance. Due to its high water absorption, dimensional stability is relatively poor.
MC Nylon (Weather resistance, black ash)	A grade of MC Nylon with enhanced resistance to outdoor degradation. While it offers excellent weather resistance, water absorption may still cause dimensional changes in wet environments.
MC Nylon (Anti-static, black)	A grade of MC Nylon with added electrical conductivity. Volume resistivity: 1–100 Ω·m. Due to MC Nylon’s inherent water absorption, dimensional changes may occur in outdoor environments. More expensive than antistatic MC Nylon.
MC Nylon (Conductive, black)	A grade of MC Nylon with antistatic properties. Volume resistivity: 10–1000 kΩ·m. Higher resistivity and lower cost than conductive MC Nylon. Dimensional changes may occur in outdoor environments due to water absorption.
ABS (Standard, natural color)	A cost-effective resin with good mechanical strength and impact resistance. Excellent shock absorption. Good machinability and suitable for adhesive bonding.
ABS (Standard, black)
PEEK (Standard, grey-brown)	A high-performance thermoplastic with top-tier heat resistance and mechanical strength. Exceptional dimensional stability, chemical resistance, wear resistance, and strength. Very expensive. Resistant to most acids, bases, and organic solvents even at high temperatures.
PPS (Standard, natural color)	A super engineering plastic with excellent heat resistance, dimensional stability, chemical resistance, mechanical strength, and wear resistance. Resistant to most chemicals below 200°C. Similar heat resistance to PEEK but more affordable. Low water absorption and thermal expansion, offering high dimensional stability.
Acrylic (Standard, transparent)	A plastic with excellent light transmission, used in displays, lighting covers, and interior applications. It is sensitive to petroleum-based solvents and alkaline chemicals. Machined surfaces may lose transparency.
PC (Standard, transparent)	A plastic with superior impact resistance, heat resistance, and dimensional stability. It offers high light transmission and is used in covers, windows, protective panels, and mechanical components due to its good machinability.
PC (Standard, black)
PP (Standard, natural color)	A lightweight plastic with excellent chemical resistance, water resistance, insulation, and heat resistance. It is used in mechanical parts, piping components, and insulators. It offers good machinability and is cost-effective.
PVC (Standard, grey)	A gray-colored rigid vinyl chloride resin with excellent chemical resistance, water resistance, and electrical insulation. It has high dimensional stability and is used in piping, enclosures, and insulators. It is also easy to process.
UHMWPE (Standard, white)	Polyethylene with a molecular weight over 1 million. Features low density, excellent wear resistance, impact absorption, and sliding properties. Lower cost than PTFE. High thermal expansion and poor dimensional stability. Difficult burr removal and rough surface finish.
Fluorine (PTFE, Standard, white)	A fluoropolymer with outstanding heat resistance, chemical resistance, cold resistance, and sliding properties. Lower hardness compared to other resins, prone to burrs. Wide usable temperature range, but large volume changes with temperature reduce dimensional stability. Ideal for high-temperature or chemically aggressive environments.

Material Properties　*The following values are for reference only and are not guaranteed.

Material	Tensile strength (N/mm2)	Flexural strength (N/mm2)	Elongation at Break %	Young’s Modulus (N/mm2)	Rockwell Hardness	Specific Gravity	Continuous Service Temperature (°C)
POM (Acetal, Standard, white) POM (Acetal, Standard, black)	60~68	89~108	40~75	2988	R118	1.41	95~100
MC Nylon (Standard, blue)	96	110	30	3432	R120	1.16	120
MC Nylon (Weather resistance, black ash)	83	110	40	3334	R120	1.16	120
MC Nylon (Anti-static, black)	75	118	7	2500~2700	R117	1.23	120
MC Nylon (Conductive, black)	69	118	10	2500~2700	R119	1.2	120
ABS (Standard, natural color) ABS (Standard, black)	39~54	64~81	18	1900~2800	R105~115	1.05	60~95
PEEK (Standard, grey-brown)	98~116	170~175	20~40	4200~4345	M100-120	1.32	250~260
PPS (Standard, natural color)	79~85	128~142	23~27	3300	M95-100	1.35	220
Acrylic (Standard, transparent)	60~70	80~95	90~120	2400	M70~M80	1.2	100~120
PC (Standard, transparent)	45~55	70~90	20~40	2800	R110~R120	1.4	50~70
PC (Standard, black)	45~55	70~90	20~40	2800	R110~R120	1.4	50~70
PP (Standard, natural color)	33~34	51	33	1400	R126	0.91	100
PVC (Standard, grey)	55~65	80~100	50~100	2900	M80~M90	1.38	80~100
UHMWPE (Standard, white)	21~45	22~26	300 or more	500~826	R50-56	0.94	80
Fluorine (PTFE, Standard, white)	13.7~34.3	–	200~400	400~600	R20	2.2	260

Surface Treatment – Features / Appearance

Surface Treatments	Features	Appearance

Electroless Nickel Plating	A surface treatment that forms a protective film through chemical reactions without using electricity. It enables uniform coating even on complex shapes, maintains high dimensional accuracy, and is compatible with various materials including insulators. Widely used across industries due to its excellent performance.
Black Oxide	A surface treatment that forms black rust on steel surfaces to protect the underlying material. It suppresses the formation of red rust and enhances corrosion resistance. Its refined appearance and low processing cost make it suitable for both industrial products and interior applications.
Trivalent Chromate (clear)	A surface treatment that forms a chromium layer on metal surfaces through electrochemical reaction. The chromium film provides high hardness, excellent wear resistance, corrosion resistance, and a mirror-like gloss. The resulting layer significantly improves the durability and appearance of the base material. The white tone refers to the color of the film formed after chemical treatment.
Trivalent Chromate (Black)	A surface treatment that forms a chromium layer on metal surfaces through electrochemical reaction. The chromium film offers high hardness, wear resistance, corrosion resistance, and a glossy black finish. The coating enhances both the durability and visual quality of the material. The black tone is the color of the film that appears after chemical treatment.
Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)	A surface treatment developed for industrial applications that achieves superior hardness, wear resistance, and corrosion resistance compared to traditional chromate processing. The resulting film reaches a hardness of HV700–1000, significantly enhancing the durability of sliding components.
Low Temperature Black Chrome	An electroplating process performed at low temperatures that provides durability comparable to hard chrome. It offers excellent corrosion, wear, and heat resistance, along with strong adhesion that minimizes the risk of coating cracks.
Phosphate Coating	A surface treatment that forms a phosphate layer on metal surfaces to improve rust resistance, wear resistance, and paint adhesion. It is widely used in automotive and consumer electronics components requiring long-term reliability.
Salt bath nitriding	A nitriding process performed below the transformation temperature of steel (approx. 570–590°C), minimizing thermal deformation and maintaining dimensional accuracy. It is used in automotive parts, machinery components, molds, and sliding parts requiring wear resistance, fatigue resistance, and durability.
Clear Anodize	A process that forms a thick alumina layer on aluminum surfaces to improve corrosion resistance, wear resistance, electrical insulation, and dyeability. It is highly decorative and can be dyed in various colors. The white anodized finish is colorless and transparent, resembling the natural silver-white of aluminum.
Black Anodize	A surface treatment that forms a thick alumina layer and enhances corrosion resistance, wear resistance, insulation, and dyeability. After treatment, the surface is dyed black, making it suitable for decorative and functional applications.
Black Anodize (matte)	A surface treatment that includes anodizing, blasting, and chemical texturing to reduce surface reflectivity and achieve a matte black finish. It is widely used in optical components where low brightness is required.
Hard Anodize (clear)	A process performed in cold sulfuric acid to form a thick, hard alumina film with improved hardness and wear resistance compared to standard anodizing. It is used in industrial fields such as automotive and aerospace, where both durability and lubricity are required. The color tone ranges from yellow-brown to natural aluminum.
Passivation	A surface treatment that forms an ultra-thin oxide coating on the metal surface to enhance corrosion resistance. It prevents rust from forming and contributes to a more uniform appearance and improved cleanliness.

Surface Treatment Characteristics

Surface Treatments	Corrosion Resistance	Wear Resistance	Hardness	Appearance / Decorative Quality	Electrical Conductivity
Electroless Nickel Plating	〇	〇	〇	△	〇
Black Oxide	△	×	×	△	〇
Trivalent Chromate (clear)	△	×	×	△	〇
Trivalent Chromate (Black)	△	×	×	△	〇
Hard Chrome Plating (Flash Plating)	〇	〇	〇	〇	△
Low Temperature Black Chrome	〇	△	△	〇	〇
Phosphate Coating	△	△	△	×	×
Salt bath nitriding	〇	〇	〇	×	×
Clear Anodize	〇	△	△	〇	×
Black Anodize	〇	△	△	〇	×
Black Anodize (matte)	〇	△	△	〇	×
Hard Anodize (clear)	〇	〇	〇	△	×
Passivation	〇	×	×	△	×

The materials used are listed in the table below. The materials used comply with JIS (Japanese Industry Standard), equivalent to DIN standard.

No	Material	DIN Alloy	DIN No.	JIS	USA (AISI)	GB	Notes
1	EN 1.0038 equiv.	S235JR	1.0038	SS400	1018 Carbon Steel	Q235	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 3101.
2	EN 1.1191 equiv.	C45	1.1191	S45C	1049 Carbon Steel	45#	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4051.
3	EN 1.7220 equiv.	34CrMo4	1.7220	SCM435	4140 Alloy Steel	–
4	EN 1.7220 equiv.(Reference Hardness: 26-32 HRC)	34CrMo4 (Reference Hardness: 26-32 HRC)	1.7220 (Reference Hardness: 26-32 HRC)	SCM440	4140 Alloy Steel (tempered)	42CrMo
5	EN 1.2510 equiv.	100MnCrW4	1.2510	SKS3	O1 Tool Steel	100MnCrW4	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4404.
6	EN 1.2379 equiv.	X155CrVMo12-1	1.2379	SKD11	D2 Tool Steel	X153CrMoV12
7	EN 1.2344 equiv.	X40CrMoV51	1.2344	SKD61	H2 Tool Steel	X40CrMoV5-1
8	EN 1.3505 equiv.	100Cr6	1.3505	SUJ2	52100 Alloy Steel	GCr15	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4805.
9	EN AW−2017 equiv.	Al-Cu4MgSI	3.1325	A2017[T4]	2017 Aluminum Alloy	2A12	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS H 4000.
10	EN AW−5052 equiv.	Al-Mg2.5	3.3523	A5052[H32,H34,H112]	5052 Aluminum Alloy	5052 H112
11	EN AW−5056 equiv.	Al-Mg2.5	3.3523	A5056[H34,H112]	5056 Aluminum Alloy	5056 H112
12	EN AW – 6061 equiv.	Al-Mg1SiCu	3.3211	A6061 [T6]	6061 Aluminum Alloy	6061 T6
13	EN AW – 7075 equiv.	Al-Zn6MgCu	3.4365	A7075 [T6511]	7075 Aluminum Alloy	7075 T6
14	EN 1.4305 equiv.	X10CrNiS18-9	1.4305	SUS303	303 Stainless Steel	Y12Cr18Ni9	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS G 4303.
15	EN 1.4301 equiv.	X5CrNi18.10	1.4301	SUS304	304 Stainless Steel	06Cr19Ni10
16	EN 1.4401 equiv.	X5CrNiMo17122	1.4401	SUS316	316 Stainless Steel	0Cr17Ni12Mo2
17	EN 1.4404 equiv.	X2CrNiMo17-12-2	1.4404	SUS316L	316L Stainless Steel	022Cr17Ni12Mo2
18	EN 1.4125 equiv.	X105CrMo17	1.4125	SUS440C	440C Stainless Steel	9Cr17
19	EN CW614N equiv.	CuZn39Pb3/Ms58	2.0401	C3604-LCd (Brass)	Brass C3604-LCd	–	Use materials that equivalent to the components stipulated in JIS H 3250.

Caution

Steel types that are not included in the JIS standard, or for which there is no comparable steel even if a JIS standard exists, are not listed.
The steel types listed for comparison are reference standards.
Please note that the chemical composition may be different.

Recognition of Turning parts
Outer- and Inner Diameter Recognition Conditions
Keyway Recognition Conditions
Recognition Conditions of holes on the cylindrical surface

In the Machiend Plates, round shapes and edged shapes are automatically determined.
This section describes the recognition conditions.

Recognition of Turning parts

If the outer-most diameter has a cylindrical part, the shape is recognized for Turning Parts.

Recognition of Turning parts

Recognition of Machined plates

*The outer-most diameter is cylindrical

*The external corner curved chamfer and outer-most shape form a rectangle

*The outer-most diameter cylindrical surface exceeds a total of 140°

*The outer-most diameter cylindrical surface is 140° or less

Outer- and Inner Diameter Recognition Conditions

The inner diameter and outer diameter are recognized based on their positional relationship with the central axis.

Recognition as “Outer- and Inner Diameter”	Not recognition as “Outer- and Inner Diameter”
*Recognized as an “outer diameter” as it is on the central axis	*Recognized as an “unsupported shape” not as an outer diameter, as it is not on the central axis
*Recognized as an “inner diameter” as it is on the central axis	*Recognized as a “hole” rather than as an inner diameter, as it is not on the central axis

Caution

Automatic recognition is not supported for external threads (outer diameter)
If a “internal threads (inner diameter) and hole” is recognized, the color attribute/CAD attribute link age function is enabled.＞Automatic Hole Type Recognition

Keyway Recognition Conditions

For keyways that match the JIS (B 1301:1996), tolerances are automatically set and can be changed in the dialog. *The default settings can be customised in user settings.
*The default settings can be customised in user settings.

Key width specification	Recognized as a keyway	Not recognized as a keyway

Width recognized as an external keyway	Matches with [b1] specifications: The fit tolerance of the external keyway is set automatically	Does not match with [b1] specifications: The fit tolerance of the slotted hole is set manually
Width recognized as an internal keyway	Matches with [b2] specifications: The fit tolerance of the internal keyway is set automatically	Does not match with [b2] specifications: Handled as “general tolerance” for internal keyway and the tolerance cannot be selected

Caution

“If the inside corners are not rounded, the shape will not be recognised as an “outside groove” and the fit tolerance cannot be set.
If tolerance settings are required, design the groove with rounded corners that match the groove width.”

「外径キー溝・内径キー溝」の認識条件

以下の表に順次、規格内の場合認識されます。

Caution

*2023年3月より対象となります。

b1/b2	2	3	4	5	6	8	10	12	14	16	18	20	22	25	28	32

焼き肌

Recognition Conditions of holes on the cylindrical surface

“A hole that is on the central axis is recognized as a “”hole”” supported for automatic quotation
If the hole does not turn on the central axis, it is recognized as an “”other hole”” and is not supported for automatic quotation.”
Even if no chamfer was modeled in 3D, a chamfer is produced at the hole entrance.

Recognized as a “hole”	Not recognized as a “hole”
*Recognized as a “hole” as located on the central axis	*recognized as an “other hole” as not located on the central axis Enter the hole information in the comments field to request a quotation Refer to ”Case 7: Other holes”

Outer-Most Diameter
Outer diameter
Outer diameter (taper)
Groove Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Inner diameter (taper)
Inner diameter (blind)
Groove inner diameter
Surface roughness
Straight hole
Tapped hole
Insert Hole
One-Step Hole
Two-Step Hole
Countersunk hole

The rules for displaying dimensions relating to outer diameter, inner diameter, surface roughness and holes are as follows.

Outer-Most Diameter (Non-Precision)

Settings	Non-precision
		Thread Length Settings
		Specified length on left side	Specified length on right side	Specified length on both sides	Fully threaded
Image
Set Value	ø30
		M30 thread length min.7mm｜7(M30)		M30 thread length min.7mm｜7(M30)
			M30 thread length min.7mm｜7(M30)	M30 thread length min.7mm｜7(M30)	M30 Fully threaded

Tip

When setting the thread in meviy, fine thread is displayed for the pitch, but coarse thread is not displayed.

Outer-Most Diameter (Precision)

Settings	Non-precision
		Thread Length Settings
		Specified length on left side	Specified length on right side	Specified length on both sides	Fully threaded
Image
Set Value	ø30 g6 (-0.007/-0.02)	ø30 g6 (-0.007/-0.02)	ø30 g6 (-0.007/-0.02)	ø30 g6 (-0.007/-0.02)
		M30 thread length min.7mm｜7(M30)	M30 thread length min.7mm｜7(M30)	M30 thread length 7mm｜7(M30)
				M30 thread length 7mm｜7(M30)

Outer diameter

Settings	Non-precision			Precision
		Thread Length Settings			Thread Length Settings
		Specified length	Fully threaded		Specified length
Image
Set Value	ø26			ø26 g6 (-0.007/-0.02)	ø26 g6 (-0.007/-0.02)
Set Value		M27 Thread Length 7｜7(M27)	M27 Fully threaded		M27 Thread Length 7｜7(M27)

Outer diameter (taper)

Settings	Non-precision	Tapered pipe thread settings
Settings	Non-precision	ISO Standard	Specified length
Image
Set Value	⌀8.89	R 1/8	R 1/8 Thread Length 5

Groove Outer Diameter

Settings	Non-precision	Precision
Image
Set Value	ø26	ø26 ±0.1

Inner Diameter (Through, Non-Precision)

Settings	Non-precision
		Internal Thread Settings
		Specified effective depth on left side	Specified effective depth on right side	Specified effective depth on both sides	Fully threaded
Image
Set Value	ø10	M10	M10	M10/M10	M10 Fully threaded
Set Value		3(M10)	3(M10)	3(M10)/3(M10)

Inner Diameter (Through, Precision)

Settings	Precision
Settings	Specified effective depth on left side	Specified effective depth on right side	Specified effective depth on both sides	Full length
Image
Set Value	ø10H7(+0.015/0)	ø10H7(+0.015/0)	ø10H7(+0.015/0)	ø10H7(+0.015/0)
Set Value	3(ø10H7)	3(ø10H7)	3(ø10H7)/3(ø10H7)

Inner diameter (taper)

Settings	Non-precision	Tapered pipe thread settings
Settings	Non-precision	ISO Standard	Specified length
Image
Set Value	⌀8.89	R 1/8	R 1/8 Thread Length 5

Inner diameter (blind)

Settings	Non-precision			Precision
		Internal Thread Settings
		Specified depth	Fully threaded	Specified depth	Full length
Image
Set Value	ø20	M22 × 1.5	M22 × 1.5 Fully threaded	ø20 H7 (+0.0021/0)	ø20 H7 (+0.0021/0)
Set Value		3 (M22 × 1.5)		9 (ø20 H7)

Groove inner diameter

Settings	Non-precision	Precision
Image
Set Value	ø26	ø26 ±0.1

Surface roughness

Surface roughness	Ra1.6	Ra3.2	Ra6.3
Image
Set Value	Ra1.6	Ra3.2	A reference surface roughness value is not displayed

Tip

The surface roughness value can be specified. See (1) to (6) in the figure to the right for surfaces for which values can be set.

Tip

The display of the dimensions of holes follows the guidelines listed below.
The display of the angular position of holes on the sides of the cylinder from the lathe machining is also added.

Straight hole

[mm]

Blind/Through	Blind		Through
Settings	None	Torelance H7, Effective depth 13	None	Torelance H7, Effective depth 15
Image
3D Viewer display	ø4 ↧15	ø4H7(+0.012/0) ↧13/Pilot hole ↧15	ø4 THRU	ø4H7(+0.012/0) ↧15 THRU

Tapped hole

[mm]

Blind/Through	Blind		Through
Settings	Coarse thread	Fine thread: Effective depth 13	Coarse thread	Fine thread: Effective depth 10
Image
3D Viewer display	M4 ↧15	M4x0.5 ↧13/Pilot hole ↧15	M4 THRU	M4x0.5 ↧10 THRU

Insert Hole

[mm]

Blind/Through	Blind	Through
Settings	Nominal length 1D	Nominal length 1D
Image
3D Viewer display	M4 INS-1D/Pilot hole ↧15	M4 INS-1D THRU

One-Step Hole

[mm]

Blind/Through	Blind	Through
Settings	None	None
Image
3D Viewer display	凵 ø8 ↧3	凵 ø8 ↧3
3D Viewer display	ø4 ↧15	ø4 THRU

*If the upper and lower rows are precision holes or tapped holes, the value at the end indicates the effective depth.

Two-Step Hole

[mm]

Blind/Through	Through
Settings	None
Image
3D Viewer display	凵ø8↧5
	ø4 THRU
	(Opposite side)凵ø8↧5

Countersunk hole

[mm]

Blind/Through	Through
Settings	None
Image
3D Viewer display	V ø8
3D Viewer display	ø4

Notes

A hole located on the central axis is recognised as a “hole” supported for automatic quotation
Please check here for details on recognition conditions. → [FA Mechanical Parts] Turning Parts＞Turning Parts Recognition Conditions

The Finished Shape of Internal and External Corners of Turning parts
Center Holes
The Bottom of Holes (Machined and Cut)
Regarding cylinder corners
Incomplete Threads
The Tapered Thread (ISO)
The Finished Shape of Pocket Internal Corners
Sliting processing
Hexagonal Hole Notes

Although 3D CAD data will be used for manufacturing, the following cases may result in differences between the 3D model and the finished product.

The Finished Shape of Internal and External Corners of Turning parts

Please check the examples and notes for differences in the finished product.

Tip

The finish conditions are as follows.

Models with external edges of less than C/R0.5 will have C/R 0.1 to 0.4 mm or slight chamfer.
If the internal corners of the cylinder are less than 0.5 and there is no relief groove in the model, the tool edge will leave a corner of R0-R0.4mm.
→Click here to specify “Corner R0” without modeling a relief groove.

Caution

When modelled with ≥C0.5 mm or more, machining will be in accordance with the 3D data.
When modelled with ≥R0.5 mm or more, machining will be in accordance with the 3D data.

Caution

Specification of “no chamfer” is not supported.

Notes

- A standard retaining ring grooving tool has corner R0.2
- For retaining ring standards, click here.＞＞＞Specifications for External Thread and Internal Thread, Keyways, Holes and Pockets

Outer diameter grooving

Inner diameter grooving

Center Holes

The center hole made in the end face is used to keep the workpiece in place and to prevent core deviation when rotating the product.

Caution

「”Center hole cannot be left” can be selected, but there may be restrictions on the shapes that can be machined that make the option unavailable. When this occurs, check the “Precaution” in the upper-left corner of the 3D Viewer.

Notes

(1) If you select “Remove center hole”, an arrow will point to the part.

(2) If the component has an inner diameter, no arrow will point to the part.

The Bottom of Holes (Machined and Cut)

A drill tip shape remains at the bottom of the hole (machined and cut).

Shape patterns	Inner diameter hole does not have a step	Inner diameter hole has a step
A
A	Drill tip shape remains (flat bottom will be 1mm or more)
B
B	Drill tip shape remains, no flat bottom

The type of the bottom of the hole will depend on the diameter and depth of the hole.
Example: If the inner diameter (D) is 10mm and the hole depth is 35mm, the depth of 35mm ÷ inner diameter of 10mm = 3.5D, so the bottom of the hole type will be B.

Inner diameter(D)	the hole depth
Inner diameter(D)	to 3D	3D to 5D	5D to 10D
D≦⌀6	B	B	B
⌀6 ＜D≦⌀30	A	B	B
⌀30＜D	A	A	A

If a flat bottom hole is required, please request it in “Additional Information”. We will confirm whether or not we can accommodate your request and reply.

Regarding cylinder corners

Please check the examples and notes for differences in the finished product.

Outer diameter

①When “Corner R0 specification” is specified in the dialog

When you want to minimize the corner R or specify the relief groove
→ Select “Corner R0”

Tip

Corner R0 has a width of less than corner R0.2 to R0.4, so the depth may be less than 0.5mm. You cannot choose.

① When machining with R0.4 tools

②When machining with R0.2 tools with R0.4 tools

③ If the length of the shaft is short, it may be machined with a tool with a 0.1mm radius on the end face that contacts the shaft.

Notes

In the following cases, “Corner R0” does not apply.

(1) The model has corner R0.5 or greater	(2) The model has a relief groove

②If you specify “Corner R0 to R0.4 or less” in the dialog

When the cylindrical corner can be any shape
→ Select “Corner Radius between R0 to R0.4”.

Tip

Arbitrary R shape of cylindrical corner
① Machining R remains
② Relief groove (1) Minimum clearance only at the cylindrical corner
Finished shape after

Detailed figure
③ Relief groove (2) Relief shape on cylindrical part + flange part
Finished shape after machining

Detailed figure

③When modeling “corner R0.5 or more”

If the corners are modeled with R0.5 or higher, the shape will be as shown below.

Modeling of R0.5 or higher in corners
Finished shape after machining
Detailed figure

Inner diameter

Any relief groove below may be set.

Cross section
①Detailed figure
②Detailed figure

Notes

At the bottom left of the 3Dviewer, you can see the handling information for the cylindrical corners.

Incomplete Threads

The required undercut shape (length and depth) to ensure the threaded portion length for an incomplete threaded position is shown. See the example below.

[mm]

		External Thread	Internal Thread
Modelling	Without undercut
Modelling	With undercut
(1) Lower limit for the length of the incomplete thread and the width of the undercut.		Pitch × 2.0	Pitch × 2.5 + 2
(2) Lower limit of the length of the threaded (external thread) and the depth of the threaded (internal thread).		Pitch × 2.0	Pitch × 2.0
(3) Chamfered edge		Chamfered to prevent burr	Chamfered to prevent burr
(4) Minimum undercut depth value		Pitch × 0.75	Pitch × 0.75

Caution

Parts with “Pitch × 0.75” or less set to the minimum value for the undercut depth(4) can be machined, but thread marks may occur.

Reference model
Actual finished shape after machining

Tip

The [Notes] shown in the red box below describe the applicable thread length/thread depth.

Example 1) Outer diameter specification: male thread thread length 44.6mm – 4.0 (pitch) x 2.0 = 36.6mm	Example 2) Inner diameter specification: female screw thread depth 15.5mm – (1.0(pitch) × 2.5 + 2.0) ＝ 11.0mm

Caution

The thread shape cannot be identified. Set the outer and inner threads.

The Tapered Thread (ISO)

Although there are multiple methods for modeling tapered pipe threads, the diameter and depth of the tapered pilot hole will be machined in accordance with ISO standards (or JIS B 0203). The modeled shape and depth of the hole are for reference only.
Other areas of the part that are not threaded, such as the area beyond the pilot hole, will be machined to the model.

Machined according to ISO standards (or JIS B 0203)

Machined according to the model

The Finished Shape of Pocket Internal Corners

Check the examples and notes for differences from the final product.

Notch (pocket)

Shape of less than R0.5 including sharp edges

Actual finished shape after machining

"*Finished with a radius (R) ranging from 0.1 to 0.5 mm. "

Caution

The machined curve on the sides of the pocket depends on the tool diameter, which is chosen as small as possible.
If there are any discrepancies between the model and the finished form, please feel free to let us know.

Sliting processing

The dimensions of the parts may change as a result of the slitting process. Therefore, the dimensions of the following shapes are guaranteed based on the measurements taken before slitting.

Hexagonal Hole Notes

Information and examples of differences between the model and the finished part.

The shape of the finished hexagonal hole will vary depending on the distance across the flats.
The modeled depth is used as a reference, and the shape of the bottom of the hole will vary.

Hexagonal Hole corresponding shapes and sizes

Tip

If the distance across the flats is less than 6mm or not listed below, it is not available for automatic quotation.

Example: If the distance across the flats is 5.5mm, it is not available for automatic quotation

Distance across the flats	Metal	Resin
2	Finished Shape①
2.5
3
4
5
6－8	Finished Shape① Finished Shape②	Finished Shape②
8＜	Finished Shape②

Caution

The roughness specified for the surface does not apply to the internal hexagon.

Notes

The tolerance for the distance across the flats meets to the JIS B 1176.

Finished Shape①

Finished Shape②

Remaining thickness during processing of the product

If the minimum wall thickness of the model falls within the ranges listed below, a warning may appear during automatic quotation.

[mm]

Wall Type	Part Size	Wall Thickness Warning Range
①	Outermost diameter ø10 or less	0.5 or less
①	Outermost diameter more than ø10	1.0 or less
②	ー	1.0 or less
③	ー	less than 1.0

*If a male or female thread is specified, the factory will decide whether or not it can be processed depending on the shape.
*Wall thicknesses below these limits may cause tearing or distortion of the shape during machining.

Deformation caused by high material volume removal

See below for details about the error message “High Volume Removal”.

If the percentage of model volume compared to material volume is below the listed threshold, deformation may occur.
*Material volume = (radius of the outer-most diameter)2 × pi × overall length.

Material volume

100%

Yellow : Inner diameter removal volume
Blue : Outer diameter removal volume
Red : Other removal volume

Cutting volume

95%

(

Inner diameter removal volume

5%

Outer diameter removal volume

89%

Other removal volume

1%

)

Model volume

5%

	Iron/Steel/SS
Model volume threshold	5％ or more

Material volume

100%

Yellow : Inner diameter removal volume
Blue : Outer diameter removal volume
Red : Other removal volume

Cutting volume

92%

(

Inner diameter removal volume

19%

Outer diameter removal volume

71%

Other removal volume

1%

)

Model volume

8%

	Aluminum/Copper/Resin
Model volume threshold	10％ or more

Material volume

100%

Yellow : Inner diameter removal volume
Blue : Outer diameter removal volume

Cutting volume

90%

(

Inner diameter removal volume

41%

Outer diameter removal volume

49%

Other removal volume

0%

)

Model volume

10%

	All materials	Notes
Model volume threshold	15％ or more	Inner diameter removal volume 40％ or less and Outer diameter removal volume 40％ or less

Material volume

100%

Yellow : Inner diameter removal volume

Cutting volume

88%

(

Inner diameter removal volume

88%

Outer diameter removal volume

0%

Other removal volume

0%

)

Model volume

12%

	All materials (over ø30)	Notes
Model volume threshold	20％ or more	Inner diameter removal volume 70％　or less

Tip

Modify the 3D model so that the model volume is greater than or equal to the threshold value.

When uploading a model to meviy, a “Quotation failure” error may occur.
Below is an overview of why these errors occur and how to resolve them,as well as some example errors.

Case 1: Pocket Corners

*This message may appear for cases other than the following examples.

Pocket Corners

Cause

In some cases, sharp pocket corners cannot be machined with an end mill and quotation is not possible.

Solution

Add a radius to each sharp corner in the pocket to allow for the tool radius. Quotation is possible.

The tool used will vary depending on the width and depth of the pocket. Refer to the table below for the corner radius required for the size of the pocket.

*Please use the table as a reference, as the required radius may vary depending on the shape.

Reference values for Radius modeling

Width (w)	Depth (h)	Radius
2≦w＜3	6	R1
3≦w＜4	9	R1.5
4≦w＜5	12	R2
5≦w＜6	20	R2.5
6≦w＜8	24	R3
8≦w＜10	32	R4
10≦w＜12	40	R5
12≦w＜16	48	R6
16≦w＜20	64	R8
20≦w	80	R10

Case 2: Pocket Bottom Radius

Pocket Bottom Radius

Cause

In some cases, the radius at the bottom of a pocket cannot be machined with an end mill and quotation is not possible.

Solution

Remove the radius at the bottom of the pocket from the model to get an automatic quotation.

Case 3: Thin Walls

Thin Walls

Cause

In some cases, thin wall parts cannot be quoted because the accuracy, including general tolerances, cannot be guaranteed.

The following shapes do not cause an error, but we may contact you to request a modification to the shape or tolerances due to thin walls.

Solution

By modifying the thickness of the model, automatic estimation is possible.

Click here for more information about the logic that determines the conditions for thin walls.

Case 4: Thin Plates

Thin Plates

Cause

In some cases, thin plates with a total thickness less than 5% of the outer diameter and an outer diameter of ø60mm or more are prone to warping and cannot be quoted.

Solution

If the thickness of the model is increased, an automatic offer is possible.

Increase the thickness of the model to more than 5% of the outermost diameter for automatic quotation.
Example Calculation
Outermost diameter ø60 × 5% = 3mm thickness
Outermost diameter ø100 × 5% = 5mm thickness

Case 5: Flange Thickness

Flange Thickness

Cause	The reason is that the thickness of the arrowed portion above is less than 1 mm.
Solution	The thickness of the arrow above should be 1 mm or more for automatic estimation.

Case 6: Unrecognizable or Unavailable Shapes

The following error messages are displayed when there is a “target outline” when recognized by meviy.

*This message may appear for cases other than the following examples.

Unrecognizable or Unavailable Shapes

Cause

Modeled Threads are an unrecognized shape in meviy.

Internal Thread

External Thread

Solution

Remove the thread and upload it as shown below. Threads can then be specified in meviy.

*Internal threads can be specified.

*External threads can be specified.

*Threads can be specified in the dialog box after selecting the feature.
Refer to “Setting Inner Diameter Information”for the setting of internal threads.
Refer to “Setting Outer Diameter Information” for the setting of external threads.

Case 7: Other holes

If a hole is recognized as an “other hole” in meviy, it cannot be automatically quoted.
Some examples of hole types that will be recognized as an “other hole” are shown below.

C – Chamfer

Chamfer other than 45

Tapered hole①

R – Radius

Tapered hole②

Two stepped tapered hole

Hole intersecting with hole features

TOP

Hole intersecting with outer diameter groove

TOP

FRONT

Case 8: Shape recognition failure

This error occurs when there is a problem with the quality of the uploaded 3D CAD data, and the shape is deformed when mevyi is loaded.
If the shape is deformed, please try the following steps to see if you can get a quote.

State of original data

State after meviy is loaded

Tip

If the following message is displayed in the 3D viewer, it corresponds to this error.
– “An error shape exists in the model.”
– “Failed to load file.”

1. Shape check of uploaded 3D CAD data

Check the shape of the uploaded 3D CAD data.
If there is a problem with the shape, correct it and upload the model again.

Notes

Visual check
– Are there any twisted surfaces?
– Are there any unintended geometric features displayed in the cross-section view?
– Are there any very small shapes or gaps?

Confirmation of the shape creation method
– Are there any 3D shapes created without drawing sketches?
– Shapes created by importing lines from DXF
– Shapes created using reference geometry or mating part geometry
– Are there any intersecting lines created by intersecting holes?
– etc.

Confirmation using checking tools
– Check for inconsistent shapes

If there is no problem with the shape, or if the loading situation does not improve after re-uploading the corrected file, please try the next step “2.

２．Changing the file format

Upload the file again in a different 3D CAD file format from the one you uploaded.

Notes

– If meviy supports the native format of the 3D CAD file you are using, please try quoting in the native format.
– If you are using an intermediate format, please try quoting in STEP or Parasolid format.

If modifying the geometry and changing the file format does not improve the situation, please contact our support.

The Machined plates service does not display dimensions or tolerances when 3D CAD data is uploaded other than diameter information and full length, assuming that the customer specifies the desired tolerances.
This section describes the finish of parts where dimensions and tolerances are not displayed.

Default General Tolerance Standards for Machined Dimensions
(Standard products conform to JIS B 0405:1991/JIS B 0419:1991)

The following standards are applied to the origin according to machining standards.
The origin can be moved to any position.

Tolerances for Model Dimensions, Excluding Chamfer

[mm]

Product lineup	Tolerance Grade		Classification of Standard Dimensions
Product lineup	Symbol	Description	≥0.5 ≤3	>3 ≤6	>6 ≤30	>30 ≤120	>120 ≤400	>400 ≤1000
Standard	m	Medium	±0.1	±0.1	±0.2	±0.3	±0.5	±0.8

Tolerances for Chamfer Length Dimensions (Corner Radius and Corner Chamfer Dimensions)

[mm]

Product lineup	Tolerance Grade		Classification of Standard Dimensions
Product lineup	Symbol	Description	≥0.5 ≤3	>3 ≤6	>6
Standard	C	Rough	±0.4	±1	±2

Angle Dimensional Tolerances

Product lineup	Tolerance Grade		Length of the Shorter Angle Edge
Product lineup	Symbol	Description	≤10	>10 ≤50	>50 ≤120	>120 ≤400	>400
Standard	m	Medium	±1°	±30’	±20’	±10’	±5’

General Tolerances of Perpendicularity

[mm]

Product lineup	Tolerance Grade	Nominal Length of the Shorter Edge
Product lineup	Symbol	≤100	>100 ≤300	>300 ≤1000	>1000 ≤5000
Standard	K	0.4	0.6	0.8	1

*This does not apply if Hardening is included in the process.

Geometric Tolerance Precision Standards for Lathe Machining

The following tolerance values are also guaranteed for hardening. However, this may not apply for certain product shapes (for example thin-walled products, long products and products with a large removal rate).

[mm]

	Geometric Tolerance Completed on One Side with Maximum Diameter as the Origin		Geometric Tolerance for Both Sides with Maximum Diameter as the Origin
	Outer Diameter	Inner Diameter	Outer Diameter	Inner Diameter	L (Full Length)	Standard
	Outer Diameter	Inner Diameter	Outer Diameter	Inner Diameter	L (Full Length)	K (Geometric Tolerance Value)
Perpendicularity					L ≦ 100	0.06
					100 < L ≦ 300	0.1
					300 < L ≦ 500	0.15
					L < 500	0.2
Concentricity					L ≦ 100	0.1
					100 < L ≦ 300	0.2
					300 < L ≦ 500	0.3
					L < 500	0.5
Parallelism					L ≦ 100	0.06
					100 < L ≦ 300	0.1
					300 < L ≦ 500	0.15
					L < 500	0.2
Circularity

*Circularity should be equal to the dimensional tolerance value for the diameter, but it must not exceed the specified tolerance value of circular runout in the radial direction.
Example 1: Circularity 0.1 for diameter 100 without tolerance
Example 2: Circularity 0.04 for diameter 100 ±0.02

Tip

Reasons for disparities in precision between one side and both sides

- ■ One side

- Workpiece does not need replacing and machining is completed in one direction

- ■ Both sides

- Workpiece needs replacing and machining is in two directions

General Tolerances of Straightness and Flatness

[mm]

Product lineup	Tolerance Grade	Nominal Length
Product lineup	Symbol	≤10	>10 ≤30	>30 ≤100	>100 ≤300	>300 ≤1000
Standard	K	0.05	0.1	0.2	0.4	0.6

*This does not apply if Hardening is included in the process.

Resin Precision Assurance

Unlike metal, resin is a material that easily changes shape or dimensions due to factors such as temperature and humidity. Due to this, precision assurance is performed under the following conditions:

· Inspections are performed in temperature-controlled environments (23 to 24℃).
· Precision assurance is based on the results of inspections performed immediately before shipment.

Surface Roughness

The surface roughness reference value is √Ra6.3 (√Rz25).
The surface roughness is displayed in the lower left corner of the 3D viewer and the roughness symbol can be changed in user settings.
You can select √Ra6.3/3.2 for surface roughness in User Settings > Initial Quotation Settings

Tip

As shown in the figure below, you can select the value for surface roughness from √Ra6.3/3.2 in the tree view.

Outer corners, cylinder inner edge, chamfered edge

Parts with an edge of less than C/R0.5 have a chamfer between C/R 0.1 to 0.4 mm.
If the inner edge of the cylinder is smaller than 0.5, the finishing of the edge is R0.4 mm.

Caution

The specification “no chamfer” is not supported.

External Thread and Internal Thread (mm)
External Thread and Internal Thread (inch)
Tapered Thread (ISO)
Insert Holes
Keyways
Precision Holes
Countersunk Holes
Pockets and Slotted Holes
Retaining ring

External Thread and Internal Thread (mm)

The list of supported external and internal threads is as follows.

Caution

Threads that are not listed in the specification table are not supported.

Caution

The automatic hole type recognition function is not supported for the inner diameter in round object machining. Configure the settings on 3D Viewer.
For differences between inner diameters and holes, please click here.→Design Guidelines＞Turning Parts Recognition Conditions＞Outer- and Inner Diameter Recognition Conditions

〇	External Thread and Internal Thread are available for Automatic quotation
⚫️	Tapped holes machined by MC are available for automatic quotation
△	Supported for automatic quotation upon acceptance of Quality Agreement *Since there are no bolts and nuts for inspection, products are machined using target values of metric thread standard dimensions and shipped without inspection
✖	Cannot be machined

*Internal thread: thread made on a lathe in the central axis
*Tapped Hole: Threads machined by MC not on the center axis
→Design Guidelines＞Turning Parts Recognition Conditions＞Outer- and Inner Diameter Recognition Conditions

Nominal Diameter	Model Diameter (ø) mm		Pitch1	External Thread		Internal Thread・Tapped Holes		Pitch2	External Thread		Internal Thread・Tapped Holes		Pitch3	External Thread		Internal Thread・Tapped Holes		Pitch4	External Thread		Internal Thread・Tapped Holes		Pitch5	External Thread		Internal Thread・Tapped Holes
Nominal Diameter	External Thread	Internal Thread	Pitch1	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Pitch2	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Pitch3	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Pitch4	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Pitch5	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread

M2	1.7~2	1.5～2	0.4	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	0.25	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M2.2	1.7～2.2	1.7～2.2	0.45	〇	△	〇⚫️	✖	0.25	〇	△	〇⚫️	✖
M2.5	2.2～2.5	2～2.5	0.45	〇	〇	〇⚫️	✖	0.35	〇	△	〇⚫️	✖
M3	2.6～3	2.4～3	0.5	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	0.35	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M3.5	3.1～3.5	2.8～3.5	0.6	〇	△	〇⚫️	△	0.35	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M4	3.5～4	3.2～4	0.7	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	0.5	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M4.5	4～4.5	3.6～4.5	0.75	〇	△	〇⚫️	△	0.5	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M5	4.4～5	4.1～5	0.8	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	0.5	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M5.5	5.1～5.5	4.9～5.5	0.5	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M6	5.3～6	4.9～6	1.0	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	0.75	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇
M7	6.3～7	5.9～7	1.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	△	0.75	〇	△	〇⚫️	✖
M8	7.1～8	6.6～8	1.25	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	1.0	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	0.75	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M9	8.1～9	7.6～9	1.25	〇	△	〇⚫️	△	1.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	△	0.75	〇	△	〇⚫️	✖
M10	9～10	8.3～10	1.5	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	1.25	〇	△	〇⚫️	〇	1.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	〇	0.75	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M11	10～11	9.3～11	1.5	〇	△	〇⚫️	△	1.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	✖	0.75	〇	△	〇⚫️	✖
M12	10.8～12	10.1～12	1.75	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	1.5	〇	〇	〇⚫️	△	1.25	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	1.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	〇
M14	12.7～14	11.8～14	2.0	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	1.5	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	1.25	〇	△	〇⚫️	△	1.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M15	14～15	13.3～15	1.5	〇	△	〇⚫️	△	1.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M16	14.7～16	13.8～16	2.0	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	1.5	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	1.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M17	16～17	15.3～17	1.5	〇	△	〇⚫️	△	1.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	△
M18	16.3～18	15.2～18	2.5	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	2.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	△	1.5	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	1.0	△	△	〇⚫️	△
M20	18.3～20	17.2～20	2.5	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	2.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	△	1.5	〇	〇	〇⚫️	〇	1.0	〇	△	〇⚫️	△

Nominal Diameter	Model Diameter (ø) mm		Pitch1	External Thread		Internal Thread		Pitch2	External Thread		Internal Thread		Pitch3	External Thread		Internal Thread		Pitch4	External Thread		Internal Thread		Pitch5	External Thread		Internal Thread
Nominal Diameter	External Thread	Internal Thread	Pitch1	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Pitch2	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Pitch3	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Pitch4	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Pitch5	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread

M22	20.3～22	19.2～22	2.5	〇	〇	〇	〇	2.0	〇	△	〇	△	1.5	〇	〇	〇	〇	1.0	〇	△	〇	△
M24	22～24	20.7～24	3.0	〇	〇	〇	〇	2.0	〇	〇	〇	△	1.5	〇	〇	〇	〇	1.0	〇	△	〇	△
M25	23.7～25	22.8～25	2.0	〇	△	〇	△	1.5	〇	△	〇	△	1.0	〇	〇	〇	△
M26	25～26	24.3～26	1.5	〇	△	〇	△
M27	25～27	23.7～27	3.0	〇	〇	〇	〇	2.0	〇	〇	〇	△	1.5	〇	〇	〇	△	1.0	〇	△	〇	△
M28	26.7～28	25.8～28	2.0	〇	△	〇	△	1.5	〇	△	〇	△	1.0	〇	△	〇	△
M30	27.7～30	26.2～30	3.5	〇	〇	〇	〇	3.0	〇	△	〇	△	2.0	〇	〇	〇	△	1.5	〇	〇	〇	〇	1.0	〇	△	〇	△
M32	30.7～32	29.8～32	2.0	〇	△	〇	△	1.5	〇	△	〇	△
M33	30.7～33	29.2～33	3.5	〇	〇	〇	〇	3.0	〇	△	△	△	2.0	〇	〇	〇	△	1.5	〇	△	〇	△
M35	34～35	33.3～35	1.5	〇	△	〇	△
M36	33.4～36	31.6～36	4.0	〇	〇	〇	〇	3.0	〇	△	〇	△	2.0	〇	〇	〇	〇	1.5	〇	△	〇	△
M38	37～38	36.3～38	1.5	〇	△	〇	△
M39	36.4～39	34.6～39	4.0	〇	〇	〇	〇	3.0	〇	△	〇	△	2.0	〇	△	〇	△	1.5	△	〇	△	△
M40	38～40	36.7～40	3.0	〇	△	△	〇	2.0	〇	△	〇	△	1.5	〇	△	〇	△
M42	39～42	37.1～42	4.5	〇	〇	〇	〇	4.0	〇	△	△	△	3.0	〇	〇	〇	△	2.0	〇	△	〇	△	1.5	△	△	〇	△
M45	42～45	40.1～45	4.5	〇	△	〇	〇	4.0	△	△	△	△	3.0	〇	△	〇	△	2.0	〇	△	〇	△	1.5	〇	△	〇	△
M48	44.7～48	42.5～48	5.0	〇	〇	〇	〇	4.0	△	△	△	△	3.0	〇	△	〇	△	2.0	〇	〇	〇	△	1.5	〇	△	〇	△
M50	48～50	46.7～50	3.0	△	△	△	△	2.0	△	△	△	△	1.5	△	△	〇	△

Notes

The automatic hole type recognition function is supported in the same way as for edged object machining.

External Thread and Internal Thread (inch)

The list of supported external and internal threads is as follows.
Inch threads are only compatible with right-hand threads.

◯	External Thread and Internal Thread are available for Automatic quotation
⚫️	Tapped holes machined by MC are available for automatic quotation
△	Supported for automatic quotation upon acceptance of Quality Agreement *Since there are no bolts and nuts for inspection, products are machined using target values of metric thread standard dimensions and shipped without inspection
✖	Cannot be machined

Nominal Diameter	Model Diameter (ø) mm	Thread Type	External Thread		Internal Thread
Nominal Diameter	External Thread / Internal Thread	Thread Type	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread	Right-Hand Thread	Left-Hand Thread

#2-56	1.96～2.19	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#2-64	1.75～2.19	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#3-48	1.94～2.52	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#3-56	2.02～2.52	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#4-40	2.15～2.85	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#4-48	2.12～2.85	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#5-40	2.48～3.18	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#5-44	2.55～3.18	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#6-32	2.64～3.51	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#6-40	2.81～3.51	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#8-32	3.3～4.17	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#8-36	3.4～4.17	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#10-24	3.68～4.83	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#10-32	3.96～4.83	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#12-24	4.34～5.49	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
#12-28	4.49～5.49	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
1/4-20	4.97～6.35	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
1/4-28	5.35～6.35	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
5/16-18	6.4～7.94	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
5/16-24	6.78～7.94	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
3/8-16	7.79～9.53	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
3/8-24	8.37～9.53	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
7/16-14	9.14～11.12	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
7/16-20	9.72～11.12	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
1/2-13	10.58～12.7	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
1/2-20	11.32～12.7	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
9/16-12	11.98～14.29	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
9/16-18	12.75～14.29	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
5/8-11	13.37～15.88	UNC	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
5/8ｰ18	14.27～15.88	UNF	◯	✖	◯⚫️	✖
3/4-10	16.29～19.05	UNC	◯	✖	◯	✖
3/4-16	17.32～19.05	UNF	◯	✖	◯	✖
1-8	21.96～25.4	UNC	◯	✖	◯	✖
1-12	23.11～25.4	UNF	◯	✖	◯	✖

Tapered External Thread and Internal Thread (ISO)

The following is a list of available tapered pipe thread sizes.
G (parallel pipe thread), Rp (parallel internal tapered pipe thread), etc. are not available.

◯	automatic quoting available
✖	Cannot be machined(Manual quotation)

Nominal diameter	Model Diameter	ISO Standard Effective Length	External Thread	Nominal diameter	Model Diameter	ISO Standard Effective Depth		Internal Thread
Nominal diameter	Model Diameter	ISO Standard Effective Length	External Thread	Nominal diameter	Model Diameter	With incomplete threads	Only with complete threads	Internal Thread

R1/16	5.44~8.01	6.4	〇	Rc1/16	5.44~8.07	6.2	4.40	〇
R1/8	8.02~10.42	6.4	〇	Rc 1/8	8.08~10.49	6.2	4.4	〇
R1/4	10.43~13.85	9.7	〇	Rc 1/4	10.5~13.97	9.4	6.7	〇
R3/8	13.86~17.41	10.0	〇	Rc 3/8	13.98~17.52	9.7	7.0	〇
R1/2	17.42~21.70	13.1	〇	Rc 1/2	17.53~21.96	12.7	9.1	〇
R3/4	22.82~27.14	14.5	〇	Rc 3/4	22.97~27.44	14.1	10.2	〇
R1	28.97~33.92	16.7	〇	Rc 1	29~34.25	16.2	11.6	〇
R11/4	37.56~42.51	19.1	〇	Rc 11/4	37.81~42.91	18.5	13.4	〇
R11/2	43.45~48.41	19.1	〇	Rc 11/2	43.7~48.8	18.5	13.4	〇
R2	55.16~60.12	23.3	×	Rc 2	55.66~60.61	22.8	16.9	×
R2 1/2	70.68~75.64	26.6	×	Rc 2 1/2	71.23~76.18	26.7	18.6	×
R3	83.28~88.24	29.8	×	Rc 3	83.93~89.1	29.8	21.1	×
R4	107.08~112.04	35.8	×	Rc4	109.15~114.63	35.8	25.9	×
R5	132.21~137.17	40.0	×	Rc 5	134.47~140.5	40.1	29.3	×
R6	157.61~162.57	40.0	×	Rc 6	159.87~166.0	40.1	29.3	×

Tip

Thread length is automatically quoted using ISO standard lengths. Tapered pipe threads must pass a gauge inspection before the product is shipped.

Please request a Manual Quotation if a length other than the standard is required.

Caution

Model the taper into the part. The angle for tapered pipe threads can be specified between 0° and 2.5° with respect to the center axis.

Caution

The diameter of the taper in the model is determined as shown in the figure below for external and internal threads. The diameter sizes recognized by meviy follow ISO standards.

(Reference) Tapered Pipe Threads (Excerpt from JIS B 0203:1999)

Insert Holes

When the quoted material is aluminum・Resin in Settings for Insert Holes, the insert can be selected using the logic equivalent to that used for inner diameter internal thread recognition for round object machining.
The insert material is 1.4301 Stainless Steel.
There are four nominal lengths for each diameter: 0.5D, 1D, 1.5D and 2D.
Inch threads are not compatible.

Material of insert : EN 1.4301 equiv.

[mm]

Insert	Pitch
Nominal Diameter	Pitch
M2	0.4
M2.5	0.45
M3	0.5
M4	0.7
M5	0.8
M6	1.0
M8	1.25
M10	1.5
M12	1.75

Keyways

For keyways that match the JIS (B 1301:1996), tolerances are automatically set and can be changed in the dialog.
*The default settings can be customised in user settings.

[mm]

b1 and b2 Key Dimensions	b1 Tolerance			b2 Tolerance			t1 Key Dimensions	t1 Tolerance	t2 Key Dimensions	t2 Tolerance
b1 and b2 Key Dimensions	P9	N9	H9	P9	Js9	D10	t1 Key Dimensions	t1 Tolerance	t2 Key Dimensions	t2 Tolerance
2	-0.006 -0.031	-0.004 -0.029	+0.025 0	-0.006 -0.031	±0.0125	+0.060 +0.020	1.2	+0.1 0	1.0	+0.1 0
3	-0.006 -0.031	-0.004 -0.029	+0.025 0	-0.006 -0.031	±0.0125	+0.060 +0.020	1.8		1.4
4	-0.012 -0.042	0 -0.030	+0.030 0	-0.012 -0.042	±0.0150	+0.078 +0.030	2.5		1.8
5							3.0		2.3
6							3.5		2.8
8	-0.015 -0.051	0 -0.036	+0.036 0	-0.015 -0.051	±0.0180	+0.098 +0.040	4.0	+0.2 0	3.3	+0.2 0
10	-0.015 -0.051	0 -0.036	+0.036 0	-0.015 -0.051	±0.0180	+0.098 +0.040	5.0
12	-0.018 -0.061	0 -0.043	+0.043 0	-0.018 -0.061	±0.0215	+0.120 +0.050	5.0
14							5.5		3.8
16							6.0		4.3
18							7.0		4.4
20	-0.022 -0.074	0 -0.052	+0.052 0	-0.022 -0.074	±0.0260	+0.149 +0.065	7.5		4.9
22							9.0		5.4
25							9.0		5.4
28							10		6.4
32	-0.026 -0.088	0 -0.062	+0.062 0	-0.026 -0.088	±0.0310	+0.180 +0.080	11		7.4

Precision Holes

Precision holes are straight holes with either a fit tolerance, a bidirectional tolerance, or a unidirectional tolerance selected for the hole diameter tolerance.
The accuracy and effective depth for the diameter can be specified with precision holes.

Accuracy ranges supported for automatic quotation

[mm]

Diameter		Accuracy Range
>	≤	Fit Tolerance	Bidirectional Tolerance< Minimum Value	Unidirectional Tolerance Minimum Value (Range)
2.999	3	Grade IT7 or higher	0.005	0.01
3	6		0.006	0.012
6	10		0.008	0.015
10	18		0.009	0.018
18	30		0.011	0.021
30	50		0.013	0.025
50	80		0.015	0.03
80	120		0.018	0.035
120	180		0.02	0.04
180	250		0.023	0.046
250	315		0.026	0.052
315	400		0.029	0.057
400	500		0.032	0.063

Countersunk Holes

Holes with the following shapes on the right and left end faces are recognised as countersunk holes.　

*Countersunk hole shapes modelled on the cylinder side are not recognised as countersunk holes.
・ Countersunk (on a conical shape) angle is 90°
・ d is 3.0 mm or more
・D/d: When d ≧ 4.0 mm, D > 1.4 d
　　　 When d < 4.0 mm, D > 1.7 d

Pockets and Slotted Holes

Compatible range of pockets and slotted holes

Shape type	No tolerance	Tolerance range
Shape type	No tolerance	0.1～（±0.05～）	0.04～（±0.02～）
Negative groove	ℓ ≥ 0.5mm	ℓ ≥ 0.5mm	ー
Other pockets	ℓ ≥ 2mm	ℓ ≥ 2mm	ℓ ≥ 2mm
Slotted Holes / Keyways	ℓ ≥ 2mm	ℓ ≥ 2mm	ℓ ≥ 3mm

Retaining ring

Required groove width for retaining rings

Retaining Rings / External / C-Type

Applicable axis

Retaining Rings / Internal / C-Type

Applicable grooving

Reference values for C-Type retaining ring “t,” “m,” and “Corner R”
t: Retaining ring width	m: Required groove width	Corner R
1	1.15	R0.1 or less
1.25	1.35	R0.1 or less
1.5	1.65	R0.15 or less
1.75	1.9	R0.15 or less
2	2.2	R0.2 or less
2.5	2.7
3	3.2
4	4.2

Notes

It is recommended that diameters d1 and d2 are designed to meet the standard for C-type retaining rings.
*E-type rings for small diameters are not available

Fit Tolerances
Dimensional Tolerances for Full Length (L) and Length (ℓ)
Tolerances for Groove Outer Diameter (D), Groove Width (w) and Position Dimensions (ℓ)
Tolerances for Groove Outer Diameter (D), Groove Width (w) and Position Dimensions (ℓ)
Tolerances for Each Part
Geometric Tolerance

When uploading 3D CAD data, you can specify any dimensional tolerances for parts where dimensions and tolerances are not displayed.
The minimum specifiable tolerance range for tolerances depends on the combination of the part shape.
Depending on other settings, in-range precision may not be covered by the service.

Fit Tolerances

The fit tolerances that can be set for turning machining and secondary machining are as follows.

Type of Machining	Fit Tolerances
turning	Metal: Grade IT6 or above
turning	Resin：：Grade IT7 or above
MC (Secondary Machining)	Metal: Grade IT7 or above
MC (Secondary Machining)	Resin：：Grade IT7 or above

Caution

“The following surface treatments cannot be specified with a tolerance range of less than 0.1.”
Surface Treatment｜Trivalent Chromated (clear),Trivalent Chromated (black), Salt Bath Nitriding, Hard Anodized (Clear)

Dimensional Tolerances for Full Length (L) and Length (ℓ)

The following tolerances can be specified for the total length and the length of the individual parts.

[mm]

Metal	Full Length (L) and Length (ℓ)
Metal	Example of Minimum Tolerance	Range
L,ℓ ≦ 200 *	±0.02	0.04
200 ＜L,ℓ ≦ 500	±0.05	0.1
500 ＜ L,ℓ	±0.2	0.4

*The range that can be set will change for the following thin plates.

Metal		Full Length (L) and Length (ℓ)
Metal		Example of Minimum Tolerance	Range
L ≦ 5	150＜D	±0.1	0.2
L＜10	50 ≦ D	±0.1	0.2

Resin	Full Length (L) and Length (ℓ)
Resin	Example of Minimum Tolerance	Range
L,ℓ ≦ 100	±0.05	0.1
100＜ L,ℓ ≦ 200	±0.1	0.2
200＜ L,ℓ ≦ 300	±0.2	0.4

[mm]

Resin	Full Length (L) and Length (ℓ)
Resin	min. Tolerance	Range
L,ℓ ≦ 100	±0.05	0.1
100 < L, ℓ ≦ 200	±0.1	0.2
200 < L, ℓ ≦ 300	±0.2	0.4

Resin	Full Length (L) and Length (ℓ)
Resin	Example of Minimum Tolerance	Range
L,ℓ ≦ 100	±0.05	0.1
100＜ L,ℓ ≦ 200	±0.1	0.2
200＜ L,ℓ ≦ 300	±0.2	0.4

Tolerances for Groove Outer Diameter (D), Groove Width (w) and Position Dimensions (ℓ)

The tolerances that can be set for the outer diameter are as follows.

[mm]

Tolerances for Groove Outer Diameter (D)	Minimum Tolerance	Range
Uniform	±0.02	0.04

Groove Width (w)	Minimum Tolerance	Range
Uniform	±0.05	0.1

Position Dimensions (ℓ)	Minimum Tolerance	Range
ℓ≦150	±0.05	0.1
150＜ℓ≦400	±0.15	0.3
400＜ℓ	±0.3	0.6

*Tolerance between inner and outer diameter surfaces cannot be added.

Tolerances for Groove Outer Diameter (D), Groove Width (w) and Position Dimensions (ℓ)

The tolerances that can be set for the inner diameter are as follows.

[mm]

Tolerances for Groove Inner Diameter (d)	Minimum Tolerance	Range
Tolerances for Groove Inner Diameter (d)	±0.05	0.1

Groove Width (w)	Minimum Tolerance	Range
Groove Width (w)	±0.07	0.14

Position Dimensions (ℓ)	Minimum Tolerance	Range
Position Dimensions (ℓ)	±0.1	0.2

*Tolerance between internal groove and other elements cannot be added.
However, position dimensions from the ℓ part end face are excluded.

Tolerances for Each Part

The tolerances that can be set between each shape element are as follows.

[mm]

No	Shape Element	(2) Outer Diameter Side/(3)External Groove Side/(4)Pocket Surface	(5) Inner Diameter Bottom	(6) Internal Groove Side
(1)	Both End Faces	0.04～	0.04～	0.04～
(2)	Outer Diameter Side		0.04～	0.04～
(3)	External Groove Side		–	–
(4)	Pocket Surface			–
(5)	Inner Diameter Bottom	–		0.04～
(6)	Internal Groove Side	–	0.04～	0.04～

[mm]

No	Shape Element	(7)Precision Hole Centre	(8)Straight Hole Centre/(9)Tapped Hole Centre/(10)Insert Hole Centre/(11)Countersunk Hole Centre	(12)Slotted Hole/Keyway
(1)	Center axis	0.04～	0.2～	–
(2)	Both end faces			0.04～
(3)	Outer Diameter Side
(4)	External Groove Side	–
(5)	Pocket side face	0.04～
(6)	Pocket bottom face			–
(7)	Precision Hole Centre		0.2～	0.04～
(8)	Straight Hole Centre	0.2～		0.2～
(9)	Tapped Hole Centre
(10)	Insert Hole Centre
(11)	Countersunk Hole Centre
(12)	Slotted Hole/Keyway	0.04～		0.04～

Tip

- (1) Holes on the same circumference are called P.C.D. (Pitch Circle Diameter). Cross bores are not supported.
- (2) P.C.D is recognized even with different hole types.
- (3) P.C.D. is recognised regardless of whether the positions of the holes are equally or unequally divided.
- (4) It is possible to add diagonal dimensions that indicate the distance between the holes and the P.C.D.

P.C.D. Equally divided	P.C.D. Unequally divided	The distance between P.C.D. holes.

Caution

The P.C.D. recognition is an additional and reference information in meviy for turning parts.
If you need to specify the tolerance between holes, please select the “Add tolerance” icon and specify the tolerance for the target position.

Tip

The positional relationship of holes on both end faces of the reference model in the figure below is a general tolerance.

Notes

3D Model Color Schemes
If a colour scheme for an unsupported shape is displayed, automatic quotation is not available.

Geometric Tolerance

Possible geometric tolerance setting conditions are as follows.

configurable plane

Holes, keyways (inner diameter/outer diameter), notches (including pockets), inner diameter grooves, and end grooves cannot be specified.
If a datum or geometric tolerance is specified for the threaded part, we guarantee it based on the measured value before threading.

Configurable geometric tolerances

*Depending on the material and size, the estimate may be provided by the person in charge.

Geometric Tolerance Type	Plane	Cylindrical surface	Datum	Datum target area	Tolerance value
Flatness	〇	–	–	surface	0.01～0.1
Parallelism	〇	–	necessary	surface	0.01～0.1
Perpendicularity	〇	〇	necessary	surface	0.01～0.1
Circularity	–	〇	–	surface	0.01～0.1
Concentricity	–	〇	necessary	axis line	0.01～0.1
Straightness	–	〇	–	surface	0.01～0.1
Cylindricity	–	〇	–	surface	0.01～0.1
Circular rount	–	〇	necessary	axis line	0.01～0.1
Total runou	–	〇	necessary	axis line	0.01～0.1

Compatibility table (surface treatment)

	Surface Treatment	availability

Steel	Electroless nickel	〇
	Hard chrome plating (Flash Plating)	〇
	Black oxide	〇
	Trivalent chromate (Clear)	×
	Trivalent chromate (Black)	×
	Salt bath nitriding	〇
	LTBC- surface treatment	×
	Phosphating (Manganese)	〇
Stainless Steel	ー
Aluminum	Clear anodize	〇
	Black anodize	〇
	Black anodize (Matt)	〇
	Hard anodize (Clear)	×
Copper	ー
Resin	ー

*Resin conforms to [Geometric Tolerance Accuracy Standards for Lathe Machining] >>> Normal tolerance standard for machining dimensions without instructions
*Hard chrome (flash) and isonite may be ground after surface treatment depending on the precision, in which case no film will remain on the processed area.

Dimensional value decimal places are rounded and displayed as follows:
The dimension values displayed in the 3D Viewer are exact for machining.

Applicable Areas | Outer Diameter, Inner Diameter, Full Length, Holes and Additional Dimensions

Tolerance	Number of Digits Displayed	Description

General Tolerance	0.00	When modelled with diameter 5.12345 and full length 9.12345
±0.1	0.00	When tolerance ±0.1 is set with diameter 5.12345 and full length 9.12345
±0.05	0.00	When tolerance ±0.05 is set with diameter 5.12345 and full length 9.12345
Fit Tolerance	0.000	When fit tolerance g6 is set with diameter 5.12345 and full length 9.12345 *Rules cannot be assigned with full length and additional dimensions.

Maximum workpiece size

	Ｌ	Ｄ
①Cylindrical surface	300mm	ø115
②End Face	115ｍｍ	ø300

Possible locations for setting engraving

It is possible to select cylindrical and flat surfaces for engraving.

Character Specifications

Half-width alphanumeric characters and some symbols (+-. #$%&()=*:? /_~ø) can be freely entered.
*Line feed and space input are also supported.

Character size	3-15mm（Can be specified with 1 mm pitch）
Character size	17.5-30mm（Can be specified with 2.5 mm pitch）

*Font (font, spacing) and line spacing cannot be specified.

*The letter size of the engraving are only reference values. DimSensional accuracy is not guaranteed.

The size definition of the engraved characters is as follows.

i.e., When specifying a font size of 10mm

Angle description

The angle can be specified in 45 degree steps (0 to 360 degrees).
　*The angle is only a rough standard value. Angle accuracy is not guaranteed.

Appearance of engraving

CNC Turning products use laser engraving.

No surface treatment

Material: EN 1.4301 equiv.

With surface treatment

Material: EN AW−5056 equiv.
Surface Treatment: Black anodize

Quality Control

Quality precautions for engraving

1. Burrs and burn marks may occur on the engraving area.
2. Some characters may be smashed if a 3 to 5 mm engraving character size is specified.
3. Depending on the material and surface treatment, there is a possibility that the engraving characters may become blurred.
4 The letter size and angle of the engraving are only reference values. DimSensional accuracy is not guaranteed.
5. Depending on the content of the characters, there may be cases where the size differs from the specified size
6. Depending on the total length of the engraving, there is a possibility of discrepancies in letter spacing and height (ref.: 90 mm or more).

Inspection Items
Geometric Tolerance Inspection Equipment
Packaging

Inspection Items

Dimensional tolerance inspection for inner diameter

Measurement with an inner diameter micrometer

Dimensional tolerance inspection for outer diameter

Measurement with a micrometer

Dimensional tolerance inspection for length

Measurement with a vernier caliper

Fit tolerance inspection

Using a limit plug gauge or pin gauge

Internal and External Thread

In principle, an ISO2 (JIS B 2025) equivalent bolt or nut should be used

Visual inspection

Measured with roughness measurement equipment, dot gauge, and surface roughness tester

Inspection of tapered pipe threads

Inspection using plug gauges (Rc) and ring gauges (R)

Geometric Tolerance Inspection Equipment

Geometric tolerance specifications will be measured using the following inspection equipment.
*The test method cannot be specified.
*Measurement may vary by factory.
*The inspection sheet is not included.

Eccentricity test

Inspection with an eccentric measuring instrument

Thickness Gauge Inspection

Inspection with a thickness gauge on a surface plate

Dial Height Gauge Inspection

Inspection using a dial height gauge on the top of the part

Circularity inspection

Inspection with Circularity measurement machine

Coordinate measuring machine inspection

Inspection with a coordinate measuring machine

Packaging

Examples of packaging materials

Caution

For steel products without surface treatment and rust-prone treatments such as Black oxide, rust-preventive oil is applied before delivery, but rust may still occur depending on storage conditions. Please unpack and inspect the products immediately upon receipt.

Packing for Delivery

Product and drawings are enclosed in bubble wrap

Tack label attached

Packing for Delivery (single item)

Packing for Delivery (multiple items)

Caution

You need to dispose the wooden pallet and receive the product by forklift.

Please write your delivery address in the comment field when requesting a manual quote.

Appearance Quality Control Range
Surface Treatment Quality Standards
Quenching Quality Standards
Conditions of Use for Standard Materials (Polished bars and Cold finished material)
Applicable conditions for Hexagonal rod

Appearance Quality

Machining surface (outer diameter)

EN AW−5056 Equiv.

EN 1.1191 Equiv.

Notes

There will be no scratches of more than 0.7 mm on the surface.
Surface roughness: √Ra6.3 [√Rz25]
Depending on the material and size, the product may be supplied with an untreated surface.(polishing and rolling). Please see below for details.
See below for more details → [FA Mechanical Parts] Turning Parts＞Conditions of Use for Standard Materials (Polished bars and Cold finished material)

Machining surface (inner diameter)

EN 1.1191 Equiv.

EN 1.4301 Equiv.

Milling face

EN 1.1191 Equiv.

EN 1.4301 Equiv.

Caution

Machining marks may remain.

Cut off

Cutting

Wire Cutting

Caution

Processing method cannot be specified.

Wire-Cut EDM Surfaces

Wire-cut EDM surface

Enlarged view: Wire-cut EDM surface

Because it is a fusion cutting process in which the metal is melted and cut by discharges from electrodes, the surface is not glossy.

Surface Treatment Quality Standards

Caution

Since it is difficult to check the coating thickness for small diameter precision holes, etc., additional machining may be performed after machining, so the surface treatment cannot remain on the cut surface.
The surface treatment may not remain on the inside of holes as holes may be masked.
Surface treatment suspension and electrode contact marks may remain on the product.

To ensure contact for the following applicable surface treatments, at least one hanging shape from (1) to (5) above is required.
If there is no feature in the model for hanging the part, a through-hole will be made at any position for hanging.

Surface Treatment	Hanging Holes
Electroless Nickel Plating	ー
Hard Chrome	Target
Trivalent Chromate (Clear)	Target
Trivalent Chromate (Black)	Target
Black Oxide	ー
Salt-Bath Soft Nitriding	ー
Low Temperature Black Chrome	Target
Phosphating	ー
Clear Anodize	Target
Black Anodize	Target
Black Anodize (Matte)	Target
Hard Anodize (clear)	Target
Passivation	Target


Hard Chrome	Trivalent Chromate (Clear)	Trivalent Chromate (Black)	Low Temperature Black Chrome

Clear Anodize	Black Anodize	Black Anodize (Matte)	Hard Anodize (clear)

Passivation

Quenching Quality Standards

About hardening quality assurance

The hardness value specified is guaranteed and will be measured and confirmed before shipping.

Appearance after quenching

After quenching

Blast Finish

Grinding finishing (outer diameter)

Grinding finishing (inner diameter)

Caution

The surface can be cleaned by sandblasting after hardening. The accuracy is not reduced by this process.
The photo shows sandblasting, but in some cases shotblasting can also be used. The blasting method cannot be specified.
If there are tolerances for the outer and inner diameters, grinding may be included the finishing process. In this case, the appearance will change as shown in the figure above.
Grinding cannot be specified. Whether to grind is decided in the factory under the aspect of quality assurance.
The threads will also be hardened. Depending on the application, the thread may be damaged. If you do not want the thread to be hardened, please specify Selective Hardening (Induction Hardening) to select an area that does not include the thread.
Hardness measurement marks may remain in areas where surface roughness is not specified or near the center of the end face of the part. To confirm the inspection points in advance, please add information in the comments and request a manual quote

Induction Hardening

Caution

・Grinding may be performed to guarantee accuracy for tolerances on the outer or inner diameter. The appearance of ground surfaces will be as shown in the above figure.
・Grinding cannot be specified. The factory will determine if grinding is necessary to guarantee dimensional accuracy.
・A hardened depth of 1mm or more into the part surface is guaranteed. The hardened depth may be 1.5 mm or more.
・The hardened depth cannot be specified.
・The Induction Hardening process may also harden edges and surfaces adjacent to the surface specified for hardening.

Conditions of Use for Standard Materials (Polished bars and Cold finished material)

If the maximum diameter is applicable for a standard material, the standard material is used at the factory’s discretion and the appearance will be different.

Machined

Cold finished material

Polished bar

Selection conditions for standard materials

		Tolerance
		IT6	g6, h7	h9	Other (IT7 or above, general tolerance, etc.)
Surface Roughness	Ra6.3	Machined	Polished bar or Machined	Polished bar, Cold finished material, or Machined	Polished bar, Cold finished material, or Machined
	Ra3.2	Machined	Polished bar or Machined	Polished bar, Cold finished material, or Machined	Polished bar, Cold finished material, or Machined
	Ra1.6	Machined	Polished bar or Machined	Machined	Polished bar or Machined

Standard material correspondence table

Material	Machined	Cold finished material(h9)	Polished bar(g6, h7)

EN 1.1191 equiv.	〇	〇	〇
EN 1.0038 equiv.	〇	〇
EN 1.7220 equiv.	〇
EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32 HRC)	〇
EN 1.2825 equiv.	〇
EN 1.2379 equiv. annealed	〇
EN 1.2344 equiv.	〇
EN 1.3505 equiv.	〇
EN AW−2017 equiv.	〇
EN AW-5052 equiv.	〇
EN AW−5056 equiv.	〇
EN AW−6061 equiv.	〇
EN AW−7075 equiv.	〇
EN 1.4305 equiv.	〇		〇
EN 1.4301 equiv.	〇		〇
EN 1.4401 equiv.	〇		〇
EN 1.4404 equiv.	〇
1.4125 equiv. annealed	〇
Brass C3604-LCd	〇
POM (white, black)	〇
MC Nylon (blue,black ash)	〇
ABS (natural color, black)	〇
PEEK (grey-brown)	〇
PC (transparent, black)	〇
PP (Standard, natural color)	〇
PPS (transparent, natural color)	〇
Acrylic (Standard, transparent)	〇
UHMWPE (white)	〇
PVC(grey)	〇

Round bar specification table

Material	Maximum Diameter (h9)

EN 1.0038 equiv.	diameter 3 to diameter 30 (1 mm increments)
	ø32
	ø34
	ø35
	ø36
	ø38
	ø40
	ø42
	ø44
	ø45
	ø46
	ø48
	ø50
	ø52
	ø55
	ø56
	ø58
	ø60
	ø65
	ø70
	ø75
	ø80
	ø85
	ø90
	ø95
	ø100
	ø105
	ø110
	ø115
	ø120
	ø125
	ø130
	ø140
	ø150

Material	Maximum Diameter (g6, h7, h9)

EN 1.1191 equiv.	ø3～ø30 (1 mm increments)
	ø32
	ø34
	ø35
	ø36
	ø38
	ø40
	ø42
	ø44
	ø45
	ø46
	ø48
	ø50

Material	Maximum Diameter (h9)

EN 1.1191 equiv.	ø52
	ø55
	ø60
	ø65
	ø70
	ø75
	ø80
	ø85
	ø90
	ø95
	ø100
	ø110
	ø120
	ø130
	ø140
	ø150

Material	Maximum Diameter (g6, h7)

EN 1.4305 equiv. EN 1.4301 equiv. EN 1.4401 equiv.	ø3~ø18(1 mm increments)
	ø20~ø26(1 mm increments)
	ø28
	ø30
	ø32
	ø35
	ø36
	ø38
	ø40
	ø42
	ø45
	ø50

Material	Maximum Diameter (h9)

EN 1.4305 equiv. EN 1.4301 equiv. EN 1.4401 equiv.	ø55
	ø60
	ø65
	ø70
	ø75
	ø80
	ø85
	ø90
	ø95
	ø100

Material	Maximum Diameter (h9)
EN 1.7220 equiv.	ø4~ø12(1 mm increments)
	ø12.7
	ø13~ø21(1 mm increments)
	ø22
	ø24
	ø25
	ø26
	ø28
	ø30
	ø32
	ø35
	ø40
	ø45
	ø50

Caution

If it is not included in the standard table, it will be shaved.
For others, the raw material is more likely to be chosen as the standard material.

Tip

What is maximum diameter?

The maximum diameter refers to the largest diameter on the cylindrical surface of the product. (highlighted in light blue)
Even if the surface is divided by a groove as shown in Example 3, the surface is recognised as a single element if it has the same diameter.

Figure 1

Figure 2

Figure 3

Applicable conditions for Hexagonal rod

If the distance across the flats of the hexagon matches a standard size, it is processed with hexagonal bar stock and shipped.

Hexagonal surfaces may be scratched because they are stock, unmachined surfaces.

Example (1)

Example (2)

What is the distance across the flats?

The distance between two opposite sides of a hexagon.

Hexagonal rod standards and specifications table

		Material
								Tolerance(h12)		Tolerance
		EN 1.1191 equiv.	EN 1.0038 equiv.	EN 1.7220 equiv.	EN 1.4305 equiv.	EN 1.4301 equiv.	EN 1.4401 equiv.	Tolerance(h12)	Brass C3604-LCd	Tolerance

Distance across the flats	6	〇	〇	×	〇	〇	×	0 -0.15	〇	±0.06
	7	〇	〇	×	〇	〇	〇		〇	±0.08
	8	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇		×
	9	〇	〇	×	×	×	×		×
	10	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	0 -0.18	〇
	12	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇		〇	±0.11
	13	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇		×
	14	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇		〇
	17	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇		〇
	19	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	0 -0.21	〇
	21	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇		×	±0.18
	22	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇		〇
	23	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇		×
	24	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇		〇
	26	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇		〇
	27	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇	〇		〇
	29	〇	〇	×	〇	〇	〇		×
	30	〇	〇	×	〇	〇	〇	0 -0.25	〇
	32	〇	〇	×	〇	〇	〇		〇
	35	〇	〇	×	〇	〇	〇		〇
	36	〇	〇	×	〇	〇	〇		×

meviy is a next-generation manufacturing platform which allows you to receive instant quotations simply by uploading 3D CAD data to meviy. A significant reduction in the delivery time means a drastic improvement in efficiency for designers and purchasing departments. In addition to cutting, sheet metal and lathe-turning based machining processes, a diverse range of materials and surface treatments are supported. The meviy platform supports jigs and machinery, product development and die design processes.

FA Mechanical Parts (Factory Automation):

Find a wide range of FA equipment parts; from sheet metal parts to machined plates. → FA Mechanical Parts Service

Follow the procedure detailed below to receive quotes and place orders using 3D data on the meviy platform.

Procedure for Using the FA Mechanical Parts Service

Step 1: Upload 3D CAD Data

Upload the 3D CAD data for the part you want to fabricate to the meviy platform.: → Uploading 3D Data
The uploaded data is analyzed by meviy and the production and machining processes determined automatically.
Data for which the analysis has been complete is displayed as a “Project” in the project list screen.: → Viewing the Project List Screen

Step 2: Configure the Quote Specifications

Set the quantity, materials, surface treatment, hole type, dimensional tolerance and customer PO number (user-defined)*1 , and request a quote.

*1 This may be required for some accounts.

→ [FA Sheet Metal] Quotation Settings

→ [FA Machining] Quotation Settings

Step 3: Finalize Quote and Issue Part Number

Confirm the results of the quote and issue the part number if there are no issues (if any points for approval are acceptable).: → [FA Sheet Metal] Quotation Settings > Finalizing Quotes (Obtaining Part Numbers) / Confirming; → [FA Machining] Quotation Settings > Finalizing Quotes (Obtaining Part Numbers) / Confirming

Step 4: Order

Orders can be made from both the meviy screen and Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog).: → Ordering from Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog); → Ordering from meviy

[FA Mechanical Parts] Sheet Metal Parts

Plate

Round shape

L-shape

Z-shape

convex-shape

U-shape

Angle bending (L-shape)

Multiple angle bending

Tab

Cutout in bending

Partial bending with cutout

Cutout (rectangular)

Cutout (U-shape)

Notching

*Depending on the exact shape or dimensions, it may not be possible to machine the above shapes. We will contact you if we find that we are unable to manufacture the part after you have placed your order.

[FA Mechanical Parts] Cutting Parts

This is available for parts that can be machined using a 3-axis machining center.

Machining Method

The machining direction can be perpendicular and parallel to the 6 rectangular faces.
Machining at an angle against the direction of the rectangular faces requires dedicated equipment and is not possible with meviy.

*With 3-axis milling, it is not possible to machine at angles that run diagonal to the 6 faces.

[FA Mechanical Parts] Turning Parts

Turning Parts is a service that supports not only lathe machining for inner and outer diameter machining, groove machining and threading, but also supports machining and wire cutting for shapes that require additional machining.
The applicable shapes are as follows. The range of supported shapes will be expanded soon.

Outer Diameter Machining

Inner Diameter Machining

Groove Outer Diameter

Groove Inner Diameter

Internal Thread*

External Thread*

*Threads that have been fully modelled cannot be recognized.

Hole

External Keyway

Internal Keyway

Notch (Pocket)

End Face Groove*

*The bottom curve is provided by manual quotation.

Caution

*Depending on the shape or dimensions, it may not be possible to machine the above shapes.

The meviy platform supports a variety of 3D CAD formats.

Format	Extension	FA Mechanical Parts
Autodesk Inventor 2025 or earlier version	.ipt	✓
CATIA V5-6R2024 or earlier version	.CATPart	✓
Creo – Pro/E Pro/E 19.0-Creo 11.0	.prt/.neu/.xpr	✓
NX – Unigraphics UG11 to UG18, UG NX, NX5 to NX12, NX1847 to NX2406	.prt	✓
Solid Edge V19-20/ST10 or earlier version/2025	.par/.pwd	✓
SOLIDWORKS 2025 or earlier version	.sldprt	✓
I-deas	.arc/.unv	✓
iCAD SX V8L4 or earlier version	.icd	✓

Caution

Information that are hidden in the model file are excluded from loading into meviy and quotation.

Caution

Model files with the Security Passport setting enabled cannot be imported or quoted with meviy.

Neutral Formats

Format	Extension	FA Mechanical Parts
STEP(AP203, AP214)	.step/.stp	✓
Parasolid 36.1 or earlier version	.x_t/.x_b/.xmt/.xmt_txt	✓
ACIS 2023 or earlier version	.sat/.sab	✓
JT 10.9 or earlier version	.jt	✓
PRC	.prc	✓

Caution

The maximum file size that can be uploaded to meviy at the same time is 10 MB.

Versions to be added

We plan to support various new CAD software versions with meviy starting June 14th (Sunday) as detailed below.

Please note that you can continue to use your current version.

CAD Type	Extension	Version
CATIA V5	.CATPart	V5_6R2025
Creo	.prt / .neu/ .xpr	12
Autodesk Inventor	.ipt	2026
NX	.prt	2512
Parasolid	.x_t / .x_b / .xmt / .xmt_txt	38
SOLIDWORKS	.sldprt	2026

System Requirements

OS: Windows 11
RAM: 8GB or more recommended
Display: 1,920 × 1,080 or higher recommended (Recommended magnification for display and browser is 100%.)
Browser: Google Chrome, Microsoft Edge

*Content may not display or function properly if you do not use the recommended operating environment (e.g. Firefox or other browser).
*The latest version of Google Chrome and Microsoft Edge are supported.

Uploadable Data

Click Uploadable CAD File Formats for details on the CAD data that can be uploaded.

Caution

The maximum file size that can be uploaded to meviy at the same time is 10 MB.

You will need a User ID in order to use the meviy platform. Please create an account if you do not already have a User ID.

Click [Create a new account] on the login screen.
Enter the required information to create an account.

Notes

You can also create a new account by clicking here.
Click [Login] on the homepage to display the login screen. → Logging In / Logging Out“

If you use meviy, you must log in with your Misumi user account. You can use the same login details that you use on the MISUMI website.

Logging In

1. Click [Login / Register] on the homepage to display the login screen.

Notes

If you are logged in to Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog), you will be logged in automatically to the meviy platform.

2. Enter your User ID and password on the login screen, and then click [Login].

After you have logged in, the Project List screen will be displayed.

Notes

If you do not already have a User ID,click [Create a new account] on the login screen to register your details.
If you have forgotten your User ID or password, click [Forgot User ID? Forgot Password?] and enter the required information to reset your password or to query your login ID.

Logging Out

1. Hover over your username and click [Log Out] from the User Menu.

This menu is provided for each registered user in order to make the user experience of the meviy platform even more convenient. Here you can change the default settings for services or view your order history.

1. Hover over your username.
The User Menu will be displayed.
2. Select User Menu and click.

User Menu List

Menu Name		Description of Settings
Project list		Returns you to the project list screen for the selected service.
Order history		Here you can check your order history for the currently selected service. By selecting the displayed projects, you can check order details and download PDFs of order confirmation statements. → Exporting the Order Confirmation as a PDF
User settings		You can change the settings for each user, helping streamline your use of the meviy platform. The settings may vary depending on which service you are using. → 「Automatic Hole Type Recognition」「User Settings (Optional)」
Log out		Log out of meviy.

Setting of Automatic Recognition of hole/inner diameter types
Color Attributes Linkage
hole/inner diameter type Linkage

You can change settings that are useful when using meviy for each registered user. The following is a guide to set up the hole/inner diameter type recognition method according to the CAD software you use.

Automatic hole/inner diameter type Recognition Settings

Here are 3 settings to reflect the hole/inner diameter type of the 3D model in the meviy quotation.

Hover over your username and click [User Settings] from the User Menu.

Setup Method 1: No Automatic Recognition

With this setup, all cylindrical holes are recognized as through holes (sheet metal parts), and as straight holes with no tolerance (machined plates). Specifications for tapped or precision holes can be changed after uploading the CAD data by opening the 3D viewer screen from [Next] and double clicking on the hole.

Caution

The original hole attribute information given in 3D CAD during model design is not retained.

Setup Method 2: Automatic Recognition of Tapped holes from Hole Diameter (Default)(Excludes inner diameter)

This setup detects the hole shape and ‘hole diameter’ of the model according to your CAD software and automatically recognizes the tapped hole.
Please select your CAD software as the hole diameter requirement for tap hole recognition.
*If you have chosen to [According to File Type], the CAD used in the design will be estimated based on the file extension and the hole diameter will be matched.

Notes

See below for more information.
→[FA Mechanical Parts] CNC Milling>”Recognizing Different Types of Holes“
→[FA Mechanical Parts] Turning Parts>”Specifications for External Thread and Internal Thread, Keyways, Holes and Pockets“
→［FA Sheet Metal Parts］Hole Diameter Table>”Tapped Hole Recognition and Selectable Sizes“

Caution

The original hole attribute information given in 3D CAD during model design is not retained.

Setup Method 3: Automatic Recognition of hole/inner diameter type from Color Attributes

This setup detects the colored hole surface in the model according to your CAD software and automatically recognises the tapped hole, precision hole, etc.
The color attribute of each hole/inner diameter type can be registered in advance, and any hole/inner diameter type can be reflected in the quotation conditions by matching the coloration of the hole surface.

Caution

There are restrictions on the CAD data to which color attributes can be linked. (Reference: CAD information for color attributes linkage)
Please select your CAD software and then upload the native format or an intermediate file (.x_t, .xmt_txt etc. for Parasolid only) output from the selected CAD software for use.
If you want the hole/inner diameter type to be recognized automatically, please register the color attribute in advance using the “Registration of Color Attributes” form at the bottom of the page.

"Registration of Color Attributes" for automatic recognition of hole/inner diameter types in meviy using color attributes of CAD data

If the automatic hole/inner diameter type recognition setting is set to [Automatic Recognition of hole/inner diameter type from Color Attributes], the RGB setting can be used to transfer the color attribute of the CAD data to meviy.

STEP1:

Select “Automatic hole/inner diameter type Recognition Settings” under user settings.

STEP2:

Set the hole/inner diameter type recognition method to “Automatic Recognition of hole/inner diameter type from Color Attributes”.
* You can only use the color attribute registration form if you have selected “Automatic Recognition of hole/inner diameter type from Color Attributes”.

STEP3:

Set up the CAD used.

STEP4:

Check the ON/OFF button for the hole/inner diameter type you want to set and activate the RGB entry field.

STEP5:

Put the values in RGB.
Note: RGB should be set at a value of 0~255.

STEP6:

Click “Update”.

	Items	Details
1	ON/OFF	It is possible to switch the setting on and off for each hole/inner diameter type.
2	hole/inner diameter type	This is a list of hole/inner diameter types that can be automatically recognized by color attribute linking.
3	RGB	This field is used to register the color attributes, with a value between 0 and 255 for each RGB.
4	Color Check	A message about the status of the RGB settings is displayed.

How to check the automatic hole recognition results and color attributes

Automatic hole recognition results and color attributes can be checked in the 3D viewer screen

STEP1:

Place the cursor on […] in the 3D Viewer.

STEP2:

Click “Display automatic hole recognition results and color attributes”.

STEP3:

The list of holes in the details displays information about the linked color attributes.

*These color attributes are the result of meviy’s own analysis and may not match the values of the color attributes set in your CAD software.
Therefore, when you start using [Automatic recognition of hole/inner diameter type from color attribute], or when you change your CAD software, version, or environment setting, be sure to check the result of automatic hole recognition with this setting.
Also, use only the supported CAD and supported formats described below.

CAD Information For Color Attribute Linkage

Please refer to the following table for CAD data that can be linked to color attributes

CAD formats
CAD softwares	Native	Intermediate format(Parasolid)
CAD softwares	(.sldprt)(.icd)	.x_t	.x_b	.xmt_txt
SOLIDWORKS	〇	〇	〇	ｰ
iCAD SX	〇	〇	〇	〇
Other CAD	ｰ	ｰ	ｰ	ｰ

Caution

The automatic recognition of hole/inner diameter type from color attribute is not guaranteed for models created with non-compatible CAD systems or formats.

Setup Method 4: Automatic Recognition of hole/inner diameter type from CAD Hole Attributes

This setup links the hole attributes created by the hole command (hole wizard) in your CAD software and recognizes the hole/inner diameter type.
Please select your CAD software and then upload the native CAD format.

Caution

There are restrictions on the CAD data to which hole attributes can be linked.
Click here for details on CAD for hole attribute linkage

Application Rules for Hole Attribute Linkage

To link CAD hole attributes and recognize hole/inner diameter types, please refer to the following rules.

Applicable CAD software and file format

(1) Please create the file using the CAD software can be linked and upload it in its native format.

Regarding How to Create CAD Holes

(2) Linkable holes are those created by the hole command (hole wizard) in CAD.
(Please refer to the Hole Command Correspondence Table by CAD for the holes and attributes linkage.)
If the hole command is not used, the hole attribute would not be linked.

(3) We cannot guarantee correct linkage of customized hole command as operation has not been tested.
(Customize: Making changes existing standards or dimensions, Creating new standards, etc.)

(4) Only holes modeled by duplication commands circled in red can be linked.
However, in SOLIDWORKS only, holes that are duplicated and then duplicated again are not recognized as holes created by the hole command and are not linked to hole/inner diameter type Linkage.

(5) The effective depths of tapped and precision holes will not be linked, and the dialog set information in user setting is applied.

(6) Metric thread holes are available, but not inch thread holes.

	SOLIDWORKS	iCAD SX

(2)
(4)		Supported duplication commands I Copy components II Repeat copy component III Rotate copy component IV Mirror component V Mirror copy component
(5)

Notes

For Hole Command Correspondence Table by CAD, please click the link below for details.
→　Before You Begin > “SOLIDWORKS”　|　Before You Begin > “iCAD“

How to check automatic hole recognition results and hole attributes

Automatic hole recognition results and CAD hole attribute information can be checked on the 3D Viewer.

STEP1:

The CAD hole attribute information is displayed on the right side of each hole in the tree view as [black text].

If the linkage failed, it will be displayed in [yellow text] with the notation “Unlinked Hole Attributes”.

STEP2:

Application Rules for Hole Attribute Linkage can be checked.

STEP3:

The list of holes in the details displays information about the linked color attributes.

Caution

*These hole attributes are the result of linkage based on meviy’s own rules and may not match the hole attribute val ues set by your CAD software.
Please be sure to check the results of automatic hole recognition when you start using [Automatic Recognition of hole/inner diameter types from CAD Hole Attributes] and when your CAD software, version, or environment settings are changed.

CAD information for hole attribute linkage

See below for CAD formats that can be linked to hole attributes

CAD formats
CAD Name	Native	Intermediate format
CAD Name	(.sldprt)(.icd)	(.x_t)(.x_b)(.xmt_txt)
SOLIDWORKS	〇	ｰ
iCAD SX	〇	ｰ
Other CAD	ｰ	ｰ

Caution

For models and CAD formats that are not supported by meviy, there is no guarantee of automatic hole/inner diameter type recognition.

Setting of Automatic Recognition of Hole Types
Color Attributes Linkage
Hole Type Linkage
The table of hole command for SOLIDWORKS

This section provides information on how to set up hole type recognition settings for SOLIDWORKS.

Automatic Hole Type Recognition Settings

Here are 3 settings to reflect the hole type of the 3D model in the meviy quotation.

Hover over your username and click [User Settings] from the User Menu.

Setup Method 1: No Automatic Recognition

With this setup, all cylindrical holes are recognized as through holes (sheet metal parts), and as straight holes with no tolerance (machined plates). Specifications for tapped or precision holes can be changed after uploading the CAD data by opening the 3D viewer screen from [Next] and double clicking on the hole.

Caution

The original hole attribute information given in 3D CAD during model design is not retained.

Setup Method 2: Automatic Recognition of Tapped holes from Hole Diameter (Default)

This setup detects the hole shape and ‘hole diameter’ of the model according to your CAD software and automatically recognizes the tapped hole.
Please select your CAD software as the hole diameter requirement for tap hole recognition.
*If you have chosen to [According to File Type], the CAD used in the design will be estimated based on the file extension and the hole diameter will be matched.

Notes

See below for more information.
→［FA Machined Plates］Recognizing Different Types of Holes>”Recognizing Different Types of Holes“
→［FA Sheet Metal Parts］Hole Diameter Table>”Tapped Hole Recognition and Selectable Sizes“

Caution

The original hole attribute information given in 3D CAD during model design is not retained.

Setup Method 3: Automatic Recognition of Hole Type from Color Attributes

This setup detects the colored hole surface in the model according to your CAD software and automatically recognises the tapped hole, precision hole, etc.
The color attribute of each hole type can be registered in advance, and any hole type can be reflected in the quotation conditions by matching the coloration of the hole surface.

Caution

There are restrictions on the CAD data to which color attributes can be linked. (Reference: CAD information for color attributes linkage) Please select your CAD software and then upload the native format or an intermediate file (.x_t, .xmt_txt etc. for Parasolid only) output from the selected CAD software for use.
If you want the hole type to be recognized automatically, please register the color attribute in advance using the “Registration of Color Attributes” form at the bottom of the page.

"Registration of Color Attributes" for automatic recognition of hole types in meviy using color attributes of CAD data

If the automatic hole type recognition setting is set to [Automatic Recognition of Hole Type from Color Attributes], the RGB setting can be used to transfer the color attribute of the CAD data to meviy.

STEP1:

Select “Automatic Hole Type Recognition Settings” under user settings.

STEP2:

Set the hole type recognition method to “Automatic Recognition of Hole Type from Color Attributes”.
* You can only use the color attribute registration form if you have selected “Automatic Recognition of Hole Type from Color Attributes”.

STEP3:

Set up the CAD used.

STEP4:

Check the ON/OFF button for the hole type you want to set and activate the RGB entry field.

STEP5:

Put the values in RGB.
Note: RGB should be set at a value of 0~255.

STEP6:

Click “Update”.

	Items	Details
1	ON/OFF	It is possible to switch the setting on and off for each hole type.
2	Hole Type	This is a list of hole types that can be automatically recognized by color attribute linking.
3	RGB	This field is used to register the color attributes, with a value between 0 and 255 for each RGB.
4	Color Check	A message about the status of the RGB settings is displayed.

How to check the automatic hole recognition results and color attributes

Automatic hole recognition results and color attributes can be checked in the 3D viewer screen

STEP1:

Place the cursor on […] in the 3dviewer.

STEP2:

Click “Display automatic hole recognition results and color attributes”.

STEP3:

The list of holes in the details displays information about the linked color attributes.

*These color attributes are the result of meviy’s own analysis and may not match the values of the color attributes set in your CAD software.
Therefore, when you start using [Automatic recognition of hole type from color attribute], or when you change your CAD software, version, or environment setting, be sure to check the result of automatic hole recognition with this setting.
Also, use only the supported CAD and supported formats described below.

CAD Information For Color Attribute Linkage

Please refer to the following table for CAD data that can be linked to color attributes

CAD formats
CAD softwares	Native	Intermediate format(Parasolid)
CAD softwares	(.sldprt)(.icd)	.x_t	.x_b	.xmt_txt
SOLIDWORKS	〇	〇	〇	ｰ
iCAD SX	〇	〇	〇	〇
Other CAD	ｰ	ｰ	ｰ	ｰ

Caution

The automatic recognition of hole type from color attribute is not guaranteed for models created with non-compatible CAD systems or formats.

Setup Method 4: Automatic Recognition of Hole Type from CAD Hole Attributes

This setup links the hole attributes created by the hole command (hole wizard) in your CAD software and recognizes the hole type.
Please select your CAD software and then upload the native CAD format.

Caution

There are restrictions on the CAD data to which hole attributes can be linked.
Click here for details on CAD for hole attribute linkage

Application Rules for Hole Attribute Linkage

To link CAD hole attributes and recognize hole types, please refer to the following rules.

Applicable CAD software and file format

(1) Please create the file using the CAD software can be linked and upload it in its native format.

Regarding How to Create CAD Holes

(2) Linkable holes are those created by the hole command (hole wizard) in CAD.
(Please refer to the Hole Command Correspondence Table by CAD for the holes and attributes linkage.)
If the hole command is not used, the hole attribute would not be linked.

(3) We cannot guarantee correct linkage of customized hole command as operation has not been tested.
(Customize: Making changes existing standards or dimensions, Creating new standards, etc.)

(4) Only holes modeled by duplication commands circled in red can be linked.
However, in SOLIDWORKS only, holes that are duplicated and then duplicated again are not recognized as holes created by the hole command and are not linked to Hole Type Linkage.

(5) The effective depths of tapped and precision holes will not be linked, and the dialog set information in user setting is applied.

(6) Metric thread holes are available, but not inch thread holes.

	SOLIDWORKS	iCAD SX

(2)
(4)		Supported duplication commands I Copy components II Repeat copy component III Rotate copy component IV Mirror component V Mirror copy component
(5)

Hole Command Correspondence Table by CAD

Please see below the hole type for linkage and the corresponding hole commands setting conditions of CAD.

SOLIDWORKS

Hole Type (meviy)	Conditions for Hole Command Setting	Description	Supplement

Straight Hole & Through Hole	1) Select “Hole” 2) Selectable Type – Drill sizes – Screw Clearances – Tap Drills	When Dowel Holes are selected, they are linked as “precision holes,” so do not select Dowel Holes if you want to recognize them as straight or through holes.
Straight Hole (Counterbored hole) *Machined plates only	Select “Counterbore”	Counterbored holes are recognized as stepped straight holes. The bottom surface of the counterbored hole may be conical instead of flat. Click here for the shape rules that cause differences between the 3D model and the product.
Precision Hole *Machined plates only	1) Select “Hole” 2) Select “Dowel Holes” 3) Select “Fit with tolerance” 4) Set “Hole Fit”	– Effective depth can be set in user setting. – The hole diameter refers from the diameter of the 3D CAD file and the tolerance range class refers to the setting of the hole command. If fit tolerance is not set, it refers to the tolerance range class used in the user settings. – As tolerance on both side(e.g. ±0.02) and tolerance on one side (e.g. +0.02/0) cannot be linked, please make sure to confirm and set on 3D Viewer. The initial display refers to the tolerance range class that is set in the user settings.
Tapped hole & Friction drilled/tapped holes	1) Select “Straight Tap” 2) Select “Tapped hole” 3) Select size (M)	– Holes will be recognized as coarse thread when pitch size could not be acquire. – Effective depth will be set by the dialog set information in user setting is applied. – Shapes and sizes would follow the meviy’s friction drilled/tapped holes rules. Click here for friction drilled/tapped holes rules.
Countersunk hole	Select “Countersink”	Shapes and sizes follow meviy’s countersunk hole rule. Click here for the countersunk hole rules for machined plates. Click here for the countersunk hole rules for sheet metal parts
Non linkage hole e.g.1	Holes using the following hole commands (hole wizard) are not eligible to linkage. 1) Tapered Tap 2) Legacy Hole 3) Counterbore Slot 4) Countersink Slot 5) Slot
Non linkage hole e.g.2	Holes using the following hole commands (hole wizard) are not eligible to linkage. 6) Advanced hole 7) Thread 8) Stud Wizard Holes using other than hole commands (hole wizard), such as Extruded Cut or Revolved Cut are not applicable to linkage.	If it is made with these hole commands, the message “Hole command not used” will be displayed.

How to check automatic hole recognition results and hole attributes

Automatic hole recognition results and CAD hole attribute information can be checked on the 3DViewer.

STEP1:

The CAD hole attribute information is displayed on the right side of each hole in the tree view as [black text].

If the linkage failed, it will be displayed in [yellow text] with the notation “Unlinked Hole Attributes”.

STEP2:

Application Rules for Hole Attribute Linkage can be checked.

STEP3:

The list of holes in the details displays information about the linked color attributes.

Caution

*These hole attributes are the result of linkage based on meviy’s own rules and may not match the hole attribute val ues set by your CAD software. Please be sure to check the results of automatic hole recognition when you start using [Automatic Recognition of Hole Types from CAD Hole Attributes] and when your CAD software, version, or environment settings are changed.

CAD information for hole attribute linkage

See below for CAD formats that can be linked to hole attributes

CAD formats
CAD Name	Native	Intermediate format
CAD Name	(.sldprt)(.icd)	(.x_t)(.x_b)(.xmt_txt)
SOLIDWORKS	〇	ｰ
iCAD SX	〇	ｰ
Other CAD	ｰ	ｰ

Caution

For models and CAD formats that are not supported by meviy, there is no guarantee of automatic hole type recognition.

Setting of Automatic Recognition of Hole Types
Color Attributes Linkage
Hole Type Linkage
Hole Command Correspondence Table for iCAD
User-defined hole setup for iCAD

This section provides information on how to set up hole type recognition settings for iCAD.

Automatic Hole Type Recognition Settings

Here are 3 settings to reflect the hole type of the 3D model in the meviy quotation.

Hover over your username and click [User Settings] from the User Menu.

Setup Method 1: No Automatic Recognition

With this setup, all cylindrical holes are recognized as through holes (sheet metal parts), and as straight holes with no tolerance (machined plates). Specifications for tapped or precision holes can be changed after uploading the CAD data by opening the 3D viewer screen from [Next] and double clicking on the hole.

Caution

The original hole attribute information given in 3D CAD during model design is not retained.

Setup Method 2: Automatic Recognition of Tapped holes from Hole Diameter (Default)

This setup detects the hole shape and ‘hole diameter’ of the model according to your CAD software and automatically recognizes the tapped hole.
Please select your CAD software as the hole diameter requirement for tap hole recognition.
*If you have chosen to [According to File Type], the CAD used in the design will be estimated based on the file extension and the hole diameter will be matched.

Notes

See below for more information.
→［FA Machined Plates］Recognizing Different Types of Holes>”Recognizing Different Types of Holes“
→［FA Sheet Metal Parts］Hole Diameter Table>”Tapped Hole Recognition and Selectable Sizes“

Caution

The original hole attribute information given in 3D CAD during model design is not retained.

Setup Method 3: Automatic Recognition of Hole Type from Color Attributes

This setup detects the colored hole surface in the model according to your CAD software and automatically recognises the tapped hole, precision hole, etc.
The color attribute of each hole type can be registered in advance, and any hole type can be reflected in the quotation conditions by matching the coloration of the hole surface.

Caution

There are restrictions on the CAD data to which color attributes can be linked. (Reference: CAD information for color attributes linkage) Please select your CAD software and then upload the native format or an intermediate file (.x_t, .xmt_txt etc. for Parasolid only) output from the selected CAD software for use.
If you want the hole type to be recognized automatically, please register the color attribute in advance using the “Registration of Color Attributes” form at the bottom of the page.

"Registration of Color Attributes" for automatic recognition of hole types in meviy using color attributes of CAD data

If the automatic hole type recognition setting is set to [Automatic Recognition of Hole Type from Color Attributes], the RGB setting can be used to transfer the color attribute of the CAD data to meviy.

STEP1:

Select “Automatic Hole Type Recognition Settings” under user settings.

STEP2:

Set the hole type recognition method to “Automatic Recognition of Hole Type from Color Attributes”.
* You can only use the color attribute registration form if you have selected “Automatic Recognition of Hole Type from Color Attributes”.

STEP3:

Set up the CAD used.

STEP4:

Check the ON/OFF button for the hole type you want to set and activate the RGB entry field.

STEP5:

Put the values in RGB.
Note: RGB should be set at a value of 0~255.

STEP6:

Click “Update”.

	Items	Details
1	ON/OFF	It is possible to switch the setting on and off for each hole type.
2	Hole Type	This is a list of hole types that can be automatically recognized by color attribute linking.
3	RGB	This field is used to register the color attributes, with a value between 0 and 255 for each RGB.
4	Color Check	A message about the status of the RGB settings is displayed.

How to check the automatic hole recognition results and color attributes

Automatic hole recognition results and color attributes can be checked in the 3D viewer screen

STEP1:

Place the cursor on […] in the 3dviewer.

STEP2:

Click “Display automatic hole recognition results and color attributes”.

STEP3:

The list of holes in the details displays information about the linked color attributes.

*These color attributes are the result of meviy’s own analysis and may not match the values of the color attributes set in your CAD software.
Therefore, when you start using [Automatic recognition of hole type from color attribute], or when you change your CAD software, version, or environment setting, be sure to check the result of automatic hole recognition with this setting.
Also, use only the supported CAD and supported formats described below.

CAD Information For Color Attribute Linkage

Please refer to the following table for CAD data that can be linked to color attributes

CAD formats
CAD softwares	Native	Intermediate format(Parasolid)
CAD softwares	(.sldprt)(.icd)	.x_t	.x_b	.xmt_txt
SOLIDWORKS	〇	〇	〇	ｰ
iCAD SX	〇	〇	〇	〇
Other CAD	ｰ	ｰ	ｰ	ｰ

Caution

The automatic recognition of hole type from color attribute is not guaranteed for models created with non-compatible CAD systems or formats.

Setup Method 4: Automatic Recognition of Hole Type from CAD Hole Attributes

This setup links the hole attributes created by the hole command (hole wizard) in your CAD software and recognizes the hole type.
Please select your CAD software and then upload the native CAD format.

Caution

There are restrictions on the CAD data to which hole attributes can be linked.
Click here for details on CAD for hole attribute linkage

Application Rules for Hole Attribute Linkage

To link CAD hole attributes and recognize hole types, please refer to the following rules.

Applicable CAD software and file format

(1) Please create the file using the CAD software can be linked and upload it in its native format.

Regarding How to Create CAD Holes

(2) Linkable holes are those created by the hole command (hole wizard) in CAD.
(Please refer to the Hole Command Correspondence Table by CAD for the holes and attributes linkage.)
If the hole command is not used, the hole attribute would not be linked.

(3) We cannot guarantee correct linkage of customized hole command as operation has not been tested.
(Customize: Making changes existing standards or dimensions, Creating new standards, etc.)

(4) Only holes modeled by duplication commands circled in red can be linked.
However, in SOLIDWORKS only, holes that are duplicated and then duplicated again are not recognized as holes created by the hole command and are not linked to Hole Type Linkage.

(5) The effective depths of tapped and precision holes will not be linked, and the dialog set information in user setting is applied.

(6) Metric thread holes are available, but not inch thread holes.

	SOLIDWORKS	iCAD SX

(2)
(4)		Supported duplication commands I Copy components II Repeat copy component III Rotate copy component IV Mirror component V Mirror copy component
(5)

Hole Command Correspondence Table for iCAD

Please refer below for linkable hole types and conditions for hole command setting in iCAD.
If you have created holes using methods other than those described here, they will be straight or through holes.
Please change the hole type in the 3D viewer of meviy.

Hole Type (meviy)	Conditions for Hole Command Setting	Description	Supplement

Straight Hole/Through Hole	1) Select one of the following – Hole-02 – Hole-02 (penetrate) – Hole-02 (penetrate)_Medium – Hole-02_Medium 2) If you use user-defined, set the variable as follows – l,d	If you set a value other than the variable specified in the user definition, it will not be linked. If either method (1) or (2) is used, it will be linked. If there is no special reason, we recommend using (1).
Straight hole (Counterbored hole) *Machined plates only	1) Select one of the following – Hole-01 – Hole-01 (penetrate) – Hole-01 (penetrate)_Medium – Hole-01 (SocketHeadCapScrews) – Hole-01 (SocketHeadCapScrews)_Medium 2) If you use uer-defined, set the variables as follows – l,lz,dn,D	Counterbored holes are recognized as stepped straight holes. The bottom surface of the counterbored hole may be conical instead of flat. Click here for the shape rules that cause differences between the 3D model and the product. If either method 1) or 2) is used, it will be linked. If there is no special reason, we recommend using 1).
Precision Hole *Machined plates only	1) Select a hole created by user-defined. Please refer to the section below on how to create user-defined holes.	– Effective depth can be set in user setting. – The hole diameter refers from the diameter of the 3D CAD file and the tolerance range class refers to the setting of the hole command. If fit tolerance is not set, it refers to the tolerance range class used in the user settings. – As tolerance on both side(e.g. ±0.02) and tolerance on one side (e.g. +0.02/0) cannot be linked, please make sure to confirm and set on 3D Viewer. The initial display refers to the tolerance range class that is set in the user settings.
Tapped hole & Friction drilled/tapped holes	1) Select one of the following – Hole-03 – Hole-03 (LowerClose) – Hole-03 (LowerClose)_Grade2 – Hole-03 (penetrate) – Hole-03 (penetrate)_Grade2 – Hole-03_Grade3 2) If you use user-defined, set the variable as follows – l,d,a – l,lr,d,a,ls – l,ls,d,a – l,lr,d,a	If the pitch size cannot be obtained, it is recognized as a coarse thread. The effective depth applies to the information set in the User-defined hole dialog. Shape and size are based on the burring tapping rules of meviy. Click here for the barring tap rules for sheet metal. 1) and 2) can be linked by using either one of them. In the absence of any special reason, we recommend using 1). When using 2), be sure to enter the nominal diameter in the “Nominal” field. In this case, if M is not attached, it will not be recognized as a nominal diameter.
Countersunk hole	(1)Select one of the following – Countersink (penetrate) – Countersink (penetrate)_Medium 2) If you use user-defined, set the variable as follows – l,dk,dn,t – l,dk,d,d,t	Shapes and sizes follow meviy’s countersunk hole rule. Click here for the countersunk hole rules for machined plates. Click here for the countersunk hole rules for sheet metal parts If either method 1) or 2) is used, it will be linked. If there is no special reason, we recommend using 1).
Non linkage hole e.g.,1	Holes using the following hole commands are not eligible for linkage. (1)ParallelPipeThreads (2)TaperPipeThreads	If holes are made with these hole commands, they are not to be linked
Non linkage hole e.g.,2	Holes using the following hole commands are not eligible for linkage. ①Sabtract ②Subtract (Keep subtracted entities) Other machine parts are selected, and holes using other than “Arrange Part” are not to be linked.	If it is made with these hole commands, the message “Hole command not used” will be displayed.

User-defined hole setup for iCAD

Setting steps	Reference Picture	Discription
Reference		Please refer to the following for information on how to set up user-defined holes. *The folder structure and file names in the image on the left may vary depending on the installation settings. iCADSX\MAN part_regi_guide.PDF Chapter 5: Setting Hole-Related Items
1)Copy the original data		Copy the original data for reference from (1) to (2) 1)CADSX\JISPARTS\JIS\3D\04_ScrewHole 2)ICADSX\JISPARTS\USER
2)Rename the copied folder and the data in it		You can name the file anything you prefer. *However, only for the precision hole, please include the tolerance range class of the fit in the name.
3) Change the contents of the excel	<?span>	Enter the hole name in the column next to the “ArgNam” column, and detailed information (hole type, etc.) in the column next to the “HOLE_D_VALUE” column. Delete the JISNAME, Arrangement Attribute, and Arrangement Attribute Additional Information line (red frame).

How to check automatic hole recognition results and hole attributes

Automatic hole recognition results and CAD hole attribute information can be checked on the 3DViewer.

STEP1:

The CAD hole attribute information is displayed on the right side of each hole in the tree view as [black text].

If the linkage failed, it will be displayed in [yellow text] with the notation “Unlinked Hole Attributes”.

STEP2:

Application Rules for Hole Attribute Linkage can be checked.

STEP3:

The list of holes in the details displays information about the linked color attributes.

Caution

*These hole attributes are the result of linkage based on meviy’s own rules and may not match the hole attribute val ues set by your CAD software. Please be sure to check the results of automatic hole recognition when you start using [Automatic Recognition of Hole Types from CAD Hole Attributes] and when your CAD software, version, or environment settings are changed.

CAD information for hole attribute linkage

See below for CAD formats that can be linked to hole attributes

CAD formats
CAD Name	Native	Intermediate format
CAD Name	(.sldprt)(.icd)	(.x_t)(.x_b)(.xmt_txt)
SOLIDWORKS	〇	ｰ
iCAD SX	〇	ｰ
Other CAD	ｰ	ｰ

Caution

For models and CAD formats that are not supported by meviy, there is no guarantee of automatic hole type recognition.

You can change the settings for each user, helping streamline your use of the meviy platform. The settings may vary depending on which service you are using.

You can change the navigation functions assigned to the mouse buttons to better suit your CAD software, set how tapped holes are identified and customize the default settings for quote specifications for cutting services such as external shape tolerances, dimensional tolerances and hole precision. You can also set up email notifications at certain points when using the FA Mechanical Parts service.

1. Hover over your username and click [User Settings] from the User Menu.

2. Select the settings menus that you want to customize and change the settings on each menu screen.

3. Click [Save settings] to save the changes.

Settings Menu List

Menu Name		Description of Settings
3D Models Operation		You can change the default functions assigned to the buttons and keys on your mouse and keyboard. There are pre-configured settings available tailored to the usage experience of each CAD package. Supported CAD packages SOLIDWORKS, Siemens PLM-NX, Autodesk Inventor, iCAD SX, CATIA V5, Creo, IronCAD, Autodesk Fusion
Notification		Set whether you want to receive email notifications at certain points when using the FA Mechanical Parts service. When requesting a manual quote: When a manual quote is requested through the FA Mechanical Parts service When the order is confirmed: When an order is confirmed via the FA Mechanical Parts service
Authority settings for part number		You can set the visibility of issued part numbers and the purchase permission settings. Permissions for others to view issued part numbers: If you select [Share], your projects for which a part number has been issued will be available to view by other users and will be searchable by part number. Permissions for purchasing issued part numbers: If you select [Issue part numbers that can be purchased by anyone], other users will be able to purchase on the Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog) the models that you create by using the issued part number.
Simple 2D Drawing File Format		You can set the file format when downloading a simple 2D data. You can choose between PDF and PNG, and the default setting is PDF format.
Automatic Hole Type Recognition		This is a setting for the service to automatically recognize the hole type from 3D CAD data and reflect it in the quotation conditions. By default, it automatically recognizes tapped holes by detecting the hole shape and ‘hole diameter’ of the model. You can set your CAD software to recognize the tapped hole more smoothly. You can also change the settings to automatically recognize the hole type from the hole color. Currently, the color attribute linkage is only supported for models designed in SOLIDWORKS and iCAD SX.Furthermore, you can change the settings to automatically recognize the hole type from the CAD’s hole attribute. Currently, the hole attribute linkage is only supported for models designed in SOLIDWORKS.
Processing Method Selection		You can set the processing method to be automatically assigned to a preferred processing method when the 3D data is uploaded.
Quotation Settings for Machined Plates	Initial Quotation Settings	Configure materials, surface treatments and surface roughness for initial quotations.
	External Tolerances	Set the tolerances for external dimensions. Default setting will be applied for each upload and is visible in 3D Viewer.
	Dimensional Tolerances	Set the default setting for dimensional tolerances.
	Tapped Holes	Set the effective depths of tapped holes. You can set the effective depths for each material category.
	Precision Holes	Set your preferred 5 fit tolerance ranges, most frequently used fit tolerance range and effective depths by material category. Those will be displayed in the pull-down menu for holes in 3D Viewer.
	Slotted Holes	Set your preferred 5 fit tolerance ranges and most frequently used fit tolerance range. Those wille be displayed in the pull-down menu for slotted holes in 3D Viewer
Quotation Settings for Turning Parts	Quotation Settings for Turning Parts	Configure materials, surface treatments and surface roughness for initial quotations.
	Add Dimensions	Set the default setting for dimensional tolerances.
	Tapped Holes	Set the effective depths of tapped holes. You can set the effective depths for each material category.
	Precision Holes	Set your preferred 5 fit tolerance ranges, most frequently used fit tolerance range and effective depths by material category. Those will be displayed in the pull-down menu for holes in 3D Viewer.
	Outer Diameter	Set your preferred 5 fit tolerance ranges and most frequently used fit tolerance range. Those wille be displayed in the pull-down menu for outer diameters in 3D Viewer.
	Inner Diameter	Set your preferred 5 fit tolerance ranges and most frequently used fit tolerance range. Those wille be displayed in the pull-down menu for inner diameters in 3D Viewer
	Groove Outer Diameter	Set the external tolerances for the grooves. Default setting will be applied for each upload and is visible in 3D Viewer.
	Groove Inner Diameter	Set the tolerances for the groove inner diameter. Default setting will be applied for each upload and is visible in 3D Viewer.
	Slotted Holes/Keyways	“Set your preferred 5 fit tolerance ranges and most frequently used fit tolerance range. Those wille be displayed in the pull-down menu for slotted holes and keyways in 3D Viewer. (Most frequently used setting is only available for keyways.)”
	Internal Keyway	Set the most frequently used fit tolerance range for internal keyways.
Sheet Metal Quotation Settings	Sheet Metal Quotation Settings	You can customize the initial setting for quoting materials and surface treatments used in sheet metal services. [Initial Quote Settings]:Set the materials and surface treatment for initial quotes.
Sheet Metal Quotation Settings	Delete the original project	You can select whether the original project should be deleted or not when you use the function to change the model.

Uploading by Dragging & Dropping

It is necessary to upload 3D data in order to receive a quote on the meviy platform.

You can upload 3D data either by dragging and dropping or by selecting the 3D data using the file selection dialog box.

Drop the file you want to upload in the drop area. When the file upload is complete, a new project will be created.

Uploading Using the File Dialog Box

Click “Or browse to upload” in the drop-down area and select the file or folder you wish to upload.
When the file upload is complete, a new project will be generated.

Caution

The maximum file size that can be uploaded to meviy at the same time is 10 MB.

Caution

When you upload a file using Internet Explorer, the file name displayed may contain a local directory path. You can use the following settings to prevent the directory path from being displayed.

Issue: A local directory path is displayed in the file name
Solution: 1.In the browser settings, select “Internet options”; 2.Select the “Security” tab and then “Custom level…”; 3.Select “Disable”

The project list screen opens when you log in to the meviy platform. This section describes what you can do on the project list screen.

List view

	Function name	Details

➀

Project name

The name of the uploaded project file will be displayed.

➁

Part number

After the part number is issued, the issued part number will be displayed.

➂

Processing method

You can choose from “Machined Plate” and “Sheet Metal.”
*Machined Plate includes either milling or turning parts, but the process is determined automatically by the system.

➃

Status

A message regarding the quotation status of your project will be displayed.

Status patterns

Status	Details
Setting quotation conditions	The shape is successfully recognized and the price is automatically calculated. The specifications set afterward are successfully recognized and the price is calculated.
Confirmation required	Out of the scope of the automatic quotation, but you can request a quote from meviy support.
Order preparation completed	The part number is issued and ready to order.
Processing manual quote	Requested quotation to meviy support.
Manual quote completed	The part number has been issued. You can proceed to purchase by going to the MISUMI site and entering the issued part number.
Manual quote failed	Requested quotation to meviy support but unable to quote.
Out of service	The price cannot be calculated due to standards, etc. that are out of the scope of the automatic quotation.

	Function name	Details
➄	Action	Move to 3D viewer.
➅	Material	The currently selected material will be displayed.
➆	Surface treatment	The currently selected surface treatment will be displayed.
➇	Quantity	The quantity of uploaded projects will be displayed.
➈	Total	After confirming quotation, the total quoted price will be displayed.
➉	Unit price	The unit price of the inquired part will be displayed.
⑪	Shipping days	After confirming quotation, the shipping days will be displayed.
⑫	Creation Date	Displays the date and time the project or folder was created.
⑬	Customer order number	The customer order number will be displayed.
⑭	CAD file	The file name of the uploaded CAD data is displayed.
⑮	Parts name	Parts name is displayed
⑯	Update time	The time when the project’s inquiry conditions were changed is displayed.
⑰	Filter	You can select which functions to display.

Toolbar Area

You can search for data in the project list by project name, part name or part number.

List of Toolbar Functions

Function Name	What You Can Do
Search Box	You can search for data in the project list by project name, part name or part number.

Drop Area

You can upload 3D data for parts that you want to receive a quote for on the meviy platform using drag and drop. → Uploading 3D Data

Product list

Click ”Product list” on the top right-hand corner of the project list screen to open the product list screen.
After issuing the part number in the 3D Viewer, you can check and order the products added to the product list.

Notes

See below for the quotation process using the product list

→ [FA Machined Plate] Quotation Settings > Quotation Procedure
→ [FA Sheet metal] Quotation Settings > Quotation Procedure

Folder

Creating New Folders

Click [Create New Folder] to create a folder. Folders can be categorized and managed by project application and person in charge.

Caution

It is not possible to create sub-folders.

Downloading Parts List

You can download a list of the parts from the projects contained in a folder in CSV format.

Click [Download Parts List] to begin downloading the Bill of Materials (CSV format).

Caution

Only those parts in the folder for which part numbers have been issued will be downloaded.

Projects

3D data that you upload to the meviy platform will be displayed as a “Project.” Information such as the project name, part preview, and progress and results of quotes will be displayed for the project.

The price and shipping days will not be displayed in the project immediately after uploading.
For projects where the quote has been completed, the part number and final quote amount will be displayed.
For projects containing multiple parts, the parts for which quotes have been completed are shown as “x/y part number issued.”
The icon will be displayed for purchased projects. Click to view your order history.

Notes

Click on a project to open the 3D viewer screen where you can then check the details of completed quotes, reconfigure the settings for quotes and manipulate 3D models.

→ [FA Machining] Quotation settings > Viewing the 3D Viewer Screen
→ [FA Sheet Metal] Quotation settings > Viewing the 3D Viewer Screen

You can change the names of projects. → Organizing Projects

Status Summary

The status of parts in a folder will be displayed.

Group	Conditions
All	Number of items for group “Auto quotation”, “Manual quotation”, “Unable to quote” and before selecting processing method. *Projects with no processing method selected are not included in the number of items.
Auto quotation	Number of items for status “Setting quotation conditions” and “Order preparation completed”.
Manual quotation	Number of items for status “Confirmation required”, “Processing manual quote”, and “Manual quote completed”.
Unable to quote	Number of items for status “Out of service” and “Manual quote failed”

Download Parts Information

You can download a“Simple 2D drawing”, “Parts List” or “Product List” for a specific part.

Sort projects

You can sort projects using the sorting function.
Click on for the item you want to sort. You can sort in ascending or descending order.

Filter Project

You can use the filter function to narrow down your project.

Click to filter.
Select the criteria from the pull-down menu and apply.

3D data uploaded to meviy is displayed in the project list screen as a “Project” where you can see part previews and project names and check the progress and results of quotes. This section describes how to organize projects in a way that makes them easy to access and use.

Notes

Click on the project name to display the 3D Viewer screen where you can check and modify detailed settings for quotations and manipulate 3D models of the parts.
- → [FA Machining] Quotation settings > Viewing the 3D Viewer Screen
- → [FA Sheet Metal] Quotation settings > Viewing the 3D Viewer Screen
[FA Mechanical Parts] allows you to share projects and parts for which a part number has been issued. This is useful for sharing information with purchasing departments, developers and other concerned parties. → Publish an Issued Part Number/Share a Project

Changing Project Names

Under the default settings, the file name of the uploaded 3D data is used as the project name. The project name can be changed to any name of your choice after uploading.

Hover over [] next to the project for which you want to change the name and then click [Change Project Name].
Enter the project name and click [OK].

Duplicate Project

Duplicate the selected project.

Check the left checkbox of the project you want to duplicate.
Click the “Duplicate” button at the top of the page.

Notes

Multiple projects can be duplicated simultaneously.
The duplicated project will inherit the quote conditions of the original project.

Deleting Projects

You can delete projects that are no longer needed.

Hover over [] next to the project you want to delete and then click [Delete].
Click [Delete].

Creating Folders

You can create custom folders on the list screen to organize and manage multiple projects.

On the project list screen, click [Create New Folder].
Enter a name for the folder and click [Create].

Changing Folder Names

You can rename folders that you have created.

Hover over [] next to the folder you want to rename, and click [Change Folder Name].
Enter a name for the folder and click [Change].

Deleting Folders

You can delete folders that you no longer need.

Hover over [] next to the project you want to delete and then click [Delete].
Click [OK].

Moving Projects to Folders

Save projects in folders that you have created.

Hover over [] next to the project you wish to move to a specific folder and click [Move to Folder].
Select the destination folder and click [Move].

Notes

You can also upload 3D data after selecting a folder to save the data to. You can delete 3D CAD data, delete CAD data and delete projects (destroy data) that you no longer need.

Move the folder to a different folder.

You can move the folder to different folder.

Place the cursor on the folder to move.
Click “” when it appears.
Select the destination folder and click [Move].

Organize and send unnecessary projects to the trash.

Delete or restore projects that you have placed in the trash.

Restore a project if it was accidentally deleted or if it is needed again later.

Move a project to the trash

Select the project you want to move to the trash on the project list screen and click the “Trash” button to move it to the trash folder.

Check the Trash folder

There is a trash can button at the bottom of the folder list, and clicking it will take you to the trash folder.

Delete or restore a project in the Trash folder

Select the project you want to delete or restore and click the button to delete or restore it.

Please note that deleting a project in the Trash folder will permanently remove it from your account.

Empty the Trash folder

Click on the trash then click “Empty the Trash”.

You can delete all projects in the Trash folder at once.

Caution

・The trash can is not available for shared projects and shared folders.
・These projects cannot be moved to the trash.
– Projects that only consist of assembly child parts
– Projects with edit permissions that are open in the 3D viewer

After logging in to meviy, follow the steps below to get quotes and place orders based on 3D data of sheet metal parts.

STEP1: Automatic Hole Type Recognition Settings

If you are uploading a neutral format, configure the settings for the CAD software used for modeling.

On the meviy platform, the hole type is identified by referencing the hole diameter in the 3D CAD data against the hole information database. Configuring the settings for the CAD software used for the modeling improves the accuracy of the hole type identification.

(1)Point the mouse to the user name in the upper right corner of the screen. The “User Menu” will appear.
(2)Choose “User Settings”.
(3)Choose “Automatic Hole Type Recognition Settings”.
(4)Select the hole type recognition method. → Details of each setting method
(5)Set the CAD software used for modeling in the hole diameter condition of tap hole recognition.
(6)Choose “Update”.

STEP2: Set the preferred processing method

You can set up to automatically select a processing method when 3D data is uploaded.

Open user settings, click “Processing Method Selection Settings”.
Select the preferred processing method from the pull-down menu.

Tip

The automatically selected processing method can be changed later on the project list screen or the 3D Viewer screen.

STEP3: Upload the 3D CAD Data

Upload the 3D CAD data. → Uploading 3D Data
Press the [Sheet metal] button. If “Do not allow automatic selection” is selected in the user settings, the selection must be made by the user.
Select [Next]. The 3D Viewer screen will be displayed from where you can then view the quote amount as calculated using the default specifications.

If there are no issues with the quote conditions or amount, proceed to Step 5: Finalize Quotes and Obtain Part Numbers.
If you want to change the quote specifications, proceed to Step 4: Configure/Change Quote Specifications.

STEP4: Configure/Change Quote Specifications

Configure and change the quote specifications as required. Prices and delivery times will be recalculated according to the changed specifications.

Configure basic information for the quotation specifications such as changing the quantities in the quote, changing the materials or surface treatments, setting custom customer PO numbers and entering additional machining instructions. → Setting Basic Information
Confirm the information for the loaded 3D data and modify it if necessary.
- Changing hole types → Changing Hole Information
- Adding/removing dimensions → Adding/Removing Dimensions
- Splitting holes grouped during shape recognition → Splitting Grouped Holes
You will not be able to use the automatic quotation function if the plate thickness is not uniform. In such a case, please rectify the situation using the auto-fix function. → Auto-Fixing of Plate Thicknesses of Bends

Tip

Useful keyboard shortcuts → Keyboard Operations

STEP5: Finalize Quotes and Obtain Part Numbers

After setting the quotation conditions, confirm the quotation and obtain the part number. → Finalizing Quotes (Obtaining Part Numbers) / Confirming

STEP6: Add to product list

After the part number is issued, select the shipping date and click the [Add to cart] button.

STEP7: Check product list, then order

Please select the parts you wish to order, click the “Proceed to order” button, and place your order on the MISUMI website.

Click a project on the project list screen to open the 3D viewer screen. You can check the following information on the 3D Viewer screen.

Click on tabs (2) through (5) to switch the display.

(1) 3D Viewer

You can manipulate models for uploaded 3D data. Models can be manipulated in a similar way as with CAD software.
→ Quotation Procedure > “Step 1: Specify Tapped Hole Identification Method”
→ How to Use the 3D Viewer
→ Controlling Models with the Mouse

(2) Parts list

All the parts contained in the project selected in the Project List will be displayed.

(3) Precaution

Lists error messages, warning messages, and messages from the meviy operator.

(4) Basic Information

You can change the material and surface treatment and set a customer order number.

(5) Tree View

The automatic quotation function will not be available if you have entered additional machining instructions. Select [Request Quote from meviy Support]. A representative will respond with a quote.

Tip

A message will be displayed if there is a risk of deformation during the fabrication process. You can check the corresponding area in the 3D Viewer.

(6) Detail other additional information in the comment field.

Additional requests or inquiries such as additional machining instructions that cannot be configured on meviy can be detailed.
Check here for how to use the comment field > “Manual Quotation Experience Record“

Caution

If you require additional processing, automatic quote is not available. Select [Request manual quotation]. The person in charge will reply to you with a quote later.

(7) Part number issuing area

A list is displayed with prices, delivery dates and issued part numbers according to the desired quantity and basic information.
The button changes depending on the status, you can confirm the terms of the offer, request a manual quote or add the selected component to your shopping cart.

The 3D Viewer allows you to manipulate models from 3D data uploaded to meviy in a similar way as with CAD software.
→ Controlling Models with the Mouse

(1) Toolbar

The names of each tool and what you can do with these tools are specified below.

Function Name	What You Can Do
Reverse the Appearance	If the external appearance faces identified by meviy (faces colored in dark orange) are different from what you expected, you can invert the internal and external faces.
Add Dimensions	Add dimensions. → Adding Dimensions *It is not possible to add dimensions when the direction of measurement is at an angle.
Add Dimensions in Batch	Batch add coordinate dimensions. → Adding Dimensions*No dimensions will be added to faces which are at an oblique angle.
Delete settings	Remove added dimensions. → Adding/Removing Dimensions
Split Grouped Holes	You can split holes grouped during shape recognition. → Splitting Grouped Holes

Function Name	What You Can Do
Engraving	Add engraving. → Set engraving *This is only for the appearance.
Measurement	This function allows measurement of models uploaded.→Measuring 3D models
Change Font Size	You can change the font size　→　changing font size
Simple 2D Drawing	Download image files that capture each orthogonal direction of the 3D models and arrange them via 3rd angle projection.
2D DXF	You can generate and output 2D DXF data after the model number is confirmed.　→　Download 2D DXF files

(2) Cube

Rotate the cube to change the orientation of the currently displayed parts.

Click [Isometric View] to return to the isometric view (default orientation).

(3) Display Settings

Move the mouse over the icon to display the display settings menu. Here you can change the 3D model display method and toggle between displaying or hiding text information in the 3D viewer.

(4) PMI

PMI is an abbreviation of Product Manufacturing Information and refers to textual information for dimensions and holes. The position of the PMI display can be moved by dragging.

Hole types can be changed according to the hole diameter.

Caution

Hole type identification may vary depending on your CAD package. Be sure to check the hole type in the 3D Viewer or tree view.

Tip

You can increase the accuracy of hole identification by configuring [Tapped Hole Identification Settings] in [User Settings]. → Quotation Procedure

Double-Click the Hole to Modify

Double-click the hole you want to modify in the 3D Viewer or tree view.

3D Viewer

Tree view

Tip

Hole type changes are applied to a whole group, so if you would like to specify a different hole type for each hole in the group, you first need to Splitting Grouped Holes.

Selecting and Updating Hole Types

In the displayed Hole Type dialog box, select the hole type and click [Update].

On the [Basic Information] tab, you can change the quantities in the quote, change the materials or surface treatments, set custom customer PO numbers and enter additional machining instructions. Prices and delivery times will be recalculated according to the changed specifications.

Selecting Materials and Surface Treatments

1. Click [ Change material and surface treatment ].

The Material/Finish dialog is displayed.

2. Select the material.

Hover over the material group name to select the material type.

Tip

Hover over the material name to see a description of the material.
For more information about the material, click here.

3. Select the Surface Finish.

Tip

Hover over the Finish name to see the description.
For more information about the Finish, click here.
For more information abouthe painting, click here.

4. Click [ Determine ].

Setting Customer PO Numbers (Optional)

You can set your own internal control numbers (customer PO numbers). To facilitate the confirmation of item deliveries, both the part number and the specified customer PO number will be printed on the product label when shipping fabricated FA Mechanical Parts.

Tip

The customer PO number can include up to 54 half-width characters (uppercase or Japanese) and spaces, numerals and symbols (#$%&‘()*+,-./:;=?@_,~). If the parent part number entry field is displayed, you must enter this number (up to 20 characters).
You can still configure settings and make changes after finalizing a quote, but any changes and subsequent price revisions will not be reflected in the project list or 3D Viewer.

Entering Additional Instructions (Optional)

You can enter comments if you have additional instructions you would like to specify.

1. Select [Input].

The [Add Machining Instructions] dialog box will appear.

2. Enter a comment and select [OK].

Caution

If you enter additional instructions, an automatic quote is not possible. Click on the button [Request manual quotation]. Our meviy support will contact you.

Specifying Quantities

You can select a quantity from 1 to 5 under “Quantity”. If you want to order more than 6 pieces, please select “6 or more (input number) ” and then enter the number of pieces you want.

Caution

The quantity can be changed even after the quotation conditions are confirmed as long as the quantity is within the automatic quotation range.

Check price and delivery date by quantity

You can check the price and delivery date for each quantity in the “Price list by quantity”.

You can change the font size of the PMI display.

1. Click . The Change Viewer Font Size dialog box will be displayed.

2. Change the size and click [OK]. You can specify any font size between 1 and 200 pt.

Adding Dimensions

You can add dimensions and dimension lines to areas where dimensions are not displayed.

Click and then click 2 points (center of a hole or a face) to which you want to add dimensions.
Click where you want the dimensions to be displayed. Finalize the position where the dimensions will be displayed.

Tip

By selecting

and clicking [OK] in the displayed dialog box, you will be able to batch add dimension lines to areas for which the dimensions were not initially displayed.

Caution

It is not possible to add dimensions when the direction of measurement is at an angle, or dimensions for faces which are at an angle.
See Allowable Dimensional Tolerances for the range of guaranteed dimensions.

Deleting Dimensions

You can delete dimensions that you added accidentally or that you no longer require.

Click

and then click the dimension you want to delete.

Notes

Initial display items such as external dimensions and hole information cannot be deleted.
Select [Delete all settings] in the [Delete settings] dialog box to delete all settings except that which is part of the initial display.

In meviy, holes on the same surface that have the same diameter and type are treated as a group.
Hole type changes are applied to a whole group, so if you would like to specify a different hole type for each hole in the group, please split the grouped holes.

Click and select the grouped holes.
Select the holes you want to split from the group. The selected holes will be highlighted in blue. You can select multiple holes to split from the group.
Click [Split].

The selected holes will be separated from the group.
After splitting, you will be able to change the hole type for each hole.

Caution

Separated holes cannot be re-grouped.

How to set up an engraving

STEP1　Select icon

Select the Icon from the icons above.
You can also use the shortcut key (E).

STEP2　Engraving area selection

Select the surface on which you want to set the engraving.
When you hover the mouse pointer over a selectable surface, the surface is highlighted.

STEP3　Engraving specification setting

Enter the text you wish to engrave.
The position the text size and the angle of the engraving can be moved. Click on “Update” after you have entered the text.”

Caution

Characters that can be entered in the dialog are single-byte alphanumeric characters and some symbols (+-. #$%&()=*:? /_~).

STEP4　Completion of engraving

You can see the specified engraving on the 3D viewer model and in the tree view.

How to set up part number engraving

STEP1　Click the “Add Part Number” button

Click the “Add Part Number” button displayed in the dialog.

STEP2　Displaying the temporary part number

After clicking the “Add Part Number” button, a temporary part number will be displayed in the engraving text box and on the model in the 3Dviewer.
The temporary part number will be displayed as “MVSHM-XXXXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX”.
The “X” characters will automatically update with the complete part number after the quotation conditions are confirmed.

STEP3　Finalize and display complete part number

When you click “Confirm the quotation conditions”, the temporary part number “MVSHM-XXXXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX” will automatically update to display the complete part number.

How to delete

STEP1　Select icon

Select the icon from the icons above.
You can also use the shortcut key (D).

STEP2　Select engraving

The message “Click on Delete settings” is displayed. Then select the engraving you wish to delete. When you hover over it, the corresponding engraving glows blue.
It will be deleted by clicking.

Caution

Please note that clicking the “Delete all settings” button will delete all settings you have defined.

STEP3　Finish deleting

Deletion finished.

STEP4　End of settings deletion

Press the Esc key or the X button to exit Delete settings.

This function allows measurement of models uploaded.

Screen introduction of measurement functions

This section introduces the various windows that appear after the measurement function is executed.

The function can measure three types of values: distance, R-value, and angle.

Click the icon
The following procedures are available depending on the items to measure.

– To measure the distance
→If you select the two points (highlighted in yellow-green) you wish to measure, XYZ will be displayed in a window respectively.
-If you want to measure R value
→If you hover the mouse over the elements to measure (edges and faces of the model), the R-value will be displayed in the window when the element selected that is highlighted in light blue.
– To measure angles
→If you hover the mouse over the elements to measure (edges and faces of the model),
select the two elements that are highlighted in light blue and the angles will be displayed in the window.

	Item name	Details
①	Measurement icon	Activate the measurement function
②	Measurement mode switching window	Switch between the maximum and minimum distance
③	Measurement window by element	The window displaying information about the measured element
④	Selected Objects	Using to select the center point or central axis of a hole
⑤	Measurement component line	Displaying the measurement target by measurement mode, and the XYZ component is also displayed as a line segment at the same time.

Measurement icon

An icon used to measure various elements of the model
Shortcut key is activated by “Shift+M”.

Measurement mode switching window

Function to switch between longest and shortest distance measurements for selected elements

Longest distance	Shortest distance

Measurement window by element

Window displaying information about the object to be measured and the numerical values of the decomposed XYZ components

Distance measurement	R-value	angle

Selected Objects

Various elements are displayed that can select the element need to measure

Tip

Sphere object	Center point of the R edge
Cylindrical object	Central axis of a curved surface

Measurement component line

Displays the XYZ components that configure the measured distance in mm

Tip

Black line	Measurement result
Red line	X direction component
Green line	Y-direction component
Blue line	Z direction component

This function exports the shapes and dimensions displayed on the 3D Viewer to 2D DXF format.
*The generated .dxf version is AutoCAD 2018 DXF (*.dxf).
*The frame is MISUMI’s standard frame.
*File naming rule: The file name is attached by the Part Number.

Caution

Please note that the information contained within the DXF drawing frame is provided in English.

How to download 2D DXF files

STEP 1　Finalizing Quotation Conditions

To download the ‘2D DXF’ file, you must finalise the quotation conditions and confirm the part number.
Once the Part Number is confirmed, the “2D DXF” icon will be activated and you can select it.

STEP 2　Select 2D DXF

Select from the icons at the top.
You can also select it with the shortcut keys (Shift + X).

STEP 3　Selection of projection method and paper size

Select the projection method and paper size, and click the generate button.

STEP 4　Generating DXF file

Please wait a moment while generation is completed.
Even while generating, you can close the dialogue box and perform other operations.

STEP 5　DXF file download

Once the DXF file is generated, it will be available for download.
If you change the projection method and paper size, you can regenerate it.

Caution

If you regenerate, it will return to the state of STEP 4 on this page.
The scale of this drawing will be automatically adjusted to fit the drawing frame of the paper size. Please check the scale within the drawing frame.


3D Viewer Models, Simplified 2D Diagrams	2D DXF

*About 2D DXF engraving expression

When outputting engravings in 2D DXF format, please be advised that the representation differs from that in the 3D Viewer model and simplified 2D drawings.
“Set engraving“

Check the price and delivery time, and if there are no issues, finalize the quote, obtain the part number, and check the quote.

Finalizing Quotes and Obtaining Part Numbers

1. Click "Confirm the quotation conditions" to check price and shipping days.

2. Part number will be issued to the quoted part.

Caution

If a 3D file you have uploaded contains multiple parts, please issue part numbers for each part that you want to order.

Confirming Quotes

1. Return to the project list and add the parts you want to your product list to check the quotation results.

2.Open product list and check the quotation results.

Change the quotation

1. Change the inquiry conditions.

2. Click "Confirm the quotation conditions".

Models of sheet metal parts should be designed with a uniform plate thickness. If the inner radius (R) and outer radius (R) of the bends are unbalanced and the plate thickness is not uniform, you will not be able to use the automatic quote function. In this case, you can rectify the issue using the auto-fix function.

Fixing Uniformity Issues from Message Displayed When Opening 3D Viewer Screen

The Model Modification Guide box will display if you open a project in the 3D Viewer containing data for which the plate thickness is not uniform.

1. Select [Modify Model].
The automatically generated project name is the same as that of the original project.

Notes

The fixed model is created as a new project, meaning that you can still access the original project if required.

2. Open the auto-fixed project.

Check that the parts information and non-standard plate thickness have been fixed.

3. Restart the quote process.

Proceed from quote specification settings.

User settings can be set to select if the original project is deleted or not.
“Delete the original project” → “Sheet metal model modification function – “Rfixed” projects”
For more information, please click here.

You can use the following keyboard shortcuts while using the 3D Viewer (default settings):

Tip

You can change the shortcuts to better suit the 3D software you are using in [Mouse Navigation Settings] under [User Settings]. → User Settings

Functions and Operations		Keyboard Input
	Add dimensions	W
	Add Dimensions in Batch	[Shift] + W
	Delete settings	D
	Split Grouped Holes	S
	Engraving	E
	Measurement	M
	Increase font size	[Alt] + ↑
	Reduce font size	[Alt] + ↓

Functions and Operations		Keyboard Input
	Simple 2D Drawing	[Shift] + C
	Fit to screen	[Ctrl] + F
	Isometric view	[Ctrl] + I
	Zoom-in on part	[Ctrl] + ↑
	Zoom-out from part	[Ctrl] + ↓

Even if an automatic quotation is not available on meviy, you can get a quotation using Manual quotation.
Please check the following and then feel free to make a request.

What is Manual quotation?

This is a process whereby a manual quotation will be reviewed and issued through meviy support when an automatic quotation is not available on meviy.
You can request a manual quote for the following: higher quantitiesinstructions in the comment field Holes which are marked as “Others”.
Usually you will receive an answer within 1-2 working days.
* More days may be required in the event that the materials are difficult to procure.

How to Request a Quotation

The “Request manual quotation” button will display when the manual quotation is available.
Please click it to make a request.

Comment Field (Additional Instructions)

Machining instructions for sheet metal parts are supported.
Click [Input] and fill in the displayed input field, then click [OK].

Caution

Machining instructions for machined plates will not be accepted.
Enter hole instructions in the next item, “Other Holes.”

Canceling a Manual Quotation

The quotation request can be cancelled until meviy support has responded.
If the conditions have changed or the quotation is no longer needed, click “Cancel manual quotation” to cancel the request.
To request a new quotation after cancellation, click “Request manual quotation” again.

Quotation Succeeded

In addition to receiving an email from meviy support, the amount, days to ship, and part number will be displayed on the 3D viewer.
Also, “Message from meviy support” will be displayed if conditions are included in the quotation. Click “Confirm” to review the details.

Quotation Failed

If the quotation is declined by meviy support, a message will be added in Precaution and a detailed email will be sent to your registered email address. Please check the details.
Click “Set Quotation Conditions again” to return to where you were prior to requesting a manual quotation, where settings can be changed and a manual quotation can be requested again.

Manual Quotation Unavailable

A manual quotation cannot be requested if there is no “Request manual quotation” button.
Shape recognition may have failed. Please check the model shape and other relevant details.
If you have any questions, please feel free to contact us via mail
meviy-eu@misumi-europe.com.

Manual Quotation Experience Record

The following is a record of manual quotations have experience handling, and also elements that are not supported.
Production feasibility is determined on a case-by-case basis, even for parts that include elements that we have experience handling. The request will be declined if it is not possible to fulfill it.

Sheet Metal Parts

Please set elements we have experience with either on meviy, or fill in the details in the Comment Field (Additional Instructions).
Requests requiring 2D drawings are not supported.

	Have experience with	Unsupported elements
Quantity	Large-quantity order	–
Shipping days	Specified shipping days	–
Size	Expanded dimensions of 2,000 mm in length.	–
Tolerance and precision	Tolerance range of 0.2 or above	Tolerance range of 0.2 or above
	–	Geometric tolerance specifications
	–	Surface roughness specifications
	–	Gloss specifications
Material type and surface treatment	Partial surface treatment specifications	Material type and surface treatments not selectable for automatic quotation
Material type and surface treatment	–	Basecoat specifications
Heat treatment and hardness	–	Heat treatment
Heat treatment and hardness	–	Hardness specifications
Holes	Tap sizes not covered by automatic quotation	Countersunk hole sizes not covered by automatic quotation
	–	Non-through hole
	–	Countersunk Holes
Machining method	Degreasing	–
Machining method	Light chamfering specifications around entire circumference	–
Parts	–	Changes to mirror geometry
Parts	–	Specified shape different from 3D model
Certification documents	Mill test certificate (similar lots)	–
	SDS	RoHS certificates
	Inspection sheets	–

Frequently Asked Questions

Q. Are manual quotations more expensive?

A. Except for large-quantity orders, manual quotations tend to be more expensive than automatic quotations.

Q. Why are the conditions differ from previous quotations?

A. The quotation conditions vary as quotations are made manually on a case-by-case basis.

Q. Are discounts available?

A. No, they are not supported.

Q. Can quotations be given for Economy Shipping, Expedited Shipping and Express Shipping part numbers?

A. No, they are not supported. Only automatic quotation part numbers are supported.

Q. Can quotations be given for several quantities?

A. Please enter the quantities in the comments field and we will respond according to those quantities. We can respond regarding a maximum of seven different quantities.

Q. What should I do if I want a quicker response?

A. Please enter details such as “Please respond by xx” in the comments field and we will do our best to accommodate your request.
However, this may not be possible to accommodate, depending on the situation at the factory that checks your request. Thank you very much for your understanding.

After logging in to meviy, follow the steps below to get quotes and place orders based on 3D data of machined plates.

Step 1: Automatic Hole Type Recognition Settings

If you are uploading a neutral format, configure the settings for the CAD software used for modeling. On the meviy platform, the hole type is identified by referencing the hole diameter in the 3D CAD data against the hole information database. Configuring the settings for the CAD software used for the modeling improves the accuracy of the hole type identification.

(1)Point the mouse to the user name in the upper right corner of the screen. The “User Menu” will appear.
(2)Choose “User Settings”.
(3)Choose “Automatic Hole Type Recognition Settings”.
(4)Select the hole type recognition method. → Details of each setting method
(5)Set the CAD software used for modeling in the hole diameter condition of tap hole recognition.
(6)Choose “Update”.

Step 2: Set the preferred processing method

You can set up to automatically select a processing method when 3D data is uploaded.

Open user settings, click “Processing Method Selection Settings”.
Select the preferred processing method from the pull-down menu.

Tip

The automatically selected processing method can be changed later on the project list screen or the 3D Viewer screen.

Step 3: Upload the 3D CAD Data

Upload the 3D CAD data. → Uploading 3D Data
Press the [Machined plate] button. If “Do not allow automatic selection” is selected in the user settings, the selection must be made by the user.
Select [Next]. The 3D Viewer screen will be displayed from where you can then view the quote amount as calculated using the default specifications.

Proceed to Step 5: Finalize Quotes (Obtaining Part Numbers) / Confirm if there were no issues with the quote conditions or amount.
Proceed to Step 4: Configure/Change Quote Specifications if you want to change the quote specifications.

Step 4: Configure/Change Quote Specifications

Configure and change the quote specifications as required. Prices and delivery times will be recalculated according to the changed specifications.

Configure basic information for the quotation specifications such as changing the quantities in the quote, changing the materials or surface treatments, setting custom customer PO numbers and entering additional machining instructions. → Setting Basic Information
Confirm the information for the loaded 3D data and modify it if necessary.
- Changing hole types → Changing Hole Information
- Adding/removing dimensions and dimensional tolerances → Adding/Deleting Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances
- Splitting holes grouped during shape recognition → Splitting Group Holes
- Moving the design’s origin → Change a Design’s Origin
If there is a possibility a part you are designing using 3D data will break or become distorted, an approval message will appear in the tree view. Please check this message. → Confirming Approvals

Tip

Useful keyboard shortcuts → Keyboard Operations

Step 5: Finalize Quotes (Obtaining Part Numbers) / Confirm

After you set the quotation conditions, confirm the quotation conditions, issue the part number and check the quote if there are no issues. → Finalizing Quotes (Obtain Part Number) / Checking

Step 6: Add to product list

After issuing the part number, select the shipping date and click the [Add to Cart] button.

Step 7: Check product list, then order

Please select the parts you wish to order, click the “Proceed to order” button, and place your order on the MISUMI website.

Click a project on the project list screen to open the 3D viewer screen. You can check the following information on the 3D Viewer screen.

Click on tabs (2) through (5) to switch the display.

(1) 3D Viewer

You can manipulate models for uploaded 3D data. Models can be manipulated in largely the same way as with CAD software.
→ Quotation Procedure > “Step 1: Specify Tapped Hole Identification Method”
→ How to Use the 3D Viewer
→ Controlling Models with the Mouse

(2) Parts Lists

All the parts contained in the project selected in the Project List will be displayed .

(3) Precaution

Lists error messages, warning messages, and messages from the meviy operator.

(4) Basic Information

You can change the material and surface treatment and set a customer order number.

(5) Tree View

When in tree view, you can check the dimensions of the entire part and the hole information for each of the 6 faces.

You can also change the hole type. Double-click the hole you want to change and the [Hole Information Instructions] dialog box will be displayed.

Tip

The precision of straight holes can be modified by changing the hole diameter tolerance type.
If a hole could be both a tapped and a straight hole, it will be identified as a tapped hole. Be sure to check the hole type in the 3D Viewer or tree view.
A message will be displayed if the part contains a thin area that may break or become distorted during the fabrication process. You can check the corresponding area in the 3D Viewer. → Confirming Approvals

(6) Detail other additional information in the comment field.

Additional requests or inquiries such as additional machining instructions that cannot be configured on meviy can be detailed.
Check here for how to use the comment field > “Manual Quotation Experience Record“

Caution

If you require additional processing, automatic quote is not available. Select [Request a Manual Quote]. The person in charge will reply to you with a quote later.

(7) Part number issuing area

You can see a list of the quantity, the price, the delivery date, and the Part Number according to the Basic Information.
The button changes according to the status, and you can confirm the quotation conditions, request a manual quote, and also add the quote you choose to the cart.

The 3D Viewer allows you to manipulate models from 3D data uploaded to meviy in a similar way as with CAD software.
→ Controlling Models with the Mouse

(1) Toolbar

The names of each tool and what you can do with these tools are specified below.

Function Name	What You Can Do
Designate Design Origin	Move the design’s origin point. → Change a Design’s Origin
Add Dimensions	Add dimensions and dimensional tolerances. → Add/Remove Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances
Add Dimensions in Batch	Batch add coordinate dimensions based on the origin point. → Add/Remove Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances
Delete settings	Remove added dimensions. → Add/Remove Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances
Hide dimensions	Hides dimensional tolerances guaranteed by “Default General Tolerance Standards for Machined Dimensions.”
Split Grouped Holes	You can split holes grouped during shape recognition. → Splitting Grouped Holes
Surface Roughness	You can set the surface roughness, grinding, and buffing. → Set surface roughness

Function Name	What You Can Do
Datum	Datum can be set. → Set datum / geometric tolerances
Geometric tolerances	Geometric tolerances can be set. → Set datum / geometric tolerances
Engraving	Add engraving. → Set engraving
Measurement	This function allows measurement of models uploaded. → Measuring 3D models
Change font size	You can change the font size of the PMI display. → Changing Font Sizes
Simple 2D Drawing	Download image files that capture each orthogonal direction of the 3D models and arrange them via 3rd angle projection.
2D DXF	You can generate and output 2D DXF data after the model number is confirmed. → Download 2D DXF files

(2) Cube

Rotate the cube to change the orientation of the currently displayed parts.

Click [Isometric View] to return to the isometric view (default orientation).

(3) Menu

Hovering the mouse over the “Menu” button brings up a menu that allows you to toggle the display of the 3D model and show/hide text information in the 3D viewer.

(4) PMI

PMI is an abbreviation of Product Manufacturing Information and refers to textual information for dimensions and holes. The position of the PMI display can be moved by dragging.

On the [Basic Information] tab, you can change the quantities in the quote, change the materials or surface treatments, set custom customer PO numbers and enter additional machining instructions. Prices and delivery times will be recalculated according to the changed specifications.

Selecting Materials and Surface Treatments

1. Click [ Change material and surface treatment ].

The Material/Finish dialog is displayed.

2. Select the material.

Hover over the material group name to select the material type.

Tip

Hover over the material name to see a description of the material.
For more information about the material, click here.

3. Select the Surface Finish

Tip

Hover over the Finish name to see the description.
For more information about the Finish, click here.

4. Click [ Determine ].

Setting Customer PO Numbers (Optional)

You can set your own internal control numbers (customer PO numbers).
To facilitate the confirmation of item deliveries, both the part number and the specified customer PO number will be printed on the product label when shipping fabricated FA Mechanical Parts.

Tip

The customer PO number can include up to 54 half-width characters (uppercase or Japanese) and spaces, numerals and symbols (#$%&‘()*+,-./:;=?@_,~).If the parent part number entry field is displayed, you must enter this number (up to 20 characters).
You can still configure settings and make changes after finalizing a quote, but any changes and subsequent price revisions will not be reflected in the project list or 3D Viewer.

Entering Additional Instructions (Optional)

You can enter comments if you have additional instructions you would like to specify.

1. Select [Input].

The [Add Machining Instructions] dialog box will appear.

2. Enter a comment and select [OK].

Caution

If you enter additional instructions, an automatic quote is not possible. Click on the button [Request manual quotation]. Our meviy support will contact you.

Specifying Quantities

You can select a quantity from 1 to 5 under “Quantity”. If you want to order more than 6 pieces, please select “6 or more (input number)” and then enter the number of pieces you want.

Caution

The maximum quantity that can be automatically quoted is 30. If you have selected more than 30, select [Request manual quotation]. A representative will respond with a quote.
The quantity can be changed even after the quotation conditions are confirmed as long as the quantity is within the automatic quotation range.

Check price and delivery date by quantity

You can check the price and delivery date for each quantity in the “Price list by quantity”.

Selecting Holes to Modify

Double-click the hole you want to modify in the 3D Viewer or tree view.

3D Viewer

Tree view

Selecting and Updating Hole Types

In the displayed [Hole information indication] dialog box, select the hole type and click [Update].

Caution

Be sure to check the hole type in the 3D viewer or tree view.

Precision holes are not automatically recognized. Please be sure to specify them.
Depending on your 3D CAD software, the recognition of hole types may vary.
If both a tapped and straight hole type is possible, it will be recognized as a tapped hole.

Tip

The accuracy of hole type recognition can be improved by configuring the [Automatic Recognition of hole type] settings in [User Settings]. → Quotation Procedure
Hole type changes are applied to a whole group, so if you would like to specify a different hole type for each hole in the group, you first need to Splitting Group Holes.
The precision of straight holes can be modified by changing the hole diameter tolerance type.

Specifying the shape of the bottom of the hole

In the [Hole Information] dialog, click “Flat Bottom of Hole” and click [Update].

Caution

You can check the hole bottom shape in the hole information box, the hole specification on the 3D viewer, and in the tree view.

Specifying the hole bottom shape does not change the model on the 3D viewer.
Tapped holes, insert holes, pilot holes, slotted holes, and countersunk holes cannot specify a hole bottom shape.
If a hole of Φ5 or less is specified as flat bottom, a mark from the drill tip may remain due to processing constraints. (See Figure 1)
If the shape of the hole bottom is not specified, the finished hole bottom may be conical due to processing restrictions even if the modeled hole bottom is flat and vice versa.

Tip

If you specify the bottom of a straight hole as flat, the hole depth tolerance can be set.

Specifying Hole Depth Tolerance or Effective Depth Tolerance

In the Hole Information dialog box, select a hole depth tolerance or an effective depth tolerance, and then click Update.

Caution

If a hole depth tolerance is set for a blind straight hole, the hole bottom shape is automatically specified as flat.

Adding Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances

You can add dimensions and dimensional tolerances. You can also add dimensional tolerances to the initial display.

Click and then click 2 points (center of a hole, center of the arc of a slotted hole, a face, or side) to which you want to add dimensions.
Click where you want the dimensions to be displayed.

Finalize the position where the dimensions will be displayed.
The [Add Dimension] dialog box will be displayed.

Tip

By selecting

and clicking [OK] in the displayed dialog box, you will be able to batch add coordinate dimensions based on the origin point.

3. Select a dimensional tolerance from the drop-down menu.

If the desired tolerance is not listed, specify the tolerance using [Free Input].

Deleting Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances

You can delete dimensions and tolerances that you no longer require by using the 3D viewer tool “Delete settings”.

Click

and then click the dimensions you want to delete.

Notes

Initial display information such as the external dimensions and hole information cannot be deleted.
Select [Delete all settings] in the [Delete settings] dialog box to delete all settings except that which is part of the initial display.

What is adding dimensions and dimensional tolerances in batch?

This feature allows you to add dimensions and tolerances from the origin to all holes of the same type.

■Adding dimensions in batch

■Adding dimensional tolerances in batch

The origin can be used as the reference point

In meviy, the origin can be set as one of the 8 blank vertex corners or a precision hole.

Dimensions and tolerances can be set all at once from holes to the selected origin.

■When the origin is one of the 8 vertex corners

■When the origin is a precision hole

Notes

How to change the origin: Change a Design’s Origin

Hole types for batch dimensioning

Batch dimensions and tolerances for holes can be added by selecting the hole type. (Multiple selections are possible)
You can also set different tolerance values for each selected hole type.
For example, if you only select Precision Hole, dimensions and tolerances will be added from the origin to precision holes only.
*Select all hole types to add dimensions to all holes.

*”Other” holes are not eligible for batch dimensioning

Tip

If any of the steps in a stepped hole are a precision hole, the entire stepped hole is considered a precision hole.

Add batch dimensions only to holes

Dimensions can be added all at the same time.

1. Click .

The Add Dimensions and Tolerances dialog box is displayed.

Add Dimensions and Tolerances in Batch Dialog:

2. Click Add Dimensions Only.

The content of the dialog box will change.

3. Select the hole type you want to add dimensions to.

Dimensions will be added from the origin for all selected hole types.

Tip

If you select all, dimensions will be added to all holes.

4. Click .

Only the dimensions are added to the model in batch.

Specify the hole type and add dimensions and tolerances

Dimensions and dimensional tolerances can be added at the same time for a selected hole type.

1. Click .

The Add Dimensions and Tolerances dialog box is displayed.

Add Dimensions and Tolerances in Batch Dialog:

2． Select the hole type you want to add dimensions to.

Dimensions and dimensional tolerances from the selected hole type to the origin can be added all at the same time.

3. Set tolerance values.

Click Select and choose a tolerance value from the drop-down.
If the desired tolerance value is not listed, please enter it in “Free Input”.

Notes

If General Tolerance is selected, then only dimensions will be added.

Tip

Changing the tolerance value you previously set will automatically check . Using this feature allows you to save the tolerance value you set, eliminating the need to re-enter it next time.
*If you do not wish to save it, please uncheck the box.

4. Click .

Only the dimensions are added to the model in batch.

Add angular dimensions and angular tolerances

1.Click

and click the two ‘surfaces’ to which you want to add dimensions.

2. Click where you want to display the dimensions.

The display position of the dimensions is determined.
The [Add angular dimension] dialogue box appears.

Notes

Even if you press

, angular dimensions will not be added.

3. Select the angular tolerance value you want to set from the pull-down menu.
If you do not have a desired tolerance, please specify it in the ‘Free input’ field.

Delete angular dimensions and angular tolerances

If you accidentally add dimensions or if dimensions are no longer needed, you can delete them.

Click

, then click the dimension you want to delete.

Reselect the angle you want to display

If you want to change the viewing angle after the dimension is placed, you can choose again.

1. Click on below ‘Reselect angle’.

Once again, you will be able to select the position of the dimensions you want to display.

2. Click the position of the angular dimension you want to set.

The display position of the dimensions is confirmed.
The tolerance values set before changing the viewing angle are carried over.

Surface roughness can be set.

Add Surface Roughness, Grind, and Finefinish

１．Select from the icons at the top of the model viewer. You can also use the shortcut key (R) to select it.

２．Select the surface for which you want to set the roughness. Selectable surfaces are highlighted in blue when you hover the mouse over them.

Caution

Surfaces that are not selectable are indicated by the icon as below when the mouse is hovered.

３．Select the area where the surface roughness is to be specified and click "OK. To set the same surface roughness on multiple surfaces, select the surfaces to be specified consecutively and click "OK".

４．Select the surface roughness value.

５．Different processing options are available.

Grind
Finefinish

You can choose between these options.

Caution

Some options may not be available depending on the material. A relief shape may be required for grinding.

６．Follow the dialog, select a value and click "Update".

７．The added surface roughness can be viewed on the 3D model and tree view.

８．To change the specified surface roughness, click the surface roughness symbol in the tree under details or on the viewer to display the surface roughness dialog box and update the settings.

Caution

It is not possible to change the surface roughness of multiple surfaces at once.

Delete surface roughness

１．Select from the icons at the top. You can also use the shortcut key (D) to select it.

２．The message "Click the setting you want to delete." is displayed. Then select the surface roughness that you want to delete. When you hover a cursor on it, the corresponding surface roughness will glow blue. It would be deleted after you click it.

Caution

Please note that clicking the “Delete all settings” button will delete all settings you have defined.

３．Delete process was completed. Press Esc key or click × button to exit from the Delete settings.

How to set up an engraving

STEP1　Select icon

Select the Icon from the icons above.
You can also use the shortcut key (E).

STEP2　Engraving area selection

Select the surface on which you want to set the engraving.
When you hover the mouse pointer over a selectable surface, the surface is highlighted.

STEP3　Engraving specification setting

Enter the text you wish to engrave.
To specify part number engraving, click “Add Part Number”. A temporary part number (MVBLK-XXX-XXX-XXX-XXX) will be issued and displayed in the 3D Viewer.
The position the text size and the angle of the engraving can be moved. Click on “Update” after you have entered the text.”

Caution

Characters that can be entered in the dialog are single-byte alphanumeric characters and some symbols (+-. #$%&()=*:? /_~).

The complete part number will be displayed after you click “Confirm the quotation conditions”.

STEP4　Completion of engraving

You can see the specified engraving on the 3D viewer model and in the tree view.

How to delete

STEP1　Select icon

Select the icon from the icons above.
You can also use the shortcut key (D).

STEP2　Select engraving

The message “Click on Delete settings” is displayed. Then select the engraving you wish to delete. the corresponding engraving glows blue.
It will be deleted by clicking.

Caution

Please note that clicking the “Delete all settings” button will delete all settings you have defined.

STEP3　Finish deleting

Deletion finished.

STEP4　End of settings deletion

Press the Esc key or the X button to exit Delete settings.

In meviy, holes that exist on the same surface and have the same diameter and depth are treated as a group.

Hole type is determined per group, so if you would like to specify a different hole type for each hole in the group, you need to split the group.

Click and select the grouped holes.
Select the holes you want to split from the group. The selected holes will be highlighted in blue. You can select multiple holes to split from the group.
Click [Split].

The selected holes will be separated from the group.
After splitting, you can change the hole types and hole diameter tolerances of each hole.

Caution

Separated holes cannot be re-grouped.

Datum and geometric tolerances can be set.

How to set datum

STEP１

Select from the icons at the top.

STEP2

Select the surface for which needs to be set the datum. The target area will be highlighted.

Caution

In the following cases, the datum cannot be set and the button cannot be clicked.
– The parts have a pocket(s) (excluding C-chamfer and fillet surfaces)
– Any of the external dimensions is less than 10 mm
– Any of the external dimensions is more than 300 mm
Datum settings are not available for shapes, such as those containing pocket shapes within the part.

If the surface is not selectable, the “Not Selectable” icon will be displayed when the mouse hovers over it.

STEP3

Select the datum symbol and click "Update".

Tip

Click the “Geometric Tolerance Settings” button to proceed to the settings.
*The settings up to this step will be temporarily saved.
Reference>>>How to set geometric tolerance STEP2

Caution

– The following five letters of the alphabet are not displayed.
I: To be mistaken for the number 1
O: To be mistaken for the number 0
Q: To be mistaken for the number 9
V: To be mistaken for the letter U
T: To be mistaken for the geometric tolerance ⊥ (squareness)
N: To be mistaken for the number 2 or the letter Z when it is placed vertically
Z: To be mistaken for the number 2 or the letter N when it is placed vertically

STEP4

Once a datum symbol is set, the datum symbol can be seen on the screen and in the tree view.

How to set geometric tolerances

STEP1

Select from the icons at the top. It can also use the shortcut key (G) to select it.

STEP2

Select the surface which needs to be set the geometric tolerances. The target area will be highlighted.

Caution

If the surface is not selectable, the “Not Selectable” icon will be displayed when the mouse hovers over it.

STEP3

Select a geometric tolerance symbol. The symbol can be chosen from Parallelism, Flatness, or Squareness. When it has completed the selection, click the "Update" button.

Tip

Even if the datum settings have not been completed, you can specify another datum by clicking the “Datum Settings” button at the bottom left.
*The settings up to this step will be temporarily saved.

Tolerance values that can be entered are as follows.

geometric tolerance	Icon	Tolerance range
Parallelism		0.02～0.99
Flatness		0.02～0.99
Squareness		0.02～0.99

*Clicking the trash can symbol will delete the entered geometric tolerance setting.

Maximum size	Minimum value that can be set	Guaranteed value
~100mm	0.02 mm or less	0.02 mm or less
~200mm	0.02 mm or less	0.04 mm or less
~300mm	0.03 mm or less	0.09 mm or less
~400mm	0.05 mm or less	0.2 mm or less

Caution

A datum is required to specify parallelism and squareness. Please identify them after setting the datum.
The same geometric tolerance cannot be duplicated on the same surface.

STEP4

If you need symbols for geometric tolerances and tolerance values, click the "Update" button after completing the selection of datum.

Tip

If you press the “Select next surface” button without pressing Update, you can set a new geometric tolerance on another surface.
*The settings up to this step will be temporarily saved.

STEP5

After updating the geometric tolerance settings, you can see the geometric tolerance symbol on the screen and tree view.

How to delete datum / geometric tolerances

STEP1

Select from the icons at the top.

STEP2

The message "Click on delete settings" is displayed. Select the geometric tolerance/datum which you want to delete. the corresponding geometric tolerance/datum will glow blue. It will be deleted when you click it.

Caution

Please note that clicking the “Delete all settings” button will delete all settings you have defined.

STEP3

Deletion is complete.
Press the Esc key or the × button to finish deleting the datum/geometric tolerance dimension.

You can change the font size of the PMI display.

Click . The Change Viewer Font Size dialog box will be displayed.
Change the size and click [OK]. You can specify any font size between 1 and 200.

If not specified, the origin (the icon on the model) will be used as the machining reference and the general tolerances will be guaranteed.
On the meviy platform, the origin is the point of intersection between the TOP-FRONT-LEFT. You can change the origin to the vertex of the outer dimensions and the center of a precision hole.

Click . Areas to which the origin point can be moved will be highlighted in light blue.
Select the location to which you want to move the origin point.

The place to where you move the origin point will be used as the machining reference and the general tolerances will be guaranteed.
If you move the origin point to a precision hole, the initial origin point will be used as the machining reference, except where it is on a face that is adjacent to the new origin position.

This function allows measurement of models uploaded.

Screen introduction of measurement functions

This section introduces the various windows that appear after the measurement function is executed.

The function can measure three types of values: distance, R-value, and angle.

Click the icon
The following procedures are available depending on the items to measure.

– To measure the distance
→If you select the two points (highlighted in yellow-green) you wish to measure, XYZ will be displayed in a window respectively.
-If you want to measure R value
→If you hover the mouse over the elements to measure (edges and faces of the model), the R-value will be displayed in the window when the element selected that is highlighted in light blue.
– To measure angles
→If you hover the mouse over the elements to measure (edges and faces of the model),
select the two elements that are highlighted in light blue and the angles will be displayed in the window.

	Item name	Details
①	Measurement icon	Activate the measurement function
②	Measurement mode switching window	Switch between the maximum and minimum distance
③	Measurement window by element	The window displaying information about the measured element
④	Selected Objects	Using to select the center point or central axis of a hole
⑤	Measurement component line	Displaying the measurement target by measurement mode, and the XYZ component is also displayed as a line segment at the same time.

Measurement icon

An icon used to measure various elements of the model
Shortcut key is activated by “Shift+M”.

Measurement mode switching window

Function to switch between longest and shortest distance measurements for selected elements

Longest distance	Shortest distance

Measurement window by element

Window displaying information about the object to be measured and the numerical values of the decomposed XYZ components

Distance measurement	R-value	angle

Selected Objects

Various elements are displayed that can select the element need to measure

Tip

Sphere object	Center point of the R edge
Cylindrical object	Central axis of a curved surface

Measurement component line

Displays the XYZ components that configure the measured distance in mm

Tip

Black line	Measurement result
Red line	X direction component
Green line	Y-direction component
Blue line	Z direction component

This function exports the shapes and dimensions displayed on the 3D Viewer to 2D DXF format.
*The generated .dxf version is AutoCAD 2018 DXF (*.dxf).
*The frame is MISUMI’s standard frame.
*File naming rule: The file name is attached by the Part Number.

Caution

Please note that the information contained within the DXF drawing frame is provided in English.

How to download 2D DXF files

STEP 1　Finalizing Quotation Conditions

To download the ‘2D DXF’ file, you must finalise the quotation conditions and confirm the part number.
Once the Part Number is confirmed, the “2D DXF” icon will be activated and you can select it.

STEP 2　Select 2D DXF

Select from the icons at the top.
You can also select it with the shortcut keys (Shift + X).

STEP 3　Selection of projection method and paper size

Select the projection method and paper size, and click the generate button.

STEP 4　Generating DXF file

Please wait a moment while generation is completed.
Even while generating, you can close the dialogue box and perform other operations.

STEP 5　DXF file download

Once the DXF file is generated, it will be available for download.
If you change the projection method and paper size, you can regenerate it.

Caution

If you regenerate, it will return to the state of STEP 4 on this page.
The scale of this drawing will be automatically adjusted to fit the drawing frame of the paper size. Please check the scale within the drawing frame.


3D Viewer Models, Simplified 2D Diagrams	2D DXF

*About 2D DXF engraving expression

When outputting engravings in 2D DXF format, please be advised that the representation differs from that in the 3D Viewer model and simplified 2D drawings.
“Set engraving“

If there is a possibility that the machined plate may break or become distorted, a message will be displayed in the precaution.You can view and check the affected location where the break or distortion is expected to occur using the 3D Viewer. If you select [Accept] on the approval message, you will be able to use the automatic quotation function. However, if you select [Decline], the automatic quotation function will not be available.

Confirming Approvals

When you click a message in the precaution, the affected area will be highlighted in the 3D Viewer.

Hover over the message to see the details.

Selecting [Accept] or [Decline] on Approval Messages

1. Click the message in the precaution.

The Approval Message dialog box will then be launched.

2.Select [Accept] or [Decline].

You can also process all approval messages in one go.
If you select [Accept] for all approval messages, you will be able to use the [Finalize Quote] button.

Tip

If you decline an approval message, you will still be able to request a quote from meviy support.

What are Mirror Parts?

A pair of symmetrical parts with a reference part called the original or main part and another part referred to as the mirror or symmetrical part.
meviy refers to the reference part as the “original part” and the generated part as the “mirror part”.

Common Designation	meviy Designation
Original part or drawing, main part, standard component	Original parts
Mirror part, symmetrical part, non-standard component	Mirror Parts

Generate Mirror Parts

1. Click “Generate Mirror Part” checkbox in the Basic Information section

2. Click “Confirm the quotation conditions”

Check the part number of the mirror part

1. Click on the “Mirror Parts” section in the parts list or click “Confirm part number” under basic information to check the part number of the mirror part.

2. The model view and part number of the mirror part will be displayed.

Tip

The part number of the mirror part is the part number of the original part followed by “-M”.

Part	Part number example
Original parts	MVBLK-SSN-123-ABCDE
Mirror Parts	MVBLK-SSN-123-ABCDE-M

3. A project for the generated mirror part is added to the project list.

Tip

The project name for the generated mirror part has “_mirror” appended to the end.

Precautions

The model displayed on the 3D viewer for the mirror part is identical to the original part.
The product is manufactured by mirroring the original part about the YZ plane passing through the origin.

Product image of original part	Product image of mirror part

*On the meviy 3D viewer, the model of the mirror part will not be reversed.

The specifications of the mirror part cannot be changed (material, dimensional tolerance, hole type, etc.).
Mirror parts cannot be generated for part numbers that have already been issued.
To generate a mirror part, please reissue the part number of the original part.
Manual quotations are not available.
Depending on the shape and material, tool marks (cutting marks) may remain, but the tool marks on mirror parts may be different from the original parts (they will not be reversed left to right).

Engraving service is not available for mirror parts.
Large parts (over 600mm in length or 400mm in width) are not available for mirror parts.
Flat bar materials (EN 1.0038 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.1191 equiv. (flat bar), EN 1.4301 equiv. (flat bar), EN AW-6063 equiv. (flat bar)) are not available for mirror parts.
Ultra-fast delivery service (1 day to ship) is not available for mirror parts.

Check the price and delivery time, and if there are no issues, finalize the quote, obtain the part number, and check the quote.

Finalizing Quotes and Obtaining Part Numbers

1. Click "Confirm the quotation conditions" to check price and shipping days.

2. Part number will be issued to the quoted part.

Caution

If a 3D file you have uploaded contains multiple parts, please issue part numbers for each part that you want to order.

Checking Quotes

1. Return to the project list and add the parts you want to your product list to check the quotation results.

2.Open product list and check the quotation results.

Change the quotation

1. Change the inquiry conditions.

2. Click "Confirm the quotation conditions".

You can use the following keyboard shortcuts while using the 3D Viewer (default settings):

Tip

You can change the shortcuts to better suit the 3D software you are using in [Mouse Navigation Settings] under [User Settings]. → User Settings

Functions and Operations		Keyboard Input

	Designate Design Origin	O
	Add Dimensions	W
	Add Dimensions in Batch	[Shift] + W
	Delete settings	D
	Hide dimensions	[Shift] + H
	Split Grouped Holes	S
	Surface roughness / Grind	R
	datum	[Shift]+G
	geometric tolerances	G
	Engraving	E

Functions and Operations		Keyboard Input
	Measurement	M
	Increase font size	[Alt] + ↑
	Reduce font size	[Alt] + ↓
	Simple 2D Drawing	[Shift] + C
	Fit to screen	[Ctrl] + F
	Isometric view	[Ctrl] + I
	Zoom-in on part	[Ctrl] + ↑
	Zoom-out from part	[Ctrl] + ↓

Even if an automatic quotation is not available on meviy, you can get a quotation using Manual quotation.
Please check the following and then feel free to make a request.

What is Manual quotation?

This is a process whereby a manual quotation will be reviewed and issued through meviy support when an automatic quotation is not available on meviy.
You can request a manual quote for the following: higher quantitiesinstructions in the comment field Holes which are marked as “Others”.
Usually you will receive an answer within 1-2 working days.
* More days may be required in the event that the materials are difficult to procure.

How to Request a Quotation

The “Request manual quotation” button will display when the manual quotation is available.
Please click it to make a request.

Comment Field (Additional Instructions)

Machining instructions for sheet metal parts are supported.
Click [Input] and fill in the displayed input field, then click [OK].

Caution

Machining instructions for machined plates will not be accepted.
Enter hole instructions in the next item, “Other Holes.”

Enter Hole Information for "Other" Holes

Holes for which [icon]　is selected in Hole information instructions for machined plates are recognized as “Other Holes.”
Text can be entered in the free-entry field for other holes.
Fill in hole information (Hole type, Hole diameter, effective depth, etc.) within 30 characters or less, then click [Update].

Caution

If the hole information provided is insufficient, the quotation will be declined to prevent discrepancies between the quotation conditions.

Canceling a Manual Quotation

The quotation request can be cancelled until meviy support has responded.
If the conditions have changed or the quotation is no longer needed, click “Cancel manual quotation” to cancel the request.
To request a new quotation after cancellation, click “Request manual quotation” again.

Quotation Succeeded

In addition to receiving an email from meviy support, the amount, days to ship, and part number will be displayed on the 3D viewer.
Also, “Message from meviy support” will be displayed if conditions are included in the quotation. Click “Confirm” to review the details.

Quotation Failed

If the quotation is declined by meviy support, a message will be added in Precaution and a detailed email will be sent to your registered email address. Please check the details.
Click “Set Quotation Conditions again” to return to where you were prior to requesting a manual quotation, where settings can be changed and a manual quotation can be requested again.

Manual Quotation Unavailable

A manual quotation cannot be requested if there is no “Request manual quotation” button.
Shape recognition may have failed. Please check the model shape and other relevant details.
If you have any questions, please feel free to contact us via mail
meviy-usa@misumiusa.com

Manual Quotation Experience Record

The following is a record of manual quotations have experience handling, and also elements that are not supported.
Production feasibility is determined on a case-by-case basis, even for parts that include elements that we have experience handling. The request will be declined if it is not possible to fulfill it.

Machined Plates

For hole specifications, please specify hole size and other details in Other Holes.

	Have experience with	Unsupported elements

Quantity	Large-quantity order	–
Shipping days	–	Specified shipping days
Size	Length 2,000 mm	–
Tolerance and precision	–	Geometric tolerance specifications
	–	Surface roughness specifications
	–	Tolerance specifications for areas where dimensions cannot be added on meviy
	–	Tolerance range specifications of 0.04 or lower (except for fitting holes)
	–	Gloss specifications
Material type and surface treatment	–	Material type and surface treatments not selectable for automatic quotation
	–	Basecoat specifications
	–	Film thickness specifications
	–	Partial surface treatment specifications
Heat treatment and hardness	–	Heat treatment
Heat treatment and hardness	–	Hardness specifications
Holes	Metric threads not covered by automatic quotation	Left-hand thread
	Tapered threads for pipes	Unified thread
	Straight threads for pipes	Hole depth tolerance specifications
	Flat hole base specifications	Angled hole running diagonal to the 6 faces on meviy
	Non-selectable fit tolerance	–
Machining method	–	Welding
	–	Fusion cutting
	–	Simultaneous machining
	–	Degreasing
	–	Specifications without light chamfering
Parts	–	Mirror geometry
Certification documents	Mill test certificate (similar lots)	Cutting certificates
	SDS	RoHS certificates
		Inspection sheets

This function allows you to automatically add position dimensions and dimensional tolerances from the origin to precision holes when uploading a model.

It is a useful feature that requires no setup operations.

What is automatic addition of dimensions and tolerances?

This feature automatically adds position dimensions and tolerances from the origin to precision holes when uploading a model.

*To use this feature, CAD color attribute linkage or hole attribute linkage settings are required.（Reference：Automatic hole/inner diameter type Recognition）

■Position dimensions from origin to precision hole

■Position dimension tolerance from origin to precision hole

How to use this feature

Set up the CAD color attribute linkage or hole attribute linkage in User Settings.

For detailed instructions, please refer to the user manual page at the link.（Reference：Automatic hole/inner diameter type Recognition）

■Color attribute linkage

■Hole attribute linkage

To use this feature you must first register your user settings.

■STEP1： Select [ Automatic addition of dimensions and tolerances ] in the user settings.

■STEP2： Select “Set Tolerances” or “Add Dimensions Only”.

Notes

If you want dimensional tolerances to be set, click Set Tolerances.
If you only want to add dimensions, select Add dimensions only.

■STEP3： If you selected “Set Tolerances”, choose the tolerance value.

Notes

If you selected Add Dimensions Only, you cannot select tolerance values.

■STEP4： Click “Save Settings”.

After registering your user settings, upload your model to meviy.

■STEP5： Upload your model to meviy.

Caution

*Please upload models created in CAD using color attributes or hole attributes.

■STEP6： Click “Next” to enter the quotation screen.

When you enter the quotation screen, the position dimension tolerance registered in the user settings is automatically set.

Precaution

To use this function, you need to set up CAD color attribute linkage or hole attribute linkage.（Reference：Automatic hole/inner diameter type Recognition）
If you upload a model with more than 100 precision holes, this feature will not work.

How to set up Through Hardening

STEP1

Click “Through Hardening” in Details section.

STEP2

When the type of hardening is specified in the [Through Hardening instruction] dialog box, the standard hardness is displayed in the “Hardness (HRC)” field.

If you want to specify a hardness other than the standard hardness, enter a lower limit and upper limit in the “Hardness (HRC)” input box.

Finally, click the “Update” button.

Available hardness settings by material

Material	Standard hardness	Selectable hardness range (HRC)
EN 1.2379 equiv.	HRC58-63	HRC50-63
EN 1.7220 equiv. (Reference Hardness: 26-32HRC	HRC50-55	HRC30-55
EN 1.1206 equiv.	HRC35-45	HRC30-50
EN 1.1191 equiv.	HRC30-40	HRC30-45
DC53 ® (Daido)	HRC58-63	HRC50-63
EN 1.1545 equiv.	HRC58-63	HRC58-63
EN 1.2510 equiv.	HRC58-63	HRC58-63

When specifying a hardness range, there must be 5 (HRC) or more between minimum and maximum values. Example: HRC40-45
When specifying a minimum hardness, only the lowest value for the desired hardness (HRC) must be entered.
When specifying a minimum hardness, the value entered can be up to 5 HRC less than the maximum allowable hardness value. Example: For EN 1.2379 equiv., HRC58-
*Hardness (HRC) is guaranteed to be above the minimum specified hardness value.

Tip

The minimum hardness specification is selected by entering only the minimum value for the desired hardness (HRC).

Tip

Click here for Hardening Quality Standards
Reference>>>Quenching Quality Standards

STEP3

The change to the hardening selection can be confirmed in the “Basic Information” section next to “Heat Treatment” .

Tip

If the material is changed after selecting Through Hardening, the hardness will automatically change to the standard hardness of the material after the change.
Reference>>>How to set up Through Hardening STEP2

Step 1: Upload the 3D CAD data

1. Upload "Data" or a whole "Folder" by dragging and dropping.
Alternatively, you can select upload with the "New quotation" button.

Notes

Display Project List
Processing method automatically selected

(1) Awaiting setting of “Quotation conditions” in the 3D viewer.
(2) Part number issued, and ordering enabled.

When selecting the processing method

(3) Both “machined plate” and “sheet metal” confirmation items exist in the 3D viewer.
(4) There is a “machined plate” confirmation item, but “sheet metal” cannot be selected.
(5) Neither “machined plate” or “sheet metal” can be selected.
(6) “Confirmation item” is in the 3D viewer.
　 * If a machining method with (3) or (4) is selected, change to (6).

2. Click [Next.]

Step 2: Configure/update quotation conditions

The following settings are available for Turning Parts.

Material
Surface Treatment
Heat Treatment
Quantity
Availability of center hole

Additionally, in the 3D viewer settings such as “thread”, “tolerance,” and “surface roughness” can be set.

Step 3: Finalize (obtaining part number/ confirm quotation)

Click [Confirm the quotation conditions] and obtain the part number.

Step 4: Add to Shopping cart

After the part number is issued, select the shipping date and click the [Add to cart] button.

Step 5: Check the Shopping cart and order.

Please select the parts you wish to order, click the “Proceed to order” button, and place your order on the MISUMI website.

(1) 3D Viewer

You can edit models for uploaded 3D data. Models can be edited in largely the same way as with CAD software.
→「Keyboard Operations」

(2) Parts list

Projects selected on the Project List will be displayed.

(3) Precautions

Error messages, warning messages and messages from the meviy operator are displayed in a list.

(4) Basic information

You can specify the material, surface treatment and heat treatment. You can also specify whether or not to include a center hole and whether or not to specify an individual customer order number.

(5) Details

Displays overall part dimensions, hole information, and surface roughness. Double-click “Information” to display the dialog box, where you can change conditions.

(6) Detail other additional information in the comment field.

Additional requests or inquiries such as additional machining instructions that cannot be configured on meviy can be detailed.
Check here for how to use the comment field > “Manual quotation in comment field“

Caution

If you require additional processing, automatic quote is not available. Select [Request manual quotation]. The person in charge will reply to you with a quote later.

(7) Part number issuing area

A list is displayed with prices, delivery dates and issued part numbers according to the desired quantity and basic information.
The button changes depending on the status, you can confirm the terms of the offer, request a manual quote or add the selected component to your shopping cart.

(1) Toolbar

(2) Cube

(3) Menu

(4) PMI

(1) Toolbar

The names of each tool and what you can do with these tools are specified below.

Function Name	What You Can Do
Designate Design Origin	Move the design’s origin point. → Change a Design’s Origin
Add Dimensions	Add dimensions and dimensional tolerances. → Add/Remove Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances
Add Dimensions in Batch	Batch add coordinate dimensions based on the origin point. → Add/Remove Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances *This function is not available when a precision hole is set as the origin.
Delete settings	Remove added dimensions. → Add/Remove Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances
Hide dimensions	Hides dimensional tolerances guaranteed by “Default General Tolerance Standards for Machined Dimensions.”
Split Grouped Holes	You can split holes grouped during shape recognition. → Splitting Grouped Holes

Function Name	What You Can Do
Surface Roughness	You can set the Surface Roughness. → Setting Surface Roughness of unspecified area
Datum	You can set the datum. → Set datum and geometric tolerances
Geometric Tolerance	You can set the geometric tolerance. → Set datum and geometric tolerances
Engraving	Add engraving. → Set engraving
Measurement	This function allows measurement of models uploaded. → Measuring 3D models
Change font size	You can change the font size of the PMI display. → Changing Font Sizes
Simple 2D Drawing	Download image files that capture each orthogonal direction of the 3D models and arrange them via 3rd angle projection.
2D DXF	You can generate and output 2D DXF data after the model number is confirmed. → Download 2D DXF files

(2) Cube

Rotate the cube to change the orientation of the currently displayed parts. Click

[Isometric View] to return to the isometric view (default orientation).

(3) Menu

Hovering the mouse over the “Menu” button brings up a menu that allows you to toggle the display of the 3D model and show/hide text information in the 3D viewer.
Here you can change the 3D model display method and toggle between displaying or hiding text information in the 3D viewer.

(4) PMI

PMI is an abbreviation of Product Manufacturing Information and refers to textual information for dimensions and holes. The position of the PMI display can be moved by dragging.

Selecting Materials and Surface Treatments

1. Click [ Change material and surface treatment ].

The Material/Finish dialog is displayed.

2. Select the material.

Hover over the material group name to select the material type.

Tip

Hover over the material name to see a description of the material.
For more information about the material, click here.

3. Select the Surface Finish

Tip

Hover over the Finish name to see the description.
For more information about the Finish, click here.

4. Click [ Determine ].

Select Heat Treatment (Through Hardening or Surface Hardening)

Click here for instructions for specifying Through Hardening
Click here for instructions for specifying Surface Hardening

Caution

Heat treatment selection is only available for turning parts.

Specify whether center hole should be machined or not.

You can specify the surface without center holes from three options: Both Sides, Left Side and Right Side. The PMI display is as follows.

Options	PMI display
Center hole grinding
Remove center holes (Both Sides)
Remove center hole (Left Side)
Remove center hole (Right Side)

Setting Customer PO Numbers (Optional)

You can set your own internal control numbers (customer PO numbers).
To facilitate the confirmation of item deliveries, both the part number and the specified customer PO number will be printed on the product label when shipping fabricated FA Mechanical Parts.

Tip

The customer PO number can include up to 54 half-width characters (uppercase or Japanese) and spaces, numerals and symbols (#$%&‘()*+,-./:;=?@\_,~). If the parent part number entry field is displayed, you must enter this number (up to 20 characters).
You can still configure settings and make changes after finalizing a quote, but any changes and subsequent price revisions will not be reflected in the project list or 3D Viewer.

Specifying Quantities

You can select a quantity from 1 to 5 under “Quantity”. If you want to order more than 6 pieces, please select “6 or more (input number)” and then enter the number of pieces you want.

Caution

The maximum quantity that can be automatically quoted is 200. If you have selected more than 200, select [Request manual quotation]. A representative will respond with a quote.
The quantity can be changed even after the quotation conditions are confirmed as long as the quantity is within the automatic quotation range.

Check price and delivery date by quantity

You can check the price and delivery date for each quantity in the “Price list by quantity”.

Update Hole Information
Straight hole
Tapped hole
Insert Holes

Caution

Be sure to check the hole type in the 3D Viewer or Details.
→Automatic Hole Type Recognition

Update Hole Information

1. Double click either "Value" in Details, or the applicable "Dimensions" or "Hole" from the 3D viewer.

Tip

Hole type is determined per group, so if you would like to specify a different hole type for each hole in the group, you need to first split grouped holes.

2. In the displayed [Hole information instructions] dialog box, select the hole type and click [Update].

Hole types are “Straight”, “Tapped(mm)”, “Tapped(inch)” or “Insert.”

Straight hole

Hole Diameter Tolerances are “Fit Tolerance,” “Tolerance on both sides,” and “Tolerance on one side.”

Tapped hole

If the hole diameter is applicable for a standard, “Tapped” will be displayed in hole type.

See here for the tapped hole standards table

Notes

If there is only one option for “Size (D),” this will be greyed out.
If there are multiple options, a pull-down list will be displayed.

Insert Holes

If the hole diameter is applicable for a standard, “Insert” will be displayed in hole type.

See here for the insert hole standards table

Notes

If there is only one option for “Size (D),” this will be greyed out.
If there are multiple options, a pull-down list will be displayed.

Adding Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances
Deleting Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances

Adding Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances

You can use the 3D viewer “Add Dimensions” tool to both add new dimensions, and to set tolerances for added dimensions.

1. Click , and then click 2 points (hole centre, centre of the arc of a slotted hole, a face, or side) to which you want to add dimensions.

2. Click where you want the dimensions to be displayed, and decide the position.

3. Select the dimensional tolerance from the displayed [Add Dimensions] dialog box, and click [Update].

You can select from “Tolerance on both sides,” “Tolerance on one side,” or “Free input.”

Tip

Diagonal dimensions can be added to the holes.

*Side holes are not supported.

Deleting Dimensions and Dimensional Tolerances

You can delete dimensions and tolerances that you no longer require by using the 3D viewer tool “Delete settings”.

1. Click , and then click the dimension you want to delete.

Notes

Initial display information such as the external dimensions and hole information cannot be deleted.
Select [Delete all settings] in the [Delete settings] dialog box to delete all settings except that which is part of the initial display.

Update Outer Diameter Information
Outer Diameter Information Designation Dialog (Outer Diameter/Outer-most Diameter)
Thread and Tolerance Settings

Update Outer Diameter Information

You can select the target from Details or the 3D viewer, and change the outer diameter information.

1. Double click either “Value” in Details, or the applicable “Dimensions” or “Face” from the 3D viewer.

2. Selecting this changes the model position to the TOP orientation direction and displays a dialog.

3. Configuration of “Thread Settings” and “Tolerance Settings” is possible.

Outer Diameter Information Designation Dialog (Outer Diameter/Outer-most Diameter)

The dialog has two types—”Outer Diameter” and “Outer-most Diameter.”

Outer Diameter Information Designation

Machining is only possible from one side, so “Length” settings from one side are displayed.
*Areas that can have “Length” adjusted are highlighted in light blue

Outer-most Diameter Information Designation

Machining is possible from both sides, so “Length” settings from both sides are displayed.
*Areas that can have “Length” adjusted are highlighted in light blue

Thread and Tolerance Settings

Details of the dialog are as follows.

Outer-most Diameter Information Designation

(1) Highlighted section “Diameter” information
(2) Highlighted section “Length” information
(3) 3D viewer left side/right side linkage
(4) “Length” that can be set from the left side/right side

Thread Settings

(5) “External Thread (mm)/External Thread (inch)” can be selected.
(6) Applicable size can be selected.
(7) Threads for (4) can be set.
(8) All threads can be set.
(9) Left-hand/right-hand threads for (4) can be set.
*External Thread (inch) is only compatible with right-hand threads.

Tolerance Settings

(10) “General Tolerance,” “Fit Tolerance,” “Tolerance on both sides,” “Tolerance on one side” can be selected.
*Tolerances apply to the area excluding the threaded part.

Outer Diameter Information Designation

(1) Highlighted section “Diameter” information
(2) Highlighted section “Length” information
(3) 3D viewer left side/right side linkage
(4) “Length” that can be set

Thread Settings

(5) “External Thread (mm)/External Thread (inch)” can be selected.
(6) Applicable size can be selected.
(7) Threads for (4) can be set.
(8) All threads can be set.
(9) Left-hand/right-hand threads for (4) can be set.
*External Thread (inch) is only compatible with right-hand threads.

Tolerance Settings

(10) “General Tolerance,” “Fit Tolerance,” “Tolerance on both sides,” “Tolerance on one side” can be selected.
*Tolerances apply to the area excluding the threaded part.
(11) You can specify the radius of the cylindrical corner.
*Please refer here for notes on finishing.

Update Inner Diameter Information
Inner Diameter Information Designation Dialog (Blind/Through)
Internal Thread and Tolerance Settings
Straight (tolerance) settings
Insert settings

Update Inner Diameter Information

You can select the target from Details or the 3D viewer, and change the inner diameter information.

1. Double click either "Value" in Details, or the applicable "Dimensions" or "Face" from the 3D viewer.

2. Switch from the TOP position direction to the cross-section display.

In the internal diameter information display dialog, you can select from “Straight,” “Internal Thread,” or “Insert.”

Notes

If within “Internal Thread” or “Insert” standards, the option will be displayed.

See here for the applicable insert standards table

Click here to cancel the automatically switched cross-sectional view

Inner Diameter Information Designation Dialog (Blind/Through)

The dialog has two types—”Blind” and “Through.”

Blind

Machining is only possible from one side, so “Depth” settings from one side are displayed.
*Areas that can have “Depth” adjusted are highlighted in light blue

Through

Machining is possible from both sides, so “Depth” settings from both sides are displayed.
*Areas that can have “Depth” adjusted are highlighted in light blue

Internal Thread and Tolerance Settings

Details of the dialog are as follows.

Internal Thread Settings

(1) Highlighted section “Diameter” information
(2) Highlighted section “Depth” information
(3) 3D viewer left side/right side linkage
(4) “Depth” that can be set from the left side/right side

(5) “Internal Thread (mm)/Internal Thread (inch)” can be selected.
(6) Thread size can be selected.
(7) Thread depth for (4) can be set.
(8) All threads can be set.
(9) Left-hand/right-hand threads for (4) can be set.

None (tolerance) settings

(1) Highlighted section “Diameter” information

(2) Highlighted section “Depth” information

(3) 3D viewer left side/right side linkage

(4) “Depth” that can be set from the left side/right side

(5) Inner diameter type (None)
(6) “General Tolerance,” “Fit Tolerance,” “Tolerance on both sides,” “Tolerance on one side” can be selected.
(7) You can specify tolerances.
(8) Effective depth for (4) can be set.
(9) Full length designation can be set.
(10) You can specify the radius of the cylindrical corner.
*Please refer here for notes on finishing.

Insert settings

(1) Highlighted section “Diameter” information
(2) Highlighted section “Diameter” information
(3) 3D viewer left side/right side linkage
(4) “Depth” that can be set from the left side/right side

(5) Inner diameter type “Insert”
(6) Size can be selected.
(7) Nominal length for (4) can be set.
(8) Right-hand threads for (4) can be set.

Update Outer Diameter Keyway Information
Update Slotted Hole Information
Update Inner Diameter Keyway Information

Update Outer Diameter Keyway Information

If the groove width matches JIS standards (B 1301:1996), this is recognized as a keyway.

Technical Information > “Keyway Recognition Conditions”

1. Double click either "Value" in Details, or the applicable "Dimensions" or "Face" from the 3D viewer.

2. Select the tolerance from the displayed [Slotted hole/outer diameter keyway information instruction] dialog box, and click [Update].

Update Slotted Hole Information

If the groove width does not match JIS standards (B 1301:1996), this is recognized as a slotted hole.
Technical Information > “Keyway Recognition Conditions”

1. Double click either "Value" in Details, or the applicable "Dimensions" or "Face" from the 3D viewer.

2. Select the tolerance from the displayed [Slotted hole/outer diameter keyway information instruction] dialog box, and click [Update].

Update Inner Diameter Keyway Information

If the groove width matches JIS standards (B 1301:1996), this is recognized as a keyway.

Technical Information > “Keyway Recognition Conditions”

1. Double click either "Value" in Details, or the applicable "Dimensions" or "Face" from the 3D viewer.

2. Select the tolerance from the displayed [Inner diameter keyway information instruction] dialog box, and click [Update].

Notes

If the groove width does not match JIS standards (B 1301:1996), this is handled as “General tolerance” and tolerance cannot be selected.

Update Surface Roughness

1. Double-click "Surface Roughness" in Details.

2. Select the "Type" and "Value" from the displayed "Surface Roughness" dialog box, and click "Update".

Notes

The following “Type” and “Value” can be selected.

Type	Ra	Rz	▽
Value	3.2	12.5	▽▽
Value	6.3	25

3. The Details and the 3D viewer surface roughness are changed.

Add Surface Roughness
Delete Surface Roughness

Add Surface Roughness

1. Click , select the applicable surface, then click "OK."
Multiple applicable surfaces may be selected.

Tip

The

icon displays “Cannot be selected.”

2. Select the "Value" from the displayed [Specified surface roughness] dialog box, and click [Update].

*Surface roughness with a different “Type” cannot be specified.

Notes

The same “Value” as “Type” can be selected for the surface roughness.

Type	Ra	Rz	▽
Value	1.6	6.3	▽▽▽
Value	3.2	12.5	▽▽

3. The added surface roughness can be checked in the 3D model or in Details.

Delete Surface Roughness

1. Click [IMAGE] Delete PMI, and select the surface roughness to delete.

2. Deletion is complete. Press the Esc key or the × button to end Delete PMI.

Caution

Please note that clicking the “Delete all settings” button will delete all settings you have defined.

How to set up Through Hardening
How to Delete Through Hardening
How to set up Surface Hardening
How to Delete Surface Hardening

How to set up Through Hardening

STEP1

Click “Through Hardening” in Details section.

STEP2

When the type of hardening is specified in the [Through Hardening instruction] dialog box, the standard hardness is displayed in the “Hardness (HRC)” field.
If you want to specify a hardness other than the standard hardness, enter a lower limit and upper limit in the “Hardness (HRC)” input box.
Finally, click the “Update” button.

Hardness by material

	Standard hardness (HRC)	Selectable hardness range (HRC)
EN 1.1191 equiv.	40-45	30-45
EN 1.7220 equiv.	35-40	30-45
EN 1.7220 equiv. (26 to 32 HRC)	50-55	30-55
EN 1.2510 equiv.	58-63	40-63
EN 1.2379 equiv.	58-63	50-63
EN 1.2344 equiv.	50-55	40-55
EN 1.3505 equiv.	58-63	35-63
EN 1.4125 equiv.	55-60	45-63

*Hardness (HRC) is guaranteed to be above the minimum specified hardness value.

Tip

The minimum hardness specification is selected by entering only the minimum value for the desired hardness (HRC).

Tip

Conventional Hardening and Vacuum Hardening are different hardening methods. The finished appearance will differ.
Reference>>>Quenching Quality Standards

STEP3

The change to the hardening selection can be confirmed in the “Basic Information” section next to “Heat Treatment” .

Tip

If the material is changed after selecting Through Hardening, the hardness will automatically change to the standard hardness of the material after the change.
Reference>>>How to set up Thorough Hardening STEP2

How to Delete Through Hardening

STEP1

Click “Through Hardening” in Details section.

STEP2

Select “None” and click Update.

STEP3

Deletion process was completed.

How to set up Surface Hardening

STEP1

Click “Surface Hardening” in Details section.

STEP2

“Select the surface to be used as the datum reference.
The selected surface will be highlighted.”
Only outer diameter surfaces can be selected.

Caution

If the surface is not selectable, the “Not Selectable” icon will be displayed when the mouse hovers over it.

STEP3

By default, “Total Length” is selected. This specifies the total length of the selected surface for hardening. Click “Update”.

Notes

You can also specify the start and end position of hardening.

Right side start position	Left side start position

Notes

①Multiple ranges can be specified at multiple locations within the same surface.

②A specified range can be deleted by clicking the trash can and then clicking “Update”.
③The “Next Surface” button can be used to continue specifying hardness ranges for the next surface.
Reference>>>How to set up Surface Hardening STEP2

STEP4

After updating, the Surface Hardening settings will appear in the model view and tree view.

How to Delete Surface Hardening

STEP1

Select from the icons at the top of the screen.
The shortcut key (D) can also be used.

Tip

Surface Hardening can also be deleted by double-clicking the note on the model view.
Reference>>>How to set up Surface Hardening STEP3

STEP2

Deletion process was completed.
Press the Esc key or the x button when finished.

How to set datum
How to set geometric tolerances
How to delete datum / geometric tolerances

How to set datum

STEP１

Select from the icons at the top.
It can also use the shortcut key (Shift＋G) to select it.

STEP2

Select the surface for which needs to be set the datum.
The target area will be highlighted.
Only turned surfaces and end faces can be selected. (Cannot be selected for pockets, holes, or keyways.)
In addition, when a geometric tolerance is specified on a threaded feature, it is applied to the measured value of the feature before threads are machined.

Caution

If the surface is not selectable, the “Not Selectable” icon will be displayed when the mouse hovers over it.

STEP3

Select the datum symbol and click "Update".

Tip

Click the “Geometric Tolerance Settings” button to proceed to the settings.
*The settings up to this step will be temporarily saved.
Reference>>>How to set geometric tolerance STEP2

Caution

– The following five letters of the alphabet are not displayed.

I: To be mistaken for the number 1
O: To be mistaken for the number 0
Q: To be mistaken for the number 9
V: To be mistaken for the letter U
T: To be mistaken for the geometric tolerance ⊥ (squareness)
N: To be mistaken for the number 2 or the letter Z when it is placed vertically
Z: To be mistaken for the number 2 or the letter N when it is placed vertically

STEP4

Once a datum symbol is set, the datum symbol can be seen on the screen and in the tree view.

How to set geometric tolerances

STEP１

Select from the icons at the top.
It can also use the shortcut key (G) to select it.

STEP2

Select the surface which needs to be set the geometric tolerances.
The target area will be highlighted.
Only turned surfaces and end faces can be selected. (Cannot be selected for pockets, holes, or keyways.)
In addition, when a geometric tolerance is specified on a threaded feature, it is applied to the measured value of the feature before threads are machined.

Caution

If the surface is not selectable, the “Not Selectable” icon will be displayed when the mouse hovers over it.

STEP3

Select a geometric tolerance symbol and tolerance value.

Tolerance values that can be entered are as follows.

	Flat surface	Cylindrical face	Datum
Flatness	〇	–	–
Parallelism	〇	–	Required
Perpendicularity	〇	〇	Required
Circularity	–	〇	–
Concentricity	–	〇	Required
Straightness	–	〇	–
Cylindricity	–	〇	–
Circular runout	–	〇	Required
Total runout	–	〇	Required

Tip

You can specify a new datum by clicking the “Set Datum” button in the lower left corner, even if you have not completed datum settings.
*The settings up to this step will be temporarily saved.

STEP4

If you need symbols for geometric tolerances and tolerance values, click the "Update" button after completing the selection of datum.

Tip

If you press the “Select next surface” button without pressing Update, you can set a new geometric tolerance on another surface.
*The settings up to this step will be temporarily saved.

STEP5

After updating the geometric tolerance settings, you can see the geometric tolerance symbol on the screen and tree view.

How to delete datum / geometric tolerances

STEP１

Select from the icons at the top.
It can also use the shortcut key (D) to select it.

STEP２

The message "Click on delete settings" is displayed. Select the geometric tolerance/datum which you want to delete.
The corresponding geometric tolerance/datum will glow blue.
It will be deleted when you click it.

Caution

Please note that clicking the “Delete all settings” button will delete all settings you have defined.

STEP3

Deletion is complete.
Press the Esc key or the × button to finish deleting the datum/geometric tolerance dimension.

How to set up an engraving

STEP1　Select icon

Select the Icon from the icons above.
You can also use the shortcut key (E).

STEP2　Engraving area selection

Select the flat or cylindrical surface where you want to specify engraving.
When you hover the mouse pointer over a selectable surface, the surface is highlighted.

STEP3　Engraving specification setting

Enter the text you wish to engrave.
To specify part number engraving, click “Add Part Number”. A temporary part number (MVTUP-XXX-XXX-XXX-XXX) will be issued and displayed in the 3D Viewer.
The position the text size and the angle of the engraving can be moved. Click on “Update” after you have entered the text.”

Caution

Characters that can be entered in the dialog are single-byte alphanumeric characters and some symbols (+-. #$%&()=*:? /_~ø).

The complete part number will be displayed after you click “Confirm the quotation conditions”.

Tip

①From the engraving angle, you can change the direction of engraving on a cylindrical surface.

Tip

②From the engraving position, you can change the location of the engraving on the cylindrical surface.

STEP4　Completion of engraving

You can see the specified engraving on the 3D viewer model and in the tree view.

How to delete

STEP1　Select icon

Select the icon from the icons above.
You can also use the shortcut key (D).

STEP2　Select engraving

The message “Click on Delete settings” is displayed. Then select the engraving you wish to delete. the corresponding engraving glows blue.
It will be deleted by clicking.

Caution

Please note that clicking the “Delete all settings” button will delete all settings you have defined.

STEP3　Finish deleting

Deletion finished.

STEP4　End of settings deletion

Press the Esc key or the X button to exit Delete settings.

In meviy, holes that exist on the same surface and have the same diameter and depth are treated as a group. Hole type is determined per group, so if you would like to specify a different hole type for each hole in the group, you need to split the group.

Click and select the grouped holes.
Select the holes you want to split from the group. Multiple holes may be selected.

3. The selected holes will be highlighted in blue, so click [Split].

The selected holes will be separated from the group.
After splitting, you can update the different hole types and hole diameter tolerances.

Caution

Split holes cannot be re-grouped.

1. Click . The Change Viewer Font Size dialog box will be displayed.

2. Change the size and click [OK]. You can specify any font size between 1 and 200.

If not specified, the origin (the icon on the model) will be used as the machining reference and the general tolerances will be guaranteed.
On the meviy platform, the origin is the point of intersection between the left surface and the central axis. The origin can be changed to the point of intersection between the left surface or right surface, and the central axis.

Click . Areas to which the origin point can be moved will be highlighted in light blue.
Select the location to which you want to move the origin point. The place to where you move the origin point will be used as the machining reference and the general tolerances will be guaranteed.

To Measure Distance
To Measure Diameter/Radius (R value)
To Measure Angle
Screen introduction of measurement functions

To Measure Distance

Select the two points to measure, and the XYZ distance will be displayed in the window.

1. Click
2. Select the two points to measure.

- (1) Measurement icon
- (2) Selected object
- (3) Measurement window for each element
- (4) Switch measurement method window
- (5) Measurement component line

To Measure Diameter/Radius (R value)

Select the edge and face to measure, and the diameter/radius (R value) will be displayed in the window.

1. Click
2. Select the edge and face to measure.

- (1) Measurement icon
- (2) Selected object
- (3) Measurement window for each element (diameter/radius (R value))

To Measure Angle

Select the edge and face to measure, and the angle will be displayed in the window.

Click
Select the edge and face to measure.

- (1) Measurement icon
- (2) Selected object
- (3) Measurement window for each element (angle)

Screen introduction of measurement functions

Measurement icon

An icon used to measure various elements of the model
Shortcut key is activated by “Shift+M”.

Selected Objects

Various elements are displayed that can select the element need to measure

Tip

Sphere object	Center point of the R edge
Cylindrical object	Central axis of a curved surface

Measurement window by element

Window displaying information about the object to be measured and the numerical values of the decomposed XYZ components

Distance measurement	R-value	angle

Measurement mode switching window

Function to switch between longest and shortest distance measurements for selected elements

Longest distance	Shortest distance

Measurement component line

Displays the XYZ components that configure the measured distance in mm

Tip

Black line	Measurement result
Red line	X direction component
Green line	Y-direction component
Blue line	Z direction component

This function exports the shapes and dimensions displayed on the 3D Viewer to 2D DXF format.
*The generated .dxf version is AutoCAD 2018 DXF (*.dxf).
*The frame is MISUMI’s standard frame.
*File naming rule: The file name is attached by the Part Number.

Caution

Please note that the information contained within the DXF drawing frame is provided in English.

How to download 2D DXF files

STEP 1　Finalizing Quotation Conditions

To download the ‘2D DXF’ file, you must finalise the quotation conditions and confirm the part number.
Once the Part Number is confirmed, the “2D DXF” icon will be activated and you can select it.

STEP 2　Select 2D DXF

Select from the icons at the top.
You can also select it with the shortcut keys (Shift + X).

STEP 3　Selection of projection method and paper size

Select the projection method and paper size, and click the generate button.

STEP 4　Generating DXF file

Please wait a moment while generation is completed.
Even while generating, you can close the dialogue box and perform other operations.

STEP 5　DXF file download

Once the DXF file is generated, it will be available for download.
If you change the projection method and paper size, you can regenerate it.

Caution

If you regenerate, it will return to the state of STEP 4 on this page.
The scale of this drawing will be automatically adjusted to fit the drawing frame of the paper size. Please check the scale within the drawing frame.

Agreements Authorization

If you select “Accept” on the agreements, you will be able to use the automatic quotation function. If you select “Do Not Accept,” please contact meviy Support to request a quote.

1. In "Precautions," click [Check.] The appropriate location will be highlighted, and the [Agreements] dialog box will then be launched.

2. Select [Accept] or [Do not accept].

You can also process all agreements in one go.
If you select [Accept] for all agreements, you will be able to click the [Confirm Quote] button.

Finalizing Quotes and Obtaining Part Numbers

1. Click "Confirm the quotation conditions" to check price and shipping days.

2. Part number will be issued to the quoted part.
Part numbers for turning parts start with "MVTUP."

Checking Quotes

1. Return to the project list and add the parts you want to your shopping cart to check the quotation results.

2.Open shopping cart and check the quotation results.

Change the quotation

1. Change the inquiry conditions.

2. Click [Delete Part Number].

3. Click [Confirm the quotation conditions].

Shortcuts

Functions and Operations		Keyboard Input
	Designate Design Origin	O
	Add Dimensions	W
	Add Dimensions in Batch	[Shift] + W
	Delete settings	D
	Hide dimensions	[Shift] + H
	Split Grouped Holes	S
	surface roughness	R
	Measurement	M
	Datum	[Shift]+G
	Display Cross Section	[Shift] + S

Functions and Operations		Keyboard Input
	Geometric tolerances	G
	Engraving	E
	Increase font size	[Alt] + ↑
	Reduce font size	[Alt] + ↓
	Simple 2D Drawing	[Shift] + C
	2D DXF	[Shift] + X
	Fit to screen	[Ctrl] + F
	Isometric view	[Ctrl] + I
	Zoom-in on part	[Ctrl] + ↑
	Zoom-out from part	[Ctrl] + ↓
	Through Hardening	Q
	Surface Hardening	[Shift] + Q

Editing 3D Model

Operating methods to match types of CAD can be changed in user settings.

Applicable CAD programs are as shown below.

・SoildWorks
・CATIA
・Creo
・IRONCAD
・Siemens PLM-NX
・iCAD
・Autodesk Inventor
・Autodesk Fusion

What is Manual quotation?
Manual quotation in comment field

Even if an automatic quotation is not available on meviy, you can get a quotation using Manual quotation.
Please check the following and then feel free to make a request.

What is Manual quotation?

This is a process whereby a manual quotation will be reviewed and issued through meviy support when an automatic quotation is not available on meviy.
You can request a manual quote for the following: higher quantities instructions in the comment field which are marked as “Others”.
Usually you will receive an answer within 1-2 working days. More days may be required for long,heavy, large-quantity orders, or difficult machining.

How to Request a Quotation

The “Request manual quotation” button will display when the manual quotation is available.
Please click it to make a request.

Comment Field (Additional Instructions)

Click [Input] and fill in the displayed comment field, then click [OK].

Canceling a Manual Quotation

The quotation request can be cancelled until meviy support has responded.
If the conditions have changed or the quotation is no longer needed, click “Cancel manual quotation” to cancel the request.
To request a new quotation after cancellation, click “Request manual quotation” again.

Quotation Succeeded

In addition to receiving an email from meviy support, the amount, days to ship, and part number will be displayed on the 3D viewer.
Also, “Message from meviy support” will be displayed if conditions are included in the quotation. Click “Confirm” to review the details.

Quotation Failed

Reasons this is not possible will be either sent in an email from meviy, or displayed in a “Message from meviy Support.” Click “Confirm” to review the details.
Also, “Message from meviy support” will be displayed if conditions are included in the quotation. Click “Confirm” to review the details.

Manual Quotation Unavailable

A manual quotation cannot be requested if there is no “Request manual quotation” button.
Shape recognition may have failed. Please check the model shape and other relevant details. If you have any questions, please feel free to contact us via mail
meviy-usa@misumiusa.com

Manual quotation in comment field

Able to Process

	Able to Process
Quantity	Multiple quantity range (2 pcs. & 5 pcs. & 15 pcs. & 50 pcs., etc.)
Size	Long product with total length 1~3m *You need to dispose the wooden pallet and receive the product by forklift. Please write your delivery address in the comment field when requesting a manual quote to calculate the shipping fee. Click here for more details about delivery packing.
Machining Method	Specify surface roughness of tapered surface
Machining Method	Tears/through not possible indication
Certification documents	Request for enclosure of mill sheet for similar lots
Certification documents	SDS enclosure requested

Not Able to Process

	Not Able to Process

Tolerance and precision	Dimensional tolerance with other parts instructions
	Tolerance specifications for areas that cannot be specified in meviy
	Hole depth tolerance settings for other than inner diameter
Material type, surface treatment, finish	Materials and surface treatment that cannot be selected in meviy.
	Base processing specifications
	Gloss specifications
	Film thickness specifications
	Partial surface treatment specifications
	Degreasing
	Cleaning
	Buffing
	Multiple materials quotation request
Heat treatment and hardness	Heat treatment that cannot be selected in meviy.
Thread	Trapezoid threaded
Thread	Specifications of thread inserts in materials other than resin and aluminum
Machining Method	Fusion cutting
	EDM (Electrical Discharge Machining)
	Laser
	Simultaneous machining
	Chamfered thread (edge) instruction
	Knurling
	Blast instruction
	Mirror instruction
Certification documents	Inspection sheets
Certification documents	RoHS certificates

Quotation Settings for Turning Parts
Add Dimensions
Tapped hole
Precision Holes
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Internal Thread
Groove Outer Diameter
Groove Inner Diameter
Slotted Holes/Keyways
Internal Keyway

Quotation Settings for Turning Parts

Configure materials, surface treatments and surface roughness (roughness, symbol) for initial quotations.

User Settings Screen

Basic Information and Details

Add Dimensions

Set dimensional tolerances for added dimension locations. Tolerances can be set within the dialog (pull-down list).

User Settings Screen

3D Viewer

Tapped hole

The initial display effective depth (h) of the tapped hole can be changed in the “Hole information instructions” dialog.

User Settings Screen

3D viewer dialog

Tip

“Effective Depth (h)” Calculation Method and Display Method

1D	If size (D) is M6, initial value is 1 × 6, 6 mm
1.5D	If size (D) is M6, initial value is 1.5 × 6, 9 mm
2D	If size (D) is M6, initial value is 2 × 6, 12 mm
2.5D	If size (D) is M6, initial value is 2.5 × 6, 15 mm
Full length	Model depth = 16.14 mm

Precision Holes

You can change the tolerance range, frequently used tolerance ranges, effective depth, surface roughness (none/present) displayed in the “Indicate hole information” dialog list.

User Settings Screen

3D viewer dialog

Tip

(6) “Effective Depth (h)” calculation method and display method

1D	If diameter is ø6, initial value is 1 × 6, 6 mm
1.5D	If diameter is ø6, initial value is 1.5 × 6, 9 mm
2D	If diameter is ø6, initial value is 2 × 6, 12 mm
2.5D	If diameter is ø6, initial value is 2.5 × 6, 15 mm
Full length	Model depth = 16.14 mm

Outer Diameter

You can change the tolerance range and frequently used tolerance ranges displayed in the “Maximum diameter/outer diameter information instructions” dialog list.

User Settings Screen

Dialogfeld 3D-Viewer

Inner Diameter

You can change the tolerance range and frequently used tolerance ranges displayed in the “Inner diameter information instructions” dialog list.

User Settings Screen

Dialogfeld 3D-Viewer

Internal Thread

You can change Thread depth and Thread direction displayed in the “Inner diameter information instructions” dialog list.

User Settings Screen

Dialogfeld 3D-Viewer

Tip

“Effective Depth (h)” Calculation Method and Display Method

1D	If size (D) is M9, initial value is 1 × 9, 9 mm
1.5D	If size (D) is M9, initial value is 1.5 × 9, 13.5 mm
2D	If size (D) is M9, initial value is 2 × 9, 18 mm
2.5D	If size (D) is M9, initial value is 2.5 × 9, 22.5 mm
Full length	Model depth = 50 mm

Groove Outer Diameter

You can change the tolerance selected in the “Add groove outer diameter dimensions dialog.”

User Settings Screen

Dialogfeld 3D-Viewer

Groove Inner Diameter

You can change the tolerance selected in the “Add groove inner diameter dimensions dialog.”

User Settings Screen

Dialogfeld 3D-Viewer

Slotted Holes/Keyways

You can change the tolerance range and frequently used tolerance ranges displayed in the “Slotted hole/keyway information instructions dialog” list.

User Settings Screen

Tip

If the groove width matches JIS standards (B 1301:1996), this is recognized as a keyway.

If the groove width does not match JIS standards (B 1301:1996), this is recognized as a slotted hole.

See here for the keyway standards table

Internal Keyway

You can change the frequently used tolerance ranges displayed in the “Inner diameter keyway information instructions” dialog list.

User Settings Screen

Tip

If the groove width matches JIS standards (B 1301:1996), this is recognized as a keyway.

If the groove width does not match JIS standards (B 1301:1996), this is handled as “General tolerance” and tolerance cannot be selected.

See here for the keyway standards table

There are two ways you can make an order:

To place an order directly on the MISUMI site
(For example, if the part-number issuer and buyer are different)

If you know the part number, you can order through the On the MISUMI site.

Order on the MISUMI site

1. Log in to Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog) and click “Order.”

2. Fill in the required fields and click the “Next” button.

Tip

The part number can be confirmed from the [Product Sheet (PDF)] or [Parts List (CSV)].

Parts List

Product Sheet

Caution

If you do not have authorization to order, you will not be able to proceed to the order screen.

Notes

Click here for details on how to make an order after logging in. →”On the MISUMI site Place an order”

Order on the MISUMI site

Ordering from meviy
(For example, if you are a designer and have your own projects)

If you have uploaded models to meviy in the past and have confirmed quotations (part numbers have been generated), you can log in to meviy and make an order for each model.

Ordering through meviy

1. On the home page, click "Start now" to display the login screen. Enter your MISUMI user ID and password and click "Log in."

2. Select the project you would like to purchase and add it to the cart.

3. Open the cart and click “Proceed to order.”

Notes

Click here for details on how to make an order after logging in. → “Ordering from meviy”

Ordering through meviy

Ordering procedure from the MISUMI website

To place an order for a part on the order list, click on “Proceed to Order” to access Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog) order entry screen.

Notes

You can issue a quotation by clicking on the [Proceed to Quotation Confirmation/ Issue Quotation] link. You can also download a quotation sheet (PDF) or a parts list (CSV file) by clicking on [Quotation Sheet (PDF)], [Parts List (CSV)].

Tip

If the person handling purchases on meviy is different from who made the quote, download the CSV file in the [Parts List (CSV)]. →“Ordering catalog parts together with parts quoted on meviy“

Ordering catalog parts together with parts quoted on meviy

Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog) allows you to order catalog parts and parts quoted on meviy at the same time. If you want to order catalog parts and parts quoted on meviy at the same time, downloading and processing the meviy quote data makes it easy.

1. Download as CSV Data

Download the quote details from meviy as CSV data.

2. Save the File

Open the CSV data, add the required information including part number, quantity, etc., for the parts that you want to order, then save the file.

3. Upload the CSV File

Go to Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog) and select [Quote] or [Order] under [CSV import] to upload the CSV file.

4. Order

Follow the instructions on the Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog) page to complete the order.

Order parts with confirmed quotes.

Order from product list

To order the parts you have added to your cart, click the “Proceed to order” button. You will be taken to the order entry screen on the MISUMI site, where you can place your order.

Tip

You can click [Product List (PDF)] or [Parts List (CSV)] to download them.

Confirm Order

Click [Confirm Order].

Caution

Once an order is confirmed, it cannot be changed or canceled. Please check carefully before placing your order (meviy Terms of Service).
The shipping date is set as the earliest available shipping date by default. To change the shipping date, select the desired date from the drop-down menu. The earliest shipping date may vary depending on the part, particularly when ordering multiple parts.

Notes

If you wish to select a different shipping address from the one shown, click [Change Shipping Address].
All registered shipping information will be displayed, so select the desired shipping address.

Order Complete

Your order has been confirmed.

An order confirmation email will be sent to the email address you have registered.

Notes

You can download the order confirmation as a PDF. → “Exporting the Order Confirmation as a PDF“

Products ordered via this service are made to order.

An order that has already been confirmed cannot be changed or canceled under any circumstances.

Please refer to the Terms of Service for information on using this service.

You can download quotes (PDF file) and parts lists (CSV file). When ordering a part quoted on meviy, if the person handling purchases is different from the person who performed the quote, download the parts list and give it to the person making the purchase. You can use a CSV file to order quote parts from Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog) ordering screen.

Tip

Ordering using CSV files is also useful for purchasing catalog parts from Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog) and parts quoted on meviy at the same time. → “Ordering from Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog)”

On the Project List screen, click on "Simple 2D Drawing" ,"Product List(PDF)" or "Parts List(CSV)".

The 2D Drawing, quote or parts list wil begin downloading.

This may be restricted depending on your login ID permissions.

Make a Repeat Order from Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog)

You can also use the part number issued when you placed the initial order to order the part from Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog). Once you have identified the model number as described below, please refer to “Order from Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog)” to place your order.
Open the project that contains the part you want to reorder and check the part number on the 3D Viewer screen.

Tip

You can also download a CSV parts list to check the part numbers for parts quoted on meviy.

FA Mechanical Parts → “Open Quote Confirmation Screen”

The following payment methods are available:
> Invoice
> Paypal

You can download your order details as an order confirmation in PDF format. Order details can be stored on paper for internal storage.

After clicking the icon, please press the ‘Order Confirmation’ button.

The order confirmation will begin downloading.

You can check the history of the date of purchase, model number, and quantity of models.
The project list displays an icon for each model with a purchase history, and when you mouse over the icon, a list of the purchase history for that model is displayed.

①Purchase history icon

A cart icon is displayed for models with a purchase history.
When you mouse over the icon, the purchase history is displayed.

②Purchase History

The purchase history is displayed in a list. The following items are displayed in the dialog box.

Date of purchase
Part number
Quantity

*Even if you have not made a purchase yourself, if there is a purchase from a MISUMI account with the same customer code, the history will be displayed.
Even if there is a purchase of the same part number, the purchase history from a MISUMI account with a different customer code will not be displayed.
*Please note that if the part number changes even for the same model, the purchase history will also be reset.

Import user settings
Export User Settings
Restore user settings to default

All user settings can be changed at once by importing a user settings file.
A user settings file can be created by exporting your current user settings.

This is useful if you want to share settings with other users, or if you want to change settings for a different CAD software or design task.

Import user settings

1. Click “Import Settings” at the bottom right of the User Settings screen.

2. Select the “.mus” file you want to import, and then click “Close” when the message dialog appears.
*Notification settings and part number publication permissions are not included in the import.

3. Click “Save Settings” to complete the import.

Export User Settings

1. Click “Export Settings” at the bottom right of the User Settings screen.

2. Click “Export” when the message dialog box appears. The “.mus” file will be downloaded to complete the export.
* Notification settings and part number publication permissions are not included in the export.

Restore user settings to default

1. Click “Restore to Default Settings” at the bottom right of the User Settings screen.

2. A message dialog will appear, click “Restore to Default Settings” to complete the process.
* All settings, including notification settings and part number publication permissions, which are not included in the import and export process, will be restored to their default settings.

A revision history list for the part number can be displayed in the 3D Viewer for each project.
The list shows the price, surface treatment, ship date, etc. for each part number.

①Part Number Revision History Activation

When a part number is issued more than once for a project, the part number revision history will be activated.
When the link is clicked, the revision history dialog will appear.

②History of issued part numbers

A revision history list for the part number can be viewed.

The dialog displays the following items.

Part Number
Material
Surface treatment
Ship date
Unit price of quantity 1

Caution

The price displayed is the price at the time the part number was finalized.

③Copy part number

Allows you to copy the part number.
The part number can then be pasted into the meviy part number search page to search for available parts or used to place an order.

Notes

About Search function　→　To use the search window
About Order　→　Ordering from meviy
Ordering from Misumi Official Web shop ( E-Catalog)

Publishing issued part numbers that have already been quoted for, or sharing uploaded projects using meviy, allows peripheral users to check the configuration and material properties of parts in the 3D Viewer (view mode). This is helpful for sharing information with other departments or subcontractors.

Tip

Model numbers issued from a shared [FA Mechanical Parts] project for which the publicity settings have already been configured are searchable using the [Part Number Search] in the meviy header. → “Search for a Project”

1. Hover over the user name and click [User Settings] in the [User Menu] that appears.

2. Click [Issued Part Number Permission Settings].

3. Set “Permission to View Issued Part Numbers” to “Publish” and click Change.

“Publish”: The part number issued after quotation is published, allowing anyone to search for the issued part number and view in the 3D Viewer.
“Do not publish”: Only logged-in users can search for published part numbers and view in the 3D Viewer. The default setting is “Do not publish.”

4. Set “Purchasing rights for issued part number” to “Issue a part number that can only be purchased with the same customer code” and click [Save settings].

“Issue a part number that can be purchased by anyone”: After a quote is completed, the part number issued will be made public, and anyone who knows the part number will be able to purchase the product. The default setting is “Issue a part number that can be purchased by anyone”.
“Issue a part number that can only be purchased with the same customer code”: Only users with the same customer code will be able to purchase the part numbers issued after this setting.

You can refine your search to only include projects that have been quoted for in meviy. This is useful for when you want to call up a past project to check 3D models or PMI, and for making repeat orders. There are two different search methods, depending on the scope of your search.

To use the search window

There are three ways to use the search window.

When you select “Project” from the pull-down menu and search for it, the corresponding keyword in the project list will be searched and displayed.

When you select “Part Number” from the pull-down menu and search, the 3D viewer of the corresponding project will open in a separate tab.
On the other hand, if the part number is not found, you will be redirected to the part number search screen in another tab.

Select “Support” from the pull-down menu to search for information in the technical manuals.

To use the part number search screen

１．Click [Part N0. Search] from the user menu in the project list screen.

The meviy part number search screen will appear.

2. Enter the Part Number that you want to search for.

The 3D Viewer screen will appear for the project that includes a perfect match for the Part Number that you entered.

Caution

The [Part Number Search] will only search [FA Mechanical Parts] projects whose Part Numbers have been published. → Publish an Issued Part Number/Share a Project
Only Part Numbers beginning with MV can be searched.

3D models can be rotated and resized using the mouse or keyboard shortcuts.

The default mouse and keyboard commands assigned in meviy can be changed to match the control scheme for any CAD environment. → User Settings

Shapes Eligible for Quotation

Material, Surface Treatment, Size

Material Standards and Materials Used

Types of Hole Machining

Delivery Options

Material Properties

Steel

Stainless Steel

Aluminum

Pre-finished Sheets

Perforated Metal

Transparent Resin Plate

Aluminum composite sheet

Surface Treatment Characteristics

Plating / Plated Steel Color Comparison

Surface Treatment Colors

Steel

Electroless Nickel Plating

Trivalent Chromate(Clear)

Trivalent Chromate(Black)

Black Oxide

Aluminum

Anodize (Clear)

Anodize (Black)

Black Anodize (Matt)

Trivalent Chromate Passivation (SurTec 650)

Anodized Aluminum Sheet, Clear

Anodized Aluminum Sheet, Black

Types of Paint Color

▼Powder Coating

Black

Dark grey

White

Off-white (Full gloss)

Off-white (Half gloss)

Cream

Yellow

Light cream

Light Ivory

Light green

Oyster White

Grey

Cream grey

Light grey

Off-pale grey

▼Painting

Red

Deep Orange

Pebble grey

Pastel blue

Green Beige

Specifications for Edge Breaking

Materials Available for Edge Breaking and Corresponding Edge Break Sizes

Engraving application range

Character size

Character size

Definition of Font Size

Engraving angle

Bending and R-bending with special tools – Overview materials and sizes

Applicable sheet thickness and Radius size for R-bend shapes

■Inner R range that can be feed bent

■R-size conversion table for when Feed bending is not possible.

Applicable materials and surface treatments for R-bend shapes

Shim Plates

Available Shapes for Shim Plates

Materials / Plate Thicknesses for Shim Plates

Parts Available for Clear Resin

Shapes Available in Clear Resin

Materials / Plate Thicknesses Eligible for Clear Resin

Transparent resin manufacturing method and physical properties (reference values)

Clear Resin Materials

Parts Eligible for Composite Sheet

Composite Sheet available shapes

Basic Modeling Rules

Hole Identification Specifications

Countersink Modeling and Selectable Sizes

Modeling Rules for Countersunk Holes

Countersunk Hole Identification

STEP1

STEP2

Minimum Diameter for Through Holes
Minimum Width of Rectangular/Slotted Holes/Other Holes